Home

Basler scout

1. X 0 4 7 center lines of the thread 0 25 AE N o o 3E U 1 HA D 0 4 A gt J d dat io 3 E i I C m Oo o a amp o E A 3 Oo Oo to the length of the housing center lines of the sensor reference plane tolerance to the center of the lens mount optical axis gt front module reference plane tolerance to the reference planes Photosensitive surface of the 0 02 This is the sensor tilt tolerance It applies to every point on the sensor I photosensitive surface and is relative to the center of the die my AF Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle Degrees O UA Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y pmi scA640 70gm gc 0 47 0 63 SCA1390 17gm gc 0 31 0 42 E Mies 2 1 SCA640 74gm gc 0 35 0 47 scA1400 17gm gc 0 25 0 34 SCA640 120gm gc 0 62 0 83 SCA1400 30gm gc 0 25 0 34 H ScA750 60gm gc 0 51 0 80 SCA1600 14gm gc 0 34 0 52 O iN mp ScA780 54gm gc 0 35 0 47 SCA1600 28gm gc 0 34 0 52 O scA1000 30gm gc 0 46 0 63 0 17 5
2. mmr mMmmmore d Fig 89 Various Degrees of Overlap Between the Auto Function AOI and the Image AOI Basler scout GigE 287 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Setting an Auto Function AOI Setting an Auto Function AOI is a two step process You must first select the Auto Function AOI related to the auto function that you want to use and then set the size and the position of the Auto Function AOI By default an Auto Function AOI is set to the full resolution of the camera s sensor You can change the size and the position of an Auto Function AOI by changing the value of the Auto Function AOl s X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters The value of the X Offset parameter determines the starting column for the Auto Function AOI The value of the Y Offset parameter determines the starting line for the Auto Function AOI The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the Auto Function AOI The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the Auto Function AOI When you are setting an Auto Function AOI you must follow these guidelines The sum of the X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed the width of the camera s sensor For example on the scA640 70 the sum of the X Offset setting plus the Width setting must not exceed 659 The sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Heig
3. 235 explained esses 234 Sellilig x25 etit ettet 235 using with DINNING 273 area of interest auto functions explained id nien 285 asynchronous advance 240 asynchronous restart ssse 240 auto function eeseeesesss 283 mode of operation 284 using with DINNING 284 auto function AOI explained tii ires 283 SOWN iioii eine tei ees 288 auto function profile 294 auto functions modes of operation 284 auto functions factory setup 315 317 Basler scout GigE Index B balance white auto 295 bandwidth assigned parameter 58 bandwidth reserve accumulation parameter 59 bandwidth reserve parameter 58 bandwidth managing 64 Bayer BG 12 packed pixel format 207 Bayer BG 16 pixel format 205 Bayer BG 8 pixel format 201 Bayer fillor ect 171 Bayer RG 8 pixel format 203 DINNING un iid rien 271 AOI settings oiiire 273 image distortion 273 reduced resolution 273 response to light 272 Setting i d 272 b
4. sss 118 129 spectral response 12 23 speed and duplex mode parameter 66 squence set address ieri 265 SRGB gamma eee 179 standard factory setup 315 317 319 standard I O cable ssssss 78 startup parameter set 316 320 Start p Set een 320 SUPPOM 42 iiie ire ottiene 340 synchronous advance 240 synchronous restart seese 240 T target value sseeeeeeee 283 technical support esere 339 Basler scout GigE Index temperature ROUSING za enon ag 37 sensor board seessesse 313 test image selector 309 test images oreet 309 time delay time base abs parameter 94 time stamp chunk secre 329 timed exposure mode 121 132 timer delay iere tee a 94 timer delay abs parameter 94 timer delay raw parameter 93 timer delay time scce 93 timer delay time base 94 timer duration seesssseeeesss 95 timer duration abs parameter 96 timer duration raw parameter 95 timer duration time base 95 timer duration time base abs parameter 95 timer selector 93 95 96 timer trigger source parameter
5. 137 exposure time raw parameter 138 extended image data chunk 324 F factory setup seeseesss 315 317 auto functions factory setup 315 color factory setup 315 high gain factory setup 315 standard factory setup 315 feature set i i etse 321 filter drIVel rrira ei 45 Hcc rri a aa i eah 101 frame counter chunk 326 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 KEELE chats lace isd settee cadustabasteiatanaaie 327 frame period sesssesess 59 150 frame rate and AOI size l e 163 controlling with an external trigger signal Te ttes tese red n der EE 131 max allowed eeseesss 163 maximum allowed 167 frame readout time 161 frame retention parameter 46 frame start trigger 102 240 details teen tette etes 114 frame start trigger delay standard mode 122 frame start trigger mode parameter 115 126 frame transmission delay parameter 58 frame transmission time 161 free UN m 141 front module sssssesss 29 functional description 71 G ar 219 SCUING ee ees 220 224 galniauto fii den peii 290 gamma correction ceee 179 H hardware trigger
6. LZLILIJ LEE LLLI Lr ECL LELEI Fig 80 Vertical Binning With horizontal binning adjacent pixels from 2 columns 3 columns or a maximum of 4 columns are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel Figure 81 illustrates horizontal bin ning Horizontal Binning by 2 Horizontal Binning by 3 Horizontal Binning by 4 C1 EG BG BG BID n CODCOD E pD DOD Ei DG BICI BICI D Goo G1 DG OG DIO D EX EXC BO BOI BJ Goo 0 DODO DCDC g COD 0DCDODODCOg J j Ei DG BICI DIC D a d I l G1 Ba oe oe Fig 81 Horizontal Binning Basler scout GigE 271 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 You can combine vertical and horizontal binning This however may cause objects to appear dis torted in the image For more information on possible image distortion due to combined vertical and horizontal binning see below Setting Binning You can enable vertical binning by setting the Binning Vertical parameter Setting the parameter s value to 2 3 or 4 enables vertical binning by 2 vertical binning by 3 or vertical binning by 4 respec tively Se
7. 209 pixel format parameter 194 pixel formats Bayer BG 12 packed 207 Bayer BG 16 iere 205 Bayer BG 8 sese 201 Bayer RG 8 ais tee 203 mono 12 packed 198 MONO TO aco trees 196 mono 8 en 195 215 RGB 8 packed 174 209 YUV 422 YUYV packed 200 213 YUV 422 packed 200 210 pixel size arrei aiaro 2 4 6 8 10 pixel transmission sequence 217 PLC power and I O cable 78 voltage requirements 80 precautions et centes 38 protection class sssss 24 29 pylon Camera Software Suite 43 pylon Viewer eese 43 R read timeout parameter 55 receive descriptors ssesss 65 receive window eeeeeeeennn 47 receive window size parameter 48 reduced resolution 273 resend request batching parameter 49 resend request response timeout parameter 51 resend request threshold parameter 49 resend timeout parameter 51 restart asynchronous sssssssessss 240 synchronous ooien 240 resulting frame rate parameter 62 return material authorization 339 reverse X 4 5 aha aiita 274 RGB 8
8. 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wave Length nm F g 9 scA1400 17 gm and scA1400 30gm Spectral Response 16 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Relative Response Fig 10 scA1600 14gm and scA1600 28 gm Spectral Response Basler scout GigE 1 0 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 h 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 Wave Length nm 700 800 900 1000 17 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO001 1918000 1 4 Spectral Response for Color Cameras The following graphs show the spectral response for each available color camera model The spectral response curves exclude lens characteristics light source characteristics and IR cut filter characteristics To obtain best performance from color models of the camera use of a dielectric IR cut filter is recommended The filter should transmit in a range from 400 nm to 640 660 nm and it should cut off from 640 660 nm to 1100 nm A suitable IR cut filter is included in the standard C mount lens adapter on color models of the camera An IR cut filter is not included in the optional CS mount adapter Relative Response 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 11 scA640 70gc Spectral Response 18 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Specifications Requi
9. Set the mode of operation for balance white auto function Camera BalanceWhiteAuto SetValue BalanceWhiteAuto Once Basler scout GigE 295 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For general information about auto functions see Section 12 9 on page 283 For information about Auto Function AOls and how to set them see Section 12 9 1 2 on page 285 296 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 10 Disable Parameter Limits For each camera parameter the allowed range of parameter values normally is limited The factory limits are designed to ensure optimum camera operation and in particular good image quality For special camera uses however it may be helpful to set parameter values outside of the factory limits The disable parameter limits feature lets you disable the factory parameter limits for certain parameters When the factory parameter limits are disabled the parameter values can be set within extended limits Typically the range of the extended limits is dictated by the physical restrictions of the camera s electronic devices such as the absolute limits of the camera s variable gain control The values for the extended limits can be seen using the Basler pylon Viewer or from within your application via th
10. This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 e e e e e e 0x01 1 0x00 0 Basler scout GigE 209 Pixel Data Formats AWO001 1918000 11 3 6 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 When a color camera is set for the YUV 422 Packed pixel data format each pixel in the captured image goes through a two step conversion process as it exits the sensor and passes through the camera s electronics This process yields Y U and V color information for each pixel In the first step of the process an interpolation algorithm is performed to get full RGB data for each pixel This is required because color cameras use a Bayer filter on the sensor and each individual pixel gathers information for only one color For more information on the Bayer filter see Section 11 3 1 on page 201 The second step of the process is to convert the RGB information to the YUV color model The conversion algorithm uses the following formulas Y 030R 0 59G 0 11 B U 0 17R 0 33G 0 50B V 0 50R 0 41G 0 09B Once the conversion to a YUV color model is complete the pixel data is transmitted to the host PC transfers U values and V values with unsigned integers 128 is added to each U value and to each V value before the values are transferred from the camera This process allows the values to be transferred on a scale that ranges from 0 to 255 D The values f
11. Wave Length nm Fig 18 scA1390 17gc Spectral Response Relative Response 0 0 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 19 scA1400 17gc and scA1400 30gc Spectral Response 22 AW00011918000 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Relative Response wet 400 450 500 550 600 Wave Length nm Fig 20 scA1600 14gc and scA1600 28gc Spectral Response Basler scout GigE 650 700 23 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO001 1918000 1 5 Mechanical Specifications 1 5 4 Standard Housing The camera housing conforms to protection class IP30 assuming that the lens mount is covered by a lens or by the cap that is shipped with the camera 1 5 1 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides ensure precise mounting with high repeatability The dimensions in millimeters for cameras equipped with a standard C mount lens adapter are as shown in Figure 21 The dimensions for cameras equipped with an optional CS mount lens adapter are as shown in Figure 22 24 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the top and four mounting holes on the bottom as shown in the drawings
12. 93 transition threshold 81 transmission start delay 161 trigger delay esseseeesssss 302 acquisition start legacy mode 134 frame start standard mode 122 trigger input counter chunk 331 pL 332 trigger ready signal 122 133 153 trigger width exposure mode 122 133 U use case diagrams 140 242 user configuration set 316 user output selector 90 user output value parameter 90 V ventil tiOD oiii codec t e cs 37 vertical DINNING seesessssss 271 MID 43 voltage requirements 81 W Weight afe ret Rabe ancy hte S 3 5 7 9 f1 white balance ssesesesssss 177 SOUING 2i xg 177 white balance auto 357 Index see balance white auto write timeout parameter 55 Y YUV 422 YUYV packed pixel format 200 213 YUV 422 data range 211 YUV 422 packed pixel format 200 210 358 AW00011918000 Basler scout GigE
13. 2 4 6 8 10 lens thread length 32 line inverter parameter 88 91 line selector 89 152 155 157 160 line source parameter 89 152 155 157 160 line status uev 252 line status all chunk 334 line status parameter 97 lookup table ss 277 280 luminance lookup table 277 280 EU T E tette eret 277 280 LUT enable parameter 279 282 LUT index parameter 279 282 LUT selector oin 279 282 M max frame jitter parameter 61 max frame rate sseesssssse 163 max height parameter 313 max number resend request parameter 51 max width parameter 313 maximum acquisition frame rate 167 355 Index maximum lens thread length 32 minimum output pulse width 92 300 mirror image eeee 274 missing packet detection sssssssseeese 47 SAUS 1 uS 47 models e deta 1 modes of operation of auto functions 284 mono 12 packed pixel format 198 mono 16 pixel format 196 mono 8 pixel format 195 215 mounting holes esssss 25 29 multiple cameras on a network 64 N netwo
14. On these cameras pixel data is acquired at 12 bit depth When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 16 or Mono 12 packed pixel format or a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 16 or the Bayer BG 12 packed pixel format the camera outputs pixel data with 12 effective bits Normally the effective 12 bits transmitted out of the camera for each pixel directly represent the 12 bits reported by the camera s ADC The luminance lookup table feature lets you use a custom 12 bit to12 bit lookup table to map the 12 bits reported out of the ADC to 12 bits that will be transmitted by the camera The lookup table is essentially just a list of 4096 values however not every value in the table is actually used If we number the values in the table from 0 through 4095 the table works like this The number at location 0 in the table represents the effective 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 0 The numbers at locations 1 through 7 are not used The number at location 8 in the table represents the effective 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 8 The numbers at locations 9 through 15 are not used The number at location 16 in the table represents the effective 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 16 The numbers at locations 17 through 23 are not used
15. The Line Status All parameter is a 32 bit value As shown in Figure 44 certain bits in the value are associated with each line and the bits will indicate the state of the lines If a bit is 0 it indicates that Basler scout GigE 97 I O Control AW00011918000 the state of the associated line is currently low If a bitis 1 it indicates that the state of the associated line is currently high Indicates output line 4 state Indicates output line 3 state Indicates output line 2 state Indicates input line 2 state Indicates output line 1 state Indicates input line 1 state 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2019 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 o 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 fo Fig 44 Line Status All Parameter Bits 98 Basler scout GigE 9 Image Acquisition Control This section provides detailed information about controlling image acquisition You will find details about choosing between image acquisition control modes triggering image acquisition setting the exposure time for each acquired image and about how the camera s maximum allowed acquisition frame rate can vary depending on the current camera settings 9 1 Image Acquisition Control Modes Legacy and Standard Two different image acquisition control modes are available the legacy mode and the standard mode Previous Basler scout cameras with firmware version 3 2 and below only operate according to the legacy mode The legacy mode differs from the standard mode in only two respec
16. DCAM Raw 8 RGB 8 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed RGB 8 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 10 bits 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 12 VDC 5 to 24 VDC 5 lt 1 ripple 25W 12V 3 0 W Q 12V 1 0 Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification scA750 60gm gc scA780 54gm gc Size L x W x H standard housing 90 head housing 73 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 91 65 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without front module and connectors 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with front module and connectors Weight standard housing 90 head housing 160 g typical 180 g typical Conformity CE ROHS GenlCam GigE Vision IP30 FCC The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4
17. ExASTrig Signal jJ bo Je Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 51 Timed Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering Note that if you attempt to trigger a new exposure start while the previous exposure is still in progress the trigger signal will be ignored and an Acquisition Start Overtrigger event will be generated This situation is illustrated below for rising edge triggering This rise in the trigger signal will be ignored and an Acquisition Start Overtrigger event will be generated ExASTrig Signal EN Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 52 Overtriggering with Timed Exposure 132 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control For more information about the Acquisition Start Overtrigger event see Section 12 15 on page 306 For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 137 Trigger Width Exposure Mode When trigger width exposure mode is selected the length of the exposure for each frame acquisition will be directly controlled by the ExASTrig signal If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExASTrig signal rises and continues until the ExASTrig signal falls If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExASTrig signal falls and continues until the ExASTrig signal rises The following figure illustrates trigge
18. 138 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 9 7 2 Setting the Exposure Time Using Absolute Settings You can also set the exposure time by using an absolute value This is accomplished by setting the Exposure Time Abs parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us When you use the Exposure Time Abs parameter to set the exposure time the camera accomplishes the setting change by automatically changing the Exposure Time Raw parameter to achieve the value specified by your Exposure Time Abs setting This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you use Exposure Time Abs parameter to set the exposure time That is you must set the Exposure Time Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Exposure Time Raw parameter with the current Exposure Time Base parameter For example if the time base was currently set to 62 us you could use the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter to set the exposure to 62 us 124 us 186 us etc Note that if you set the Exposure Time Abs parameter to a value that you could not achieve by using the Exposure Time Raw a
19. Specification SCA1400 17 gm gc scA1400 30gm gc scA1600 14gm gc Sensor Size gm 1392 x 1040 gm 1392 x 1040 gm 1626 x 1236 H x V pixels gc 1390 x 1038 gc 1390 x 1038 gc 1624 x 1234 Sensor Type Sony ICX285 AL AQ Sony ICX285 AL AQ Sony ICX274 AL AQ Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 2 3 2 3 1 1 8 Pixel Size 6 45 um x 6 45 um 6 45 um x 6 45 um 4 4 um x 4 4 um Max Frame Rate 17 fps 30 fps 14 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s or Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbit s Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed RGB 8 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 12 VDC 5 to 24 VDC 5 lt 1 ripple 35W 12V 4 2 W Q 12V 3 5 W Q 12V 1 0 Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Specifications Requir
20. 2 The event is placed in an internal queue in the camera 3 As soon as network transmission time is available an event message will be sent to the PC If only one event is in the queue the message will contain the single event If more than one event is in the queue the message will contain multiple events a After the camera sends an event message it waits for an acknowledgment If no acknowledgment is received within a specified timeout the camera will resend the event message If an acknowledgment is still not received the timeout and resend mechanism will repeat until a specified maximum number of retries is reached If the maximum number of retries is reached and no acknowledge has been received the message will be dropped During the time that the camera is waiting for an acknowledgment no new event messages can be transmitted 4 Event Reporting involves some further software related steps and settings to be made For more information see the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit 306 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features The Event Queue As mentioned in the example above the camera has an event queue The intention of the queue is to handle short term delays in the camera s ability to access the network and send event messages When event reporting is working smoothly a single event will be placed in the queue and this event will be sent to the PC in an event messag
21. GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize if ChunkParser HasCRC amp amp ChunkParser CheckCRC cerr lt lt Image corrupted lt lt endl For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 337 Chunk Features AWO001 1918000 13 8 Sequence Set Index The Sequence Set Index chunk adds a chunk to each acquired frame containing the index number of the sequence set that was used for frame acquisition The sequencer feature must be enabled before you can enable the sequence set index feature For more information about the sequencer feature see the Standard Features section feature or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the sequence set index disables all chunk features To enable the sequence set index chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Sequence Set Index chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the sequence set index chunk is enabled the camera will add a sequence set index chunk to each acquired image To r
22. The camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status It cannot react to frame trigger signals when in this acquisition status When a software acquisition start trigger signal is received by the camera it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the number of frame start trigger signals received by the camera is equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When a new software acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will again exit from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Note that as long as the Trigger Selector parameter is set to Acquisition Start a software acquisition start trigger will be applied to the camera each time a Trigger Software command is executed 9 4 4 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software acquisition start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execu
23. This tolerance is for the distance between the front of the lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive surface Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance see above must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for every point on the photosensitive surface Fig 26 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for Cameras 90 Head with the Standard C mount Lens Adapter in mm unless otherwise noted Basler scout GigE 31 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000 1 5 3 Maximum Thread Length on Color Cameras The C mount lens adapter on color models of the camera is normally equipped with an internal IR cut filter As shown below the length of the threads on any lens you use with a color camera must be less than 8 0 mm If a lens with a longer thread length is used the IR cut filter will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate 8 0 mm Not to Scale C mount Lens X o IR Cut Filter Lens Adapter Fig 27 Maximum Lens Thread Length on Color Cameras D An internal IR cut filter is not included on color cameras equipped with the optional CS mount adapter C mount color cameras that do not include an internal IR cut filter are available on request Monochrome cameras are not normally equipped with an internal IR cut filter however they can be equipped with an internal filter on requ
24. Trigger Ready Exposure Active Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 Timer 4 You can also designate an output line as user settable If an output line is designated as user settable you can use the camera s API to set the state of the line as desired To assign an output signal to an output line or to designate the line as user settable Use the Line Selector to select Output Line 1 Output Line 2 Output Line 3 or Output Line 4 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to one of the available output signals or to user settable This will set the source signal for the selected line By default the Exposure Active signal is assigned to Output Line 1 and the Trigger Ready Signal is assigned to Output Line 2 You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out1 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource ExposureActive Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out2 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource TriggerReady For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 For
25. p 4 Col4 Row p 4 Colo Row p 4 COl m 2 Row p 1 COl m 1 Row p 1 COI m Row Col p Row Col 4 Row p Col Row Col m 2 Row p Col m 14 Row Col m Where Row g Col y is the upper left corner of the sensor The columns are numbered 0 through m from the left side to the right side of the sensor The rows are numbered 0 through n from the top to the bottom of the sensor The sequence assumes that the camera is set for full resolution Basler scout GigE 217 Pixel Data Formats AWO001 1918000 218 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Standard Features 12 Standard Features This chapter provides detailed information about the standard features available on each camera It also includes an explanation of their operation and the parameters associated with each feature 12 4 Gain The camera s gain setting is adjustable As shown in Figure 70 increasing the gain increases the slope of the response curve for the camera This results in a higher gray value output from the camera for a given amount of output from the imaging sensor Decreasing the gain decreases the slope of the response curve and results in a lower gray value for a given amount of sensor output Increasing the gain is useful when at your brightest exposure a gray value lower than 255 in modes that output 8 bits per pixel or 4095 in modes that output 12 bits per pixels is reached For example if you found that at your brightest exposure the gray values ou
26. 4 7 67 2 is Fig 22 Mechanical Dimensions in mm for Cameras with an Optional CS mount Lens Adapter 26 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 1 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy The sensor positioning accuracy for cameras equipped with a standard C mount lens adapter is as shown in Figure 23 The sensor positioning accuracy for cameras equipped with an optional CS mount lens adapter is as shown in Figure 24 on page 28 0 25 0 75 0 4 lt gt reference plane tolerance to the center of the tolerance to the reference planes lens mount optical axis 0 02 This is the sensor tilt tolerance It applies to every point on the photosensitive surface and is relative to the center of the die Photosensitive surface of the sensor 17 5 996 This tolerance is for the distance between the front of the 4 lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive surface Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance see above must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for every point on the photosensitive surface Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle Degrees Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y SCA640 70gm gc 0 47 0 63 scA1300 32gm gc 0 47 0 63 scA640 74gm gc 0 35 0 47 SCA1390 17gm gc
27. 9 11 1 Exposure Active Signal 0 0 0 ee 152 9 11 2 Acquisition Status Indicator liie 153 9 11 3 Trigger Ready Signal All Models Except scA750 60 153 9 11 4 Trigger Ready Signal scA750 60 Only aaau aana 155 9 11 5 Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal Standard Mode Only 158 9 11 6 Camera Events eiai beta da bie a aa a rn 160 9 12 Acquisition Timing Chart assau aeaaaee 161 9 13 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate All Models Except scA750 60 163 9 14 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate scA750 60 Only 167 10 Color Creation and Enhancement lleesslleess 171 10 1 Color Creation seek Es REIS RU MEAE Y RR ecran 171 10 1 1 Bayer Color Filter Alignment llis nnne 173 10 1 2 Pixel Data Formats Available on Cameras with a Bayer Filter 174 10 2 Integrated IR Cut Filter All Golor Models 34 Stat eed CS eee FA a REL NM 176 10 3 Color Enhancement Features eee 177 TOBE White Balance isi endhySerLSt E eee bee clown eee ees oe oe eee aes 177 10 3 2 Gamma GOTFrectlOns eus abes ee nenes REDE ON R P UPS EP AES 179 10 3 3 Matrix Color Transformation on All Color Models 181 10 3 3 1 The Custom Light Source Setting 00005 183 10 3 4 Color Adjustment 1 0 2 0 2 e 185 10 3 5 A Procedure for Setting the Color Enhancements 190 10 3 6 The Color Fact
28. El 6 El 6 F3 6 E I8 El 6 El I6 RBC CERA ERA ERE ARA ARA ARE ARE gn E i8 El 6 El 6 F3 6 E I8 El I6 El I6 iC CERA ERA ERE ARA ARA ARE EREC gn El i8 El 8 El 6 F3 6 E I8 El I6 El I6 iC CERA ERA ERE ERA ARE ARE Roa gn El i8 El 6 El 6 Fl 6 El 8 El I6 El I6 Fl i6 CERA ERA ERE ARA ARE ARE ARE gn E i8 El 8 El 6 F3 6 El 8 El I6 El I6 iC CERA ERA ERE ERA ARA ARE ARE gn El i8 El 8 El 6 F3 6 E 8 El I6 El I6 iC CERA ERA ERE ERA ARA ARE ARE gn Pixels Fig 67 Bayer Filter Pattern 172 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 1 1 Bayer Color Filter Alignment The alignment of the Bayer filter to the pixels in the images acquired by color cameras is either Bayer BG or Bayer RG depending on the camera model Table 13 shows the filter alignment for each available camera model Color Camera Model Filter Alignment SCA640 70 BG SCA640 74 BG SCA640 120 BG SCA750 60 RG scA780 54 BG scA1000 30 BG scA1300 32 BG scA1390 17 BG scA1400 17 BG scA1400 30 BG scA1600 14 BG scA1600 28 BG Table 13 Bayer Filter to Sensor Alignment Bayer BG alignment means that pixel one and pixel two of the first line in each image transmitted will be blue and green respectively And for the second line transmitted pixel one and pixel two will be green and red respectively Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed you can use this
29. For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 282 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 9 Auto Functions The auto functions feature will not work if the sequencer feature is enabled For more information about the sequencer feature see Section 12 5 on page 237 12 9 1 Common Characteristics Auto functions control image properties and are the automatic counterparts of certain features such as the gain feature or the white balance feature which normally require manually setting the related parameter values Auto functions are particularly useful when an image property must be adjusted quickly to achieve a specific target value and when a specific target value must be kept constant in a series of images An Auto Function Area of Interest Auto Function AOI lets you designate a specific part of the image as the base for adjusting an image property Each auto function uses the pixel data from an Auto Function AOI for automatically adjusting a parameter value and accordingly for controlling the related image property Some auto functions use their own individual Auto Function AOI and some auto functions share a single Auto Function AOI An auto function automatically adjusts
30. Resends available via the bandwidth 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 reserve Resends needed 0 i 4 10 20 1 0 0 1 Effect on the accumulator pool 0 2 1 5 9 4 5 5 1 Resends left in the accumulator pool 15 13 14 9 0 4 9 14 15 after frame transmission F A amp T Frame Acquired Not enough and Transmitted resends available 1 60 Packet unavailable errors generated You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but no resends are needed The accumulator pool started with 15 resends available and remains at 15 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but 7 resends are needed The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are used and 2 resends are used from the accumulator pool The accumulator pool is drawn down to 13 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period and 4 resends are needed The 4 resends needed are taken from the resends available via the bandwidth reserve The fifth resend available via the bandwidth reserve is not needed so it is added to the accumulator pool and brings the p
31. Selecting the Exposure Active Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The exposure active output signal can be selected to act as the source signal for e g output line 1 Selecting a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the exposure active output signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value 152 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out1 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource ExposureActive You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 8 2 1 on page 89 For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera s output lines see Section 7 6 2 on page 83 9 11 2 Acquisition Status Indicator When controlling image acquisition with a software trigger you can use the acquisition status feature to determine when the camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition For more information about the acquisition status feature see Section 12 14 on page 304 9 11 3 Trigger Ready Sign
32. The number at location 24 in the table represents the effective 12 bits that will be transmitted out of the camera when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 24 And so on As you can see the table does not include a user defined 12 bit value for every pixel value that the sensor can report So what does the camera do when the sensor reports a pixel value that is between two values that have a defined 12 bit output In this case the camera performs a straight line interpolation to determine the value that it should transmit For example assume that the sensor reports a pixel value of 12 In this case the camera would perform a straight line interpolation between the values at location 8 and location 16 in the table The result of the interpolation would be reported out of the camera as the 12 bit output Another thing to keep in mind about the table is that location 4088 is the last location that will have a defined 12 bit value associated with it Locations 4089 through 4095 are not used If the sensor reports a value above 4088 the camera will not be able to perform an interpolation In cases where Basler scout GigE 277 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 the sensor reports a value above 4088 the camera simply transmits the 12 bit value from location 4088 in the table The advantage of the luminance lookup table feature is that it allows a user to customize the response curve of the camera The graphs below show the effect of
33. We also recommend that you supply camera power ground through two separate wires between the power supply and the camera as shown in the figure D To avoid a voltage drop with long power wires we recommend that you supply PLC Power and I O Cable The PLC power and I O cable adjusts the voltage levels of PLC devices to the voltage levels required by the camera and it protects the camera against negative voltage and reverse polarity The cables also offer protection of the signal transmission against EMI and ESD Basler offers PLC power and I O cables in various lengths Contact your Basler sales representative to order the cables Basler scout GigE 79 Physical Interface AWO0001 1918000 7 4 Camera Power Camera power must be supplied to the camera s 12 pin I O connector via a power and I O cable Power consumption is as shown in the specification tables in Section 1 of this manual Voltage Outside of Specified Range Can Cause Damage The recommended operating voltage of the power to the camera is 12 VDC 5 96 to 24 VDC 5 If the voltage is less than 11 3 VDC the camera CAUTION may operate erratically The following voltage requirements apply to the camera power VCC pins 8 and 9 of the 12 pin receptacle Voltage Significance lt 11 3 VDC The camera may operate erratically 12 to 24 VDC Safe operating voltage lt 1 ripple required Make sure to use a power supply that supplies pow
34. exposure As you can see running the camera with readout and exposure overlapped can allow higher acquisition frame rates because the camera is performing two processes at once Basler scout GigE 149 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition N Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 1 Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 3 Exposure Readout Time Fig 60 Overlapped Exposure Determining whether your camera is operating with overlapped or non overlapped exposures is not a matter of issuing a command or switching a setting on or off Rather the way that you operate the camera will determine whether the exposures are overlapped or not overlapped If we define the frame period as the time from the start of exposure for one image acquisition to the start of exposure for the next image acquisition then Exposure will overlap when Frame Period lt Exposure Time Readout Time Exposure will not overlap when Frame Period gt Exposure Time Readout Time You can calculate the readout time for a captured image by using the formula on page 161 9 9 1 Guidelines for Overlapped Operation If you will be operating the camera with overlapped exposure there are two important guidelines to keep in mind You must not begin the exposure time for a new image acquisition while the exposure time of the previous acquisi
35. if you require a delay time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter alone the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the delay time base The Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter value sets the delay time base in us The default is 1 us and it can be changed in 1 us increments Note that there is only one timer delay time base and it is used by all four of the available timers You can set the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera TimerDelayTimebaseAbs SetValue 5 Setting the Delay with an Absolute Value You can also set the Timer delay by using an absolute value This is accomplished by setting the Timer Delay Abs parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us To set the delay for a timer using an absolute value Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Delay Abs parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Delay Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerDelayAbs SetValue 100 When you use the Timer
36. information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in the image Bayer RG alignment means that pixel one and pixel two of the first line in each image transmitted will be red and green respectively And for the second line transmitted pixel one and pixel two will be green and blue respectively Since the pattern of the Bayer filter is fixed you can use this information to determine the color of all of the other pixels in the image Because the size and position of the area of interest on color cameras must be adjusted in increments of 2 the color filter alignment will remain the same regardless of the camera s area of interest AOI settings The Pixel Color Filter parameter indicates the current alignment of the camera s Bayer filter to the pixels in the images captured by a color camera You can tell how the current AOI is aligned to the Bayer filter by reading the value of the Pixel Color Filter parameter For more information about the camera s AOI feature see Section 12 4 on page 234 Basler scout GigE 173 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 1918000 10 1 2 Pixel Data Formats Available on Cameras with a Bayer Filter Bayer Formats Cameras equipped with a Bayer pattern color filter can output pixel data in the Bayer RG 8 or Bayer BG 8 pixel data output format the Bayer BG 16 format and the Bayer BG 12 Packed format When a color camera is set for one of these pixel data output formats the pixel data is not pro
37. the first pixel transmitted by the camera P the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bo the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Y value for Pg B4 Y value for P4 Bo Y value for Po B3 Y value for P3 B4 Y value for P4 Bs Y value for P5 Bg Y value for Pg B Y value for P7 e e e e e Bm 3 Y value for Ph 3 Bm 2 Y value for Pu Bma4 Y value for Pu Bm Y value for Ph Basler scout GigE 215 Pixel Data Formats AW00011918000 With the camera set for Mono 8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 e e e e e e 0x01 1 0x00 0 216 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Pixel Data Formats 11 4 Pixel Transmission Sequence For each captured image pixel data is transmitted from the camera in the following sequence Row Col p Row Col 4 Row Colo ROWg Col mo Row 9 Col m1 Row Col m Row Col Row Col 4 Row Colo Row Col m 2 Row 4 Col m 1 Row Col Row Col p Row Col 4 Rows Colo ROW Col m 2 Row s Col m 1 Rows Col m Row p 2 Colo Row p 2 Col 4 Row p 2 Colo Row p 2 Col m 2 ROW p 2 COl m 4 ROW p 2 COI m Row 4 Colo Row
38. you can retrieve the frame counter information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Frame Counter parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the frame counter chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Frame Counter chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector Framecounter Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve date from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer 326 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Chunk Features Result GetPayloadSize int64 t frameCounter Camera ChunkFramecounter GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Comparing Counter Chunk Data When comparing trigger input counter data and frame counter data related to the same image be aware tha
39. 0 31 0 42 scA640 120gm gc 0 62 0 83 scA1400 17gm gc 0 25 0 34 ScA750 60gm gc 0 51 0 80 scA1400 30gm gc 0 25 0 34 scA780 54gm gc 0 35 0 47 SCA1600 14gm gc 0 34 0 52 scA1000 30gm gc 0 46 0 63 SCA1600 28gm gc 0 34 0 52 Fig 23 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for Cameras with the Standard C mount Lens Adapter Basler scout GigE 27 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000 in mm unless otherwise noted 0 4 gt gt reference plane tolerance to the center of the tolerance to the reference planes lens mount optical axis 0 02 This is the sensor tilt tolerance It applies to every point on the photosensitive surface and is relative to the center of the die O Photosensitive surface of the sensor O 0 12 5 906 This tolerance is for the distance between the front of the i lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive surface Note that this tolerance and the sensor tilt tolerance see above must be combined to obtain the total tolerance for every point on the photosensitive surface Maximum Sensor Tilt Angle Degrees Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y Camera Model Tilt X Tilt Y scA640 70gm gc 0 47 0 63 scA1300 32gm gc 0 47 0 63 scA640 74gm gc 0 35 0 47 scA1390 17gm gc 0 31 0 42 scA640 120gm gc 0 62 0 83 scA1400 17g
40. 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 2 General Specifications Basler scout GigE Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000 Specification SCA1000 30 gm gc SCA1300 32gm gc SCA1390 17 gm gc Sensor Size gm 1034 x 779 gm 1296 x 966 gm 1392 x 1040 H x V pixels gc 1032 x 778 gc 1294 x 964 gc 1390 x 1038 Sensor Type Sony ICX204 AL AK Sony ICX445 ALA AQA Sony ICX267 AL AK Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 1 3 1 3 1 2 Pixel Size 4 65 um x 4 65 um 3 75 um x 3 75 um 4 65 um x 4 65 um Max Frame Rate at full resolution 31 fps 32 fps 17 fps Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s or Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbit s Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed RGB 8 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 12 VDC 5 to 24 VDC 5 l
41. 2 Set up the third acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 270 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 6 Binning All Models Except scA750 60 The binning feature is only available on the monochrome cameras The binning feature is not available on scA750 60 cameras Binning increases the camera s response to light by summing the charges from adjacent pixels into one pixel Two types of binning are available vertical binning and horizontal binning With vertical binning adjacent pixels from 2 lines 3 lines or a maximum of 4 lines in the imaging sensor array are summed and are reported out of the camera as a single pixel Figure 80 illustrates vertical binning Vertical Binning by 2 Vertical Binning by 3 Vertical Binning by 4 coag 1 OO D C1 CI DCI DICT CJ
42. 2 Timer 3 and Timer 4 As shown in Figure 43 each timer works as follows A trigger source event occurs that starts the timer A delay period begins to expire When the delay expires the timer signal goes high and a duration period begins to expire When the duration period expires the timer signal goes low Duration e Delay e Trigger source event occurs Fig 43 Timer Signal Currently the only trigger source event available to start the timer is exposure active In other words you can use exposure start to trigger the start of a timer Timer 1 can only be assigned to output line 1 Timer 2 can only be assigned to output line 2 Timer 3 can only be assigned to output line 3 Timer 4 can only be assigned to output line 4 If you require the timer signal to be high when the timer is triggered and to go low when the delay expires simply set the output line to invert Timer with Increased Signal Width The explanations given above assume that the timer is not modified by the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature If the timer us used with the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature and if the set minimum output signal width is larger than the timer duration setting the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature will control the output signal width Accordingly the timer duration setting will be ignored If the set minimum output signal width is smaller than the timer duration setting the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature will ha
43. 2x M3 4 5 deep Bottom oO o Id Re AC 2 MH 9 7 I 67 2 a 2x M3 4 deep 80 15 p 2x M2 4 5 deep _ 6 45 BASLER wo 3 A6Gout 73 7 85 5 17 5 am 2x M3 3 5 deep Photosensitive surface of the sensor n Y o p e NU RS a e Di 2x M3 4 5 deep 67 2 Fig 21 Mechanical Dimensions in mm for Cameras with the Standard C mount Lens Adapter Basler scout GigE 25 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AW 0001 1918000 2x M3 4 5 deep 3 Bottom Ko o A reprae BI Serie 67 2 L 2x M3 4 deep 1 45 2x M2 4 5 deep DA Lo M a BASLERZ Y amp o E Q n i 72 3 x A ms c a 73 7 A 30 80 5 12 5 Photosensitive if ogi 4 2x M3 3 5 deep surface of the sensor ja Top N T g 2x M3 4 5 deep
44. AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Acq Trigger Wait Signal ExASTrig Signal ESSERE POOLE POOO OO OOOX Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Frame Acquisition Exp Readout Time RRRS Camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger status Fig 65 Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal The acquisition trigger wait signal will only be available when hardware acquisition start triggering is enabled Basler scout GigE 159 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Selecting the Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The acquisition trigger wait signal can be selected to act as the source signal for camera output line 1 line 2 line 3 or line 4 Selecting a source signal for an output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 line 2 line 3 or line 4 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the acquisition trigger wait signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera
45. Assigned x 100 Step 6 For each camera compare the data bandwidth needed with the data bandwidth assigned For each camera you should now compare the data bandwidth assigned to the camera as determined in step 4 with the bandwidth needed by the camera as determined in step 3 For bandwidth to be used most efficiently the data bandwidth assigned to a camera should be equal to or just slightly greater than the data bandwidth needed by the camera If you find that this is the situation for all of the cameras on the network you can go on to step 6 now If you find a camera that has much more data bandwidth assigned than it needs you should make an adjustment To lower the amount of data bandwidth assigned you must adjust a parameter called the Inter packet Delay If you increase the Inter packet Delay parameter value on a camera the data bandwidth assigned to the camera will decrease So for any camera where you find that the data bandwidth assigned is much greater then the data bandwidth needed you should do this Raise the setting for the Inter packet delay parameter for the camera Recalculate the data bandwidth assigned to the camera Compare the new data bandwidth assigned to the data bandwidth needed Repeat 1 2 and 3 until the data bandwidth assigned is equal to or just greater than the data bandwidth needed Peo something that you must keep in mind When you lower the data output rate you increase the amount of tim
46. Bayer Color Filter White Balance Integrated IR Cut Filter Gamma Included white balance reset in Section 10 3 1 on page 177 Included sRGB gamma correction in Section 10 3 2 on page 179 Included the RGB 8 Packed pixel data format with information wherever applicable in the manual particularly in Section 11 1 on page 193 and Section 11 3 5 on page 209 Added the Sequencer Section 12 5 on page 237 Added a note that auto functions will not work when the sequencer is enabled in Section 12 9 on page 283 Added the Minimum Output Pulse Width Section 12 12 on page 300 Added the Camera Events Section 9 11 6 on page 160 Updated the exposure start delay value for the scA1600 28gm gc in Section 9 12 on page 161 Added the AcquisitionStartEventData and FrameStartEventData events in Section 12 15 on page 306 Added the sensor board temperature device information parameter in Section 12 17 on page 313 Added the color factory setup in Section 12 18 on page 315 Added the Camera Feature Set section 12 19 on page 321 Corrected the method used for calculating the CRC checksum to X modem in Section 13 7 on page 336 Added Section 13 8 on page 338 describing the sequence set index chunk and modified Section 13 2 on page 324 accordingly 350 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00011917000 28 May 2014 Updated the Basler contact details on the back of the
47. Control AWO0001 1918000 trigger the next acquisition see Figure 63 The camera calculates the rise of the trigger ready signal based on the current exposure time parameter setting the current size of the area of interest and the time it will take to readout the captured pixel values from the sensor The trigger ready signal is especially useful if you want to run the camera at the maximum acquisition frame capture rate for the current conditions If you monitor the trigger ready signal and you trigger acquisition of each new image immediately after the signal goes high you will be sure that the camera is operating at the maximum acquisition frame rate for the current conditions Signal goes high Signal goes low Signal goes high Signal goes low at earliest safe when exposure at earliest safe when exposure moment to trigger for acquisition moment to trigger for acquisition acquisition N 1 N 1 begins acquisition N 2 N 2 begins TrigRdy Signal Image Acquisition N Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 1 Exposure Readout Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Time Fig 63 Trigger Ready Signal You should be aware that if the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is enabled the operation of the trigger ready signal will be influenced by the value of the parameter If the value of the parameter is greater than zero but less than the maximum allowed the trigger ready will go h
48. Device Information llle 80 7 6 Input and OutputLines llis aaa 81 7 6 1 InputLines sr Re Reni ee URL Poe ER 81 7 6 1 1 Voltage Requirements lssl esee 81 7 6 1 2 Line Schematic 0 ea a a EE ee 82 76 2 OUIDUULING Sick xs d eer RE sp aoa a Need 83 7 6 2 1 Voltage Requirements 83 7 0 2 2 Line Schematic s asee e e aA AE eee 83 7 6 3 Output Line Response Time 0 00 eee ee 85 8 VO Control idee eae e a e door a cd e xw ot a C c 87 8 1 Configuring Input Lines 00 Re 87 8 1 1 Assigning an Input Line to Receive a Hardware Trigger Signal 87 8 1 2 Using an Unassigned Input Line to Receive a User Input Signal 88 8 1 8 Setting an Input Line for Invert llli eee 88 8 2 Configuring Output Lines llle 89 8 2 1 Assigning a Camera Output Signal to a Physical Output Line 89 8 2 2 Setting the State of User Settable Output Lines 90 8 2 3 Setting an Output Line for Invert liliis 91 8 2 4 Working with Timers lsssseeeeee RII 92 8 2 4 4 Setting the Trigger Source for a Timer 00 93 8 2 4 2 Setting a Timer Delay Time 0 0 cee eee ee 93 8 2 4 3 Setting a Timer Duration Time 00220 00 eee 95 8 3 Checking the State of the I O Lines 0 0 0 00 ee 97 8 3 1 Checking the State of a Single Output Line 004 97 8 3 2
49. ExFSTrig Signal Fig 49 Trigger Width Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering When you operate the camera in trigger width exposure mode you must also use the camera s exposure time prameters to set an exposure time This parameter setting will be used by the camera to operate the Trigger Ready signal You should adjust the exposure setting to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use For example assume that you will be using trigger width exposure mode and that you intend to use the ExFSTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 ps to 5500 us In this case you would use the exposure setting to set the exposure time to 3000 us For more information about the Trigger Ready signal see Section 9 11 3 on page 153 and Section 9 11 4 on page 155 For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 137 9 5 8 8 Frame Start Trigger Delay The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of a hardware frame start trigger and when the trigger will become effective The trigger delay will not operate if the Trigger Mode parameter for frame start is set to off or if you are using a software frame start trigger For more information about the trigger delay feature and how to use it see Section 12 13 on page 302 122 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 5 3 4 Setting the Parame
50. For more information about auto functions see Section 12 9 1 on page 283 For more information about the Exposure Auto function see Section 12 9 3 on page 292 D Exposure time can not only be manually set see below but can also be For information about parameter settings for obtaining the maximum possible exposure time see Section 9 7 1 on page 138 Basler scout GigE 137 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 7 1 Setting the Exposure Time Using Raw Settings When exposure time is set using raw values the exposure time will be determined by a combination of two elements The first element is the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter and the second element is the Exposure Time Base The exposure time is determined by the product of these two elements Exposure Time Exposure Time Raw Parameter Value x Exposure Time Base By default the Exposure Time Base is fixed at 20 us on all camera models except the scA750 60 On scA750 60 cameras the default Exposure Time Base is 31 us Typically the exposure time is adjusted by setting only the Exposure Time Raw parameter The Exposure Time Raw parameter value can range from 1 to 4095 So if the parameter value was set to 100 on an scA640 70 camera for example the exposure time will be 100 x 20 us or 2000 us Settings for Obtaining the Maximum Possible Exposure Time On all camera models except the scA750 60 you can obtain the maximum possible exposure t
51. Frame Frame N Transmission to Host PC Frame N 1 Transmission to Host PC Transmission Timing charts are not drawn to scale Fig 66 Exposure Start Controlled with an ExTrig Signal You can calculate the frame readout time by using this formula Frame Readout Time AOI Height 1 x C4 Co Where the values for the constants C4 and C are from the table in Section 9 13 on page 163 for all camera models except the scA750 60 or from the table in Section 9 14 on page 167 for scA750 60 cameras For more information about the AOI height see Section 12 4 on page 234 You can calculate an approximate frame transmission time by using this formula efranme Transmission Timm ss Payload Size Parameter Value Device Current Throughput Parameter Value Note that this is an approximate frame transmission time Due to the nature of the Ethernet network the transmission time could vary Also note that the frame transmission cannot be less than the frame readout time So if the frame transmission time formula returns a value that is less than the readout time the approximate frame transmission time will be equal to the readout time 162 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Due to the nature of the Ethernet network the transmission start delay can vary from frame to frame The transmission start delay however is of very low significance when compared to the transmission time For more information about the Payload S
52. GigE 29 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 2 x M3 4 5 deep 2 x M3 4 8 deep AW00011918000 2 x M2 4 5 deep 6 1 2 x M3 4 5 deep 375 u 32 1 2 3 25 A 51 15 S lt 5 i o ad N Tees ee Tt co Li ms E lo N lt N c5 Bottom Go Ww m d ol ES 9 2 ca 15 4 2 x M3 4 deep al IT 97 S S ey 91 65 al ASER S i o M su lid i 1 I E i E eo e 7265 Photosensitive 28 5 surface of the 29 g sensor 3 25 86 3 2 x M3 3 5 deep 2 x M3 4 5 deep 26 Fig 25 Mechanical Dimensions in mm for Cameras 90 Head with the Standard C mount Lens Adapter 30 Basler scout GigE AW O0001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 2 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy The sensor positioning accuracy for cameras equipped with a standard C mount lens adapter is as shown in Figure 26
53. GigE cameras The Basler filter driver is a basic GigE Vision network driver that is compatible with all network adapters The advantage of this driver is its extensive compatibility The Basler performance driver is a hardware specific GigE Vision network driver The driver is only compatible with network adapters that use specific Intel chipsets The advantage of the performance driver is that it significantly lowers the CPU load needed to service the network traffic between the PC and the camera s It also has a more robust packet resend mechanism During the installation process you should have installed either the filter driver or the performance driver For more information about compatible Intel chipsets and about installing the network drivers see the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with pylon for Windows AW000611 Basler scout GigE 45 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AWO001 1918000 4 1 The Basler Filter Driver The Basler filter driver is a basic driver GigE Vision network driver It is designed to be compatible with most network adapter cards The functionality of the filter driver is relatively simple For each frame the driver checks the order of the incoming packets If the driver detects that a packet or a group of packets is missing it will wait for a specified period of time to see if the missing packet or group of packets arrives If the packet or group does not arrive within the sp
54. Increasing the inter packet delay will decrease the camera s effective data transmission rate and will thus decrease the network bandwidth used by the camera In the current camera implementation one tick 8 ns To check the tick frequency you can read the Gev Timestamp Tick Frequency parameter value This value indicates the number of clock ticks per second When setting the time interval for the inter packet delay make sure that the time interval for the packet timeout is set to a higher value Frame Transmission Delay read write Sets a delay in ticks one tick 8 ns between when a camera would normally begin transmitting an acquired frame and when it actually begins transmission This parameter should be set to zero in most normal situations If you have many cameras in your network and you will be simultaneously triggering image acquisition on all of them you may find that your network switch or network adapter is overwhelmed if all of the cameras simultaneously begin to transmit image data at once The frame transmission delay parameter can be used to stagger the start of image data transmission from each camera Bandwidth Assigned read only Indicates the bandwidth in bytes per second that will be used by the camera to transmit image and chunk feature data and to handle resends and control data transmissions The value of this parameter is a result of the packet size and the inter packet delay parameter settings In essenc
55. REUS 112 9 4 5 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 113 The Frame Start Trigger in standard MOd6 vues ns paar Lew DH ES Me DIDG NEXU EM YS 114 9 5 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode 20 00 eee 115 9 5 1 1 X Frame Start Trigger Mode Off 0 0 00 0 0 eee 115 9 5 1 2 Frame Start Trigger Mode 2 On 0 eee 116 9 5 1 3 Setting the Frame Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters 117 9 5 2 Using a Software Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode a soseeksi ea eaaa aaa aa eee 118 9 5 2 1 Introduction arretener R9 ene te eee eee e ee 118 9 5 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 119 9 5 3 Using a Hardware Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 000 cee eee eee 120 9 53 1 ntrod ction us eee ei dae he Re Ss ERR aes 120 9 5 3 2 Exposure Modes aana 121 9 5 8 8 Frame Start Trigger Delay 0 0 eee eee 122 9 5 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 123 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Legacy Mode zc raded oh DAME SE WENO EE d Su NI qur e e Pasta t dos 125 9 6 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Legacy Mode iilius 126 9 6 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off 0 0 126 9 6 1 2 Acquisition S
56. Section 8 3 1 on page 97 and Section 8 3 2 on page 97 8 1 3 Setting an Input Line for Invert You can set each individual input line to invert or not to invert the incoming electrical signal To set the invert function on an input line Use the Line Selector to select an input line Set the value of the Line Inverter parameter to true to enable inversion on the selected line and to false to disable inversion You can set the Line Selector and the Line Inverter parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Enable the inverter on line 1 Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Linel Camera LineInverter SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 88 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 I O Control 8 2 Configuring Output Lines 8 2 1 Assigning a Camera Output Signal to a Physical Output Line You can use the camera s output signal assignment capability to assign one of the camera s standard output signals as the source signal for a physical output line The camera has a variety of standard output signals available including Acquisition Trigger Wait only available when the image acquisition control is set to standard mode
57. Section 9 4 5 2 on page 113 Section 9 5 3 4 on page 123 and Section 9 6 3 4 on page 135 explain how to configure the camera to react to a hardware trigger signal and how to assign an input line to receive the hardware trigger signal Standard mode By default physical input line 1 is assigned to receive an ExTrig signalto serve as the frame start trigger D The default line assignments depend on the image acquisition control mode By default physical input line 2 is assigned to receive an ExTrig signalto serve as the acquisition start trigger Legacy mode By default physical input line 1 is assigned to receive the ExTrig signal to serve as the acquisition start trigger You can assign only one line to receive the ExTrig input signal Basler scout GigE 87 I O Control AW00011918000 8 1 2 Using an Unassigned Input Line to Receive a User Input Signal You can use an unassigned input line to receive your own user generated input signal The electrical characteristics of your input signal must meet the requirements shown in the Physical Interface section of this manual You can use the Line Status or Line Status All parameters to monitor the state of the input line that is receiving the user defined signal A line assigned to receive an ExTrig input signal can t be used to receive a user designed input signal For more information about using the Line Status and Line Status All parameters see
58. SequenceSetLoad Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Use Case Diagrams Illustrating Sequencer Operation The sections below explain the sequence advance modes in detail Use case descriptions and diagrams are designed to illustrate how the sequence advance modes work in some common situations and with some common combinations of parameter settings These use cases do not represent every possible combination of the parameters associated with sequence advance mode operation They are simply intended to aid you in developing an initial understanding of how the sequence advance modes work In each use case diagram the black box in the upper left corner indicates how the parameters are set The use case diagrams are representational They are not drawn to scale and are not designed to accurately describe precise camera timings 12 5 1 Auto Sequence Advance Mode When the auto sequence advance mode is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next occurs automatically as frame triggers are received The advance proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers and subject to the Sequence Set Executions parameter value It specifies how many times each sequence set is consecutively used After the sequence set with the highest index number was used as many times as specified by the Sequence Set Executions parameter value the sequence set cycle starts again with sequen
59. THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Basler scout GigE 35 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000 1 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems The cameras are frequently installed in industrial environments These environments often include devices that generate electromagnetic interference EMI and they are prone to electrostatic discharge ESD Excessive EMI and ESD can cause problems with your camera such as false triggering or can cause the camera to suddenly stop capturing images EMI and ESD can also have a negative impact on the quality of the image data transmitted by the camera To avoid problems with EMI and ESD you should follow these general guidelines Always use high quality shielded cables The use of high quality cables is one of the best defenses against EMI and ESD Try to use camera cables that are the correct length and try to run the camera cables and power cables parallel to each other Avoid coiling camera cables If the cables are too long use a meandering path rather then coiling the cables Avoid placing camera cables parallel to wires carrying high current switching voltages such as wires supplying stepper motors or electrical devices that employ switching technology Placing camera cables near to these types of devices may cause pr
60. Total Number parameter value minus one For example specifying a series of sequence sets only with index numbers 5 6 and 8 is not allowed If you did nonetheless the not explicitly configured sequence sets would within the scope of the sequence set total number be populated by default parameter values FON 5 Set up your first acquisition scenario i e lighting object positioning etc 6 Adjust the camera parameters to get the best image quality with this scenario you are adjusting all parameters in the active set Set the Sequence Set Executions parameter The available numbers range from 1 to 256 8 Execute the Sequence Set Store command to copy the sequence parameter values currently in the active set into the selected sequence set Any already existing parameter values in the sequence set will be overwritten 9 Repeat the above steps starting from step 4 for the other sequence sets Basler scout GigE 245 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Configuring Sequence Sets Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for configuring sequence sets from within your application software The following code snippet gives example settings It illustrates using the API to set the auto sequence advance mode set the total number of sequence sets to 2 set the numbers of consecutive sequence set executions and populate sequence sets 0 and 1 by storing the sequence parameter values from the active set in the
61. acquisition start 112 131 frame start uitio 120 heartbeat timeout parameter 55 heartbeat timer n 55 high gain factory setup 315 317 horizontal DINNING sse 271 horizontal mirror image 274 housing 909 h amp 8dadl ere iere 1 29 standard eee 1 24 AUS cioe eh tates pectet b anat i aiaa 186 hue adjustment eeen 187 h mldlity 5 2 24 cenit ished ete cons 37 I image acquisition control mode legacy os etc eee 99 standard toit ertet 99 image distortion sss 273 Basler scout GigE Index image property target value esussss 283 input lines CODfIgurlng eden 87 electrical characteristics 82 INVOTGR ve ses dene ei cec ite oed decus 88 voltage requirements 81 installation hardware ssessseeeeeeee 41 SOflWALO iieri to ee 41 integrate enabled signal 152 inter packet delay 46 51 65 inverter Iriput lines rette eiit etn 88 Output liriGs ice 91 IP Configurator esses 44 IP3O LC eit tu s 24 29 IR cut filter sueeeeeeseesee 18 32 176 J jumbo frames ssseeeeessse 66 jumbo packets eeseeeesessss 66 L EDS sc oet mote pes 75 lens adapter
62. address see the Selecting Sequence Sets section The states of two input lines are checked if more than two sequence sets are available The states of one input line is checked when only two sequence sets are available The Sequence Set Total Number parameter specifies the total number of different sequence sets that are available The maximum number is 4 12 5 3 1 Operation Operating the Sequencer The following use case see also Figure 79 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in free selection sequence advance mode In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to four Accordingly the sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 3 Input line 1 sets bit O of the sequence set address Input line 2 sets bit 1 of the sequence set address Both input lines are not set for invert The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled and a frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 1 and 2 Input line 1 is found to be high and input line 2 is found to be low This corresponds to the address of sequence set 1 Accordingly sequence set 1 is selected Its parameter values are loaded into the active set and are used for the image acquisition Note that the state of input line 1 went high well ahead of the frame
63. again The feature set relating to the selected camera description file is available after some period Setting the Parameter Value You can select a camera description file by setting the CameraFeatureSet parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value in the example the camera description file providing the complete feature set is chosen Select the camera description file providing all camera features CEnumerationPtr ptrFeatureSet Camera GetNodeMap GetNode FeatureSet ptrFeatureSet FromString Full For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 322 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Chunk Features 13 Chunk Features This section provides detailed information about the chunk features available on each camera 13 4 What are Chunk Features In most cases enabling a camera feature will simply change the behavior of the camera The Test Image feature is a good example of this type of camera feature When the Test Image feature is enabled the camera outputs a test image rather than a captured image This type of feature is referred to as a standard feature When certain camera feat
64. and front module Weight standard housing 90 head housing 160 g typical 180 g typical Conformity CE RoHS GenlCam GigE Vision IP30 FCC The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 1 General Specifications Basler scout GigE Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000 Specification scA750 60gm gc scA780 54gm gc Sensor Size gm 752 x 480 gm 782 x 582 H x V pixels gc 750x480 gc 780 x 580 Sensor Type Aptina MT9V022 formerly known as the Sony ICX415 AL AQ Micron MT9V022 Progressive scan CMOS Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 1 3 1 2 Pixel Size 6 0 um x 6 0 um 8 3 um x 8 3 um Max Frame Rate 64 9 fps 55 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s or Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbit s Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer RG 8
65. appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the CRC information Note that the CRC information provided by the chunk parser is not the CRC checksum itself Rather it is a true false result When the image and appended chunks pass through the parser the parser calculates a CRC checksum based on the received image and chunk information It then compares the calculated CRC checksum with the CRC checksum contained in the CRC checksum chunk If the two match the result will indicate that the image data is OK If the two do not match the result will indicate that the image is corrupted You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the time stamp chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data Make chunk mode active and enable CRC chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector PayloadCRC16 336 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Chunk Features Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true Check the CRC checksum of an grabbed image IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser
66. as the Source Signal for an Output Line The trigger ready signal can be selected to act as the source signal for e g output line 1 Selecting a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the trigger ready output signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out1 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource TriggerReady You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 8 2 1 on page 89 For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera s output lines see Section 7 6 2 on page 83 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 9 1 on page 99 Basler scout GigE 157 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 11 5 Acquisition Trigger Wait Signal Standard Mode Only control is set to standard mode For more information about image acquisition control and setting the mode see Section 9 1 on page 99 D The acquisition trigger wait signal is only available when th
67. buffer for the frame will be released and will be indicated as an unsuccessful grab You can set the filer driver parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read and write the parameter values Enable Resend Camera t StreamGrabber t StreamGrabber Camera GetStreamGrabber 0 StreamGrabber EnableResend SetValue false disable resends Packet Timeout FrameRetention Camera t StreamGrabber t StreamGrabber Camera GetStreamGrabber 0 StreamGrabber PacketTimeout SetValue 40 StreamGrabber FrameRetention SetValue 200 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see the nstallation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with pylon for Windows AW000611 46 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 4 2 The Basler Performance Driver The Basler performance driver is a hardware specific GigE Vision network driver compatible with network adapters that use specific Intel chipsets The main advantage of the performance driver is that it significantly lowers the CPU load needed to service the network traffic between the PC and the camera s It also has a more robust packet resend mechanism Fo
68. by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the auto function profile As an example Gain Auto is set to be minimized during adjustments Use the gain auto and exposure auto features simultaneously Camera AutoFunctionProfile SetValue AutoFunctionProfile GainMinimum Camera GainAuto SetValue GainAuto Continuous Camera ExposureAuto SetValue ExposureAuto Continuous For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 294 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 9 5 Balance White Auto Balance White Auto is the automatic counterpart to manually setting the white balance The balance white auto function is only available on color models Automatic white balancing is a two step process First the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values for red green and blue are each set to 1 5 Then assuming a gray world model the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values are automatically adjusted such that the average values for the red and blue pixels match the average value for the green pixels The balance white auto function uses Auto Function AOI 2 and can only be operated in the once mode of operation If Auto Function AOI 2 does not overlap the Image AOI see the Auto Function AOI section the pixel data from Auto
69. camera s parameters Basler scout GigE 71 Camera Functional Description AWO001 1918000 The image buffer between the sensor and the Ethernet controller allows data to be read out of the sensor at a rate that is independent of the data transmission rate between the camera and the host computer This ensures that the data transmission rate has no influence on image quality CCD Sensor Vert Vert Vert Vert aon Pixels eae Pixels E Pixels Pixels ja a je e a ja a ja je Je ADC VGC Horizontal shift Register Fig 32 CCD Sensor Architecture 60 MB Image Buffer e g TIME TrigRdy VGC Ethernet Ethernet Controller Image Data Network and Control Data Control Micro Controller Control Data Control AOI Gain Black Level Fig 33 Camera Block Diagram 72 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Camera Functional Description 6 2 Overview scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 gm gc cameras For information about the other camera models see Section 6 1 on page 71 Each camera provides features such as a full frame shutter and electronic exposure time control The sensor chip includes gain controls ADCs and other digital devices Exposure
70. camera settings the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the maximum allowed frame rate For information about setting the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 9 5 1 3 on page 117 waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about the Keep in mind that the camera will only react to frame start triggers when it is in a acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 101 and Section 9 4 on page 107 Exposure Time Control with the Frame Start Trigger Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the value of the camera s Exposure Time Abs parameter For more information about the camera s Exposure Time Abs parameter see Section 9 7 on page 137 Basler scout GigE 115 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 5 1 2 Frame Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on you must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera each time you want to begin a frame acquisition Do not trigger frame acquisition at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed for the current camera settings If you apply frame start trigger signals to the camera when it is not ready to receive them the signals will be ignored For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 9 13 on page 163 and Section 9 14
71. chunk parser 324 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Chunk Features included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the extended image data by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Offset X parameter Read the value of the Chunk Offset Y parameter Read the value of the Chunk Width parameter Read the value of the Chunk Height parameter Read the value of the Chunk Pixel Format parameter Read the value of the Chunk Dynamic Range Min Read the value of the Chunk Dynamic Range Max The following code snippet illustrates using the pylon API to run the parser and retrieve the extended image data retrieve date from the extended image data chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t offsetX Camera ChunkOffsetX GetValue offsetY Camera ChunkOffsetY GetValue int64 int64 t width Camera ChunkWidth GetValue int64 c c ct ct int64 int64 t dynamicRangeMax Camera ChunkDynamicRangeMax GetValue height Camera ChunkHeight GetValue dynamicRangeMin Camera ChunkDynamicRangeMin GetValue ChunkPixelFormatEnums pixelFormat Camera ChunkPixelFormat GetValue For more information about using the chunk parser see the sample code that is included with the Basler pyl
72. data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t timeStamp Camera ChunkTimestamp GetValue Basler scout GigE 329 Chunk Features AWO001 1918000 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 330 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Chunk Features 13 5 Trigger Input Counter The Trigger Input Counter feature numbers external image acquisition triggers sequentially as they are received When the feature is enabled a chunk is added to each image containing the related value of the trigger input counter The trigger input counter is a 32 bit value On the first counting cycle the counter starts at 1 and increments by 1 for each received trigger The counter counts up to 4294967295 unless it is reset before see below After having reached the maximum value the counter will continue counting starting at 0 Be aware that if the camera is operating in continuous frame mode free run the trigger input counter will not be available feature or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive The chun
73. data output for the U component or the V component is 8 bit data of the straight binary type The range of data values for a U or a V component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below Basler scout GigE 211 Pixel Data Formats This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 127 OxFE 126 e e e e e e 0x81 1 0x80 0 Ox7F 1 e e e e e e 0x01 127 0x00 128 AW00011918000 The signal level of a U component or a V component can range from 128 to 127 decimal Notice that the data values have been arranged to represent the full signal level range 212 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 11 3 7 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format Pixel Data Formats On color cameras the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV packed pixel data format is similar to the YUV 4 2 2 pixel format described in the previous section The only difference is the order of the bytes transmitted to the host PC With the YUV 4 2 2 format the bytes are ordered as specified in the DCAM standard issued by the 1394 Trade Association With the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV format the bytes are ordered to emulate the ordering normally associated with analog frame grabbers and Windows frame buffers The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 YUYV output With thi
74. default set can be loaded into the active set The default set can also be designated as the startup set i e the set that will be loaded into the active set whenever the camera is powered on or reset Instructions for loading the default set into the active set and for designating which set will be the startup set appear later in the Configuration Sets section Basler scout GigE 315 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 User Sets As mentioned above the active configuration set is stored in the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off The camera can save most of the settings from the current active set to a reserved area in the camera s non volatile memory A configuration set that has been saved in the non volatile memory is not lost when the camera is reset or switched off There are three reserved areas in the camera s non volatile memory available for saving configuration sets A configuration set saved in a reserved area is commonly referred to as a user set The three available user sets are called User Set 1 User Set 2 and User Set 3 When the camera is running a saved user set can be loaded into the active set A saved user set can also be designated as the startup set i e the set that will be loaded into the active set whenever the camera is powered on or reset Instructions for loading a saved user set into the active set and for designating which set will be the s
75. do not trigger image acquisition You delay triggering acquisition for the period of time that would normally be needed to acquire and transmit a single image The current camera settings would allow 5 resends to occur during this period of time But since no data is transmitted no resends are required The 5 resends that could have occurred are added to the accumulator pool and they bring the pool up to 9 8 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but no resends are needed The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are not needed so they are added to the accumulator pool and they bring the pool up to 14 9 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period and 1 resend is needed The 1 resend needed is taken from the resends available via the bandwidth reserve The other 4 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are not needed so they are added to the accumulator pool Note that with the current settings the accumulator pool can only hold a maximum of 15 resends So the pool is now 15 Frame Max Jitter read only If the Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation parameter is set to a high value the camera can experience a large burst of data resends during transmission of a fram
76. effective The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant bit The four unused most significant bits are filled with zeros With the Bayer BG 16 the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 12 effective bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 12 effective bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 12 effective bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The BG in the name Bayer BG 16 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even lines in the images pixel one will be blue pixel two will be green pixel three will be blue pixel four will be green etc For odd lines in the images pixel one will be green pixel two will be red pixel three will be green pixel four will be red etc For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 11 3 1 on page 201 The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG 16 output Note that the data is placed in the image buffer in little endian format The following standards are used in the tables Pg the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line P the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a line Bo the first byte
77. for a single resend request rather than sending a sequence of resend requests where each resend request relates to just one missing packet The location of the resend request batching threshold determines the maximum number of consecutive missing packets that can be grouped together for a single resend request The maximum number corresponds to the number of packets that fit into the span between the resend request threshold and the resend request batching threshold plus one If the Resend Request Batching parameter is set to 0 no batching will occur and a resend request will be sent for each single missing packet For other settings consider an example Suppose the Resend Request Batching parameter is set to 80 referring to a span between the resend request threshold and the front end of the receive window that can hold five packets Figure 28 In this case 4 packets 5 x 80 will fit into the span between the resend request threshold and the resend request batching threshold Accordingly the maximum number of consecutive missing packets that can be batched is 5 4 1 Basler scout GigE 49 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AWO001 1918000 Timeout Resend Mechanism Parameters The timeout resend mechanism is illustrated in Figure 29 where the following assumptions are made The frame includes 3000 packets Packet 1002 is missing within the stream of packets and has not been recovered Packets 2999 and 3000 are missing at the end of t
78. height as 6 The area of the array that is bounded by these settings is shown in Figure 88 Only the pixel data from within the area defined by your settings will be used by the related auto function Column 012 3 4 5 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Row 0 Y Offset ONTO a A O N Auto Function Area of Interest Height Image Area of Interest X Offset Fig 88 Auto Function Area of Interest and Image Area of Interest Basler scout GigE 285 Standard Features AW00011918000 Relative Positioning of an Auto Function AOI The size and position of an Auto Function AOI can be but need not be identical to the size and position of the Image AOI Note that the overlap between Auto Function AOI and Image AOI determines whether and to what extent the auto function will control the related image property Only the pixel data from the areas of overlap will be used by the auto function to control the image property of the entire image Different degrees of overlap are illustrated in Figure 89 The hatched areas in the figure indicate areas of overlap If th
79. in greater detail in the following sections Basler scout GigE 107 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 4 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode The main parameter associated with the acquisition start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger has two available settings off and on 9 4 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera 9 4 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on the camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and cannot react to frame start trigger signals You must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to exit the camera from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera can then react to frame start trigger signals and will continue to do so until the number of frame start trigger signals it has received is equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting The camera will then return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status In order to acquire
80. manufactured numerous tests are Factory Setup performed on the camera and four factory optimized Esci esie setups are determined The four factory optimized Weser ee setups are Fig 94 Configuration Sets The Standard Factory Setup is optimized for average conditions and will provide good camera performance in many common applications In the standard factory setup the gain is set to a low value and all auto functions are set to off The High Gain Factory Setup is similar to the standard factory setup but the gain is set to 6 dB The Auto Functions Factory Setup is similar to the standard factory setup but the Gain Auto and the Exposure Auto auto functions are both enabled and are set to the continuous mode of operation During automatic parameter adjustment gain will be kept to a minimum The Color Factory Setup is optimized to yield the best color fidelity with daylight lighting The factory setups are saved in permanent files in the camera s non volatile memory They are not lost when the camera is reset or switched off and they cannot be changed You can select one of the four factory setups to be the camera s default set Instructions for selecting which factory setup will be used as the default set appear later in the Configuration Sets section Note that your selection of which factory setup will serve as the default set will not be lost when the camera is reset or switched off When the camera is running the
81. not set for invert the high states of the input lines will set the bits to 1 and the low states will set the bits to O If the input lines are set for invert the low states of the input lines will set the bits to 1 and the high states will set the bits to O For Information about setting an input line for invert see Section 8 1 3 on page 88 268 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 5 3 2 Configuration Configuring Sequence Sets and Sequence Set Advance Use the following procedure for populating sequence sets and setting the source for sequence set advance 1 Make sure that the sequencer feature is disabled 2 Set the Sequence Advance Mode parameter to Free Selection 3 Set the Sequence Set Total Number parameter The maximum number is 4 4 Select the sequence set address bits and set the input lines that will act as the control sources If the Set Total Number parameter was set to two a Bit O will be selected by default as the sequence set address bit Set input line 1 or input line 2 as the control source for setting bit 0 If the Set Total Number parameter was set to higher than two a Select bit 0 of the sequence set address bit b Set input line 1 or input line 2 as the control source for setting bit 0 c Select bit 1 of the sequence set address bit d Set the input line as the control source for setting bit 1 Chose the input line not used for setting bit 0 5 Use the Sequence Set Index parameter
82. of operation 290 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Select the appropriate auto function AOI for luminance statistics Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 is predefined to gather luminance statistics Set position and size of the auto function AOI Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue O Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue O Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Select gain for automatic luminance control Set gain limits for luminance control Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector All Camera AutoGainRawLowerLimit SetValue Camera GainRaw GetMin Camera AutoGainRawUpperLimit SetValue Camera GainRaw GetMax Set target value for luminance control This is always expressed by an 8 bit value regardless of the current pixel format Settable range 50 to 205 Camera AutoTargetValue SetValue 128 Set mode of operation for gain auto function Camera GainAuto SetValue GainAuto Once For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For general information about auto functions see Section 12 9 on page 283 For inf
83. on page 167 exceeds the host computer s capacity limits for data transfer or storage or both If you try to acquire more images than the host computer is able to process frames may be dropped For more information about bandwidth optimization see the nstallation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler pylon for Windows AW000611 The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal that will act as the frame start trigger signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera by executing a Trigger Software command for the frame start trigger on the host PC Line 1 When the source signal is set to line 1 you apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line 1 on the camera If the Trigger Source parameter is set to Line 1 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical signal will act as the frame start trigger Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the frame start trigger For more information about using a software trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 9 4 4 on page
84. ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Mono 12 Packed output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera P the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bg the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Py bits 11 4 B P4 bits 3 0 Po bits 3 0 Bo P bits 11 4 B3 P2 bits 11 4 B P3 bits 3 0 P bits 3 0 Bs P3 bits 11 4 Be P bits 11 4 B Ps bits 3 0 P bits 3 0 Bg P bits 11 4 Bg Pg bits 11 4 Bio P7 bits 3 0 Pe bits 3 0 B41 P7 bits 11 4 e e e Bm 5 P bits 11 4 Bm 4 P 2 bits 3 0 P bits 3 0 Bos P 9 bits 11 4 Bm P bits 11 4 Bma4 P bits 3 0 Ph 1 bits 3 0 Bm P bits 11 4 198 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Pixel Data Formats When a monochrome camera is set for Mono 12 Packed the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the unsigned type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Hexadecimal Indicates This Signal Level Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 e e e e e e 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 Basler scout GigE 199 Pixel Data Formats AWO001 1918000 11 2 4 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equ
85. packed pixel format 174 209 RMA number ssseee 339 S saturation eere 186 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 saturation adjustment 187 saving parameter sets 315 316 secondary color sssssesss 185 sensor architecture ssssssss 72 74 Optical size 2 4 6 8 10 pixel size 6 8 10 position accuracy 27 31 S ZE Giai iienaa eo iiu 1 2 4 6 8 10 TYP SN E 2 4 6 8 10 sensor board temperature parameter 313 sensor height parameter 313 sensor width parameter 313 sequence CyCle dnas ind Comis 242 sequence advance mode 237 sequence parameter 237 Sequence set etie 237 address idu eee EAT 268 configuration 245 262 269 index number sssssesss 239 orto ec 241 SIOE 13i ees 245 263 269 sequence set cycle esee 240 sequence set index chunk 338 sequence set index number 239 sequencer standard operation 241 serial number ssssssesess 40 sets of parameters saving 316 single frame acquisition mode 105 software trigger acquisition start sssse 111 frame start
86. parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off Because the acquisition start trigger mode is set to on the user must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera In this case we have set the acquisition start trigger signal source to input line 1 and the activation to rising edge so an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 will serve as the acquisition start trigger signal The Acquisition Frame Count parameter has been set to 3 When a rising edge of the electrical signal is applied to input line 1 the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has acquired 3 frames it will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Before any more frames can be acquired a new rising edge must be applied to input line 1 to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the frame start trigger is set to off the user does not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera The camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally The rate at which the frame start trigger signals will be generated is normally determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter If the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is disabled the camera will acquire frames at the maximum allowed frame rate This
87. s at which each camera will operate LE Bytes Frame E verd x Packet Overhead Payload Size 1 Leader Size Trailer Size acket Size Data Bandwidth Needed Bytes Frame x Frames s Where Packet Overhead 72 for a GigE network 78 for a 100 MBit s network Leader Size Packet Overhead 36 if chunk mode is not active Packet Overhead 12 if chunk mode is active Trailer Size Packet Overhead 8 X means round up x to the nearest integer X means round up x to the nearest multiple of 4 Step 5 Calculate data bandwidth assigned to each camera For each camera there is a parameter called Bandwidth Assigned This read only parameter indicates the total bandwidth that has been assigned to the camera The Bandwidth Assigned parameter includes both the bandwidth that can be used for image data transmission plus the bandwidth that is reserved for packet resents and camera control signals To determine the data bandwidth assigned you must subtract out the reserve Basler scout GigE 67 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW 0001 1918000 You can use the formula below to determine the actual amount of assigned bandwidth that is available for data transmission To use the formula you will need to know the current value of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter and the Bandwidth reserve parameter for each camera 100 Bandwidth Reserved Data Bandwidth Assigned Bandwidth
88. set advance only by software commands The camera will cycle through the available sequence sets in ascending sequence set index number as frames are triggered After one sequence set cycle is complete another one will start automatically Free selection Sequence set advance by selecting sequence sets at will from the available sequence sets The selection is controlled by the states of the input lines The regular cycling through the sequence sets according to the Auto or Controlled advance modes can by modified at any time during the cycling a restart starts a new sequence set cycle before the previous cycle is completed The restart can be controlled by the states of an input line controlled sequence advance only or by a software command a non cyclical advance allows to skip a sequence set and will advance to the sequence set after the next The non cyclical advance can be controlled by a software command Advance or restart controlled by an input line are also called synchronous advance and synchronous restart because the checking of the states of an input line is always linked to a frame trigger signal Advance or restart controlled by a software command are also called asynchronous advance and asynchronous restart because they are not linked to a frame start trigger signal 240 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features sequencer feature and should generally be used Asynchronous advance and restart are not su
89. setting the camera will also adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they are appropriate for a daylight light source with a color temperature of about 5000K Daylight 6500K This setting will automatically populate the matrix with a pre selected set of values that will make appropriate corrections for images captured with daylight lighting that has a color temperature of about 6500K When you select this setting the camera will also adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they are appropriate for a daylight light source with a color temperature of about 6500K Custom The user can set the values in the matrix as desired When you select this setting the camera will also adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they have neutral values that do not change the appearance of the colors In almost all cases selecting one of the settings that populate the matrix with pre selected values will give you excellent results with regard to correcting the colors for the light source you are using The custom setting should only be used by someone who is thoroughly familiar with matrix color transformations Instructions for using the custom setting appear in the next section The third parameter associated with matrix color transformation is the Color Transformation Matrix Factor parameter This parameter determines how strong an effect the matrix cor
90. single camera and no intervention is required A more complicated situation arises if you have multiple cameras connected to a single network adapter as shown in Figure 31 Adapter Single Path Network Switch GigE Camera Fig 31 Multiple Cameras on a Network One way to manage the situation where multiple cameras are sharing a single network path is to make sure that only one of the cameras is acquiring and transmitting images at any given time The data output from a single camera is well within the bandwidth capacity of the single path and you should have no problem with bandwidth in this case If you want to acquire and transmit images from several cameras simultaneously however you must determine the total data output rate for all the cameras that will be operating simultaneously and you must make sure that this total does not exceed the bandwidth of the single path 125 MByte s An easy way to make a quick check of the total data output from the cameras that will operate simultaneously is to read the value of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter for each camera This parameter indicates the camera s gross data output rate in bytes per second with its current settings If the sum of the bandwidth assigned values is less than 125 MByte s the cameras should be able to operate simultaneously without problems If it is greater you must lower the data output rate of one or more of the cameras 64 Basler scout GigE AW0001 1918
91. start trigger signals internally with no action by the user The frame start trigger is off The camera will generate frame start trigger signals internally with no action by the user Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger Off Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger Off c atrigger signal generated by the camera internally camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger V ZA camera is waiting for a frame start trigger X frame exposure and readout frame transmission 44 Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed r Acquisition Start it mn it it Li Li Li Trigger Signal 4 eee ere ittee 2 BA A BA BAA B BA Frame Start 010 a lt N Li i 010 Trigger Signal p tee ee ee ee ee ee Rum dmm mum dide m mm md mm mm e Time Fig 55 Use Case 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger Off 142 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Off Frame Start Trigger On Use case two is illustrated on page 144 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on Because the acquisition start trigger is set to off the user does not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals t
92. start trigger microsecond between setting the states of the input lines and the rise of the frame start trigger signal Also maintain the states of the input lines at least for one microsecond after the frame start trigger signal has risen D To ensure reliable selection of a sequence set allow the elapse of at least one Note also that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while an input line changes its state This happened for example when input line 1 changed its state before the first frame start trigger was received see also Figure 79 Basler scout GigE 265 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 266 state During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and D Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while an input line changes its any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 1 and 2 Because the states have not changed the parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 1 and 2 Th
93. start trigger signal to exit the camera from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 109 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 4 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters Standard Mode You can set the Trigger Mode and Trigger Source parameters for the acquisition start trigger and also set the Acquisition Frame Count parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode to on the Trigger Source to software and the Acquisition Frame Count to 5 Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode to on the Trigger Source to line 1 the Trigger Activation to rising edge and the Acquisi
94. the camera includes the LWIP TCP IP implementation The copyright information for this implementation is as follows Copyright c 2001 2002 Swedish Institute of Computer Science All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS S
95. the parameter value Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out1 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource TriggerReady You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 8 2 1 on page 89 For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera s output lines see Section 7 6 2 on page 83 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 9 1 on page 99 9 11 4 Trigger Ready Signal scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 gm gc cameras For information about the other camera models see Section 9 11 3 on page 153 As described in an earlier section on these cameras the exposure for an image acquisition must not begin until readout of the previously acquired image has ended The camera supplies a Trigger Ready TrigRdy output signal you can use to ensure that these conditions are met when you are using a hardware trigger signal to trigger image acquisition The trigger ready signal relates to different trigger signals depending on the image acquisition control mode In standard mode the trigger ready signal relates to the frame start tigger signal In legacy mode the trigger ready signal relates to the acquisition start tigger signal When you are acquiring image
96. the value of the Device Current Throughput parameter and the Payload Size parameters and found them to be 110000000 and 240000 respectively Formula 1 1 Max F RR E ax Frames s t5 x 1 x25 49 1612 86 Max Frames s 84 4 frames s Formula 2 1 Max F RRR ax Frames s 2000 us 95 uis Max Frames s 477 3 frames s Formula 3 110000000 240000 Max Frames s 458 3 frames s Max Frames s Formula one returns the lowest value So in this case the limiting factor is the sensor readout time and the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate would be 84 4 frames per second 166 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 14 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 gm gc cameras For information about the other camera models see Section 9 13 on page 163 In general the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate can be limited by two factors The sum of the exposure time plus the amount of time it takes to read the acquired image out of the imaging sensor and into the camera s frame buffer An acquired image is also known as a frame The exposure time is set by the user If you use very long exposure times you can acquire fewer frames per second The readout time varies depending on the height of the frame Shorter frames take less time to read out of the sensor The frame height is determined by the camer
97. thinners to clean the housing they can damage the surface finish Read the manual Read the manual carefully before using the camera 40 Basler scout GigE 2 Installation The information you will need to install and operate the camera is included in the nstallation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with pylon for Windows AW000611 You can download the document from the Basler website www baslerweb com The guide includes the information you will need to install both hardware and software and to begin capturing images It also describes the recommended network adapters describes the recommended architecture for the network to which your camera is attached and deals with the IP configuration of your camera and network adapter After completing your camera installation refer to the Basler Network Drivers and Parameters and Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth sections of this camera User s Manual for information about improving your camera s performance in a network and about using multiple cameras After the camera is powered on pylon software processes a camera description file included in the camera to make the camera features available for use The following camera description files are available and are used alternatively The Full camera description file providing all features The Basic camera description file providing most features Processing the Full camera description file takes mo
98. to on the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter must be set to continuous trigger Keep in mind that the camera will only react to acquisition start triggers when it is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 101 and Section 9 4 on page 107 D By default input line 2 is selected as the source signal for the acquisition start 9 4 2 Acquisition Frame Count Standard Mode When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on you must set the value of the camera s Acquisition Frame Count parameter The value of the Acquisition Frame Count can range from 1 to 255 With acquisition start triggering on the camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When in this acquisition status the camera cannot react to frame start trigger signals If an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the camera has received a number of frame start trigger signals equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting it will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status At that point you must apply a new acquisition
99. to select a sequence set index number for the sequence set currently being populated The available numbers are 0 through 3 6 Set up your first acquisition scenario i e lighting object positioning etc 7 Adjust the camera parameters to get the best image quality with this scenario you are adjusting the parameters in the active set 8 Execute the Sequence Set Store command to copy the sequence parameter values currently in the active set into the selected sequence set Any existing parameter values in the sequence set will be overwritten 9 Repeat the above steps for the other sequence sets starting from step 5 Configuring Sequence Sets and Sequence Set Advance Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for configuring sequence sets from within your application software and make settings for their selection when images are acquired The following code snippet gives example settings It illustrates using the API to set the free selection sequence advance mode with line 1 as the control source for bit 0 and line 2 as the control source for bit 1 of the sequence set address set the total number of sequence sets to 3 and populate sequence sets 0 through 2 by storing the sequence parameter values from the active set in the sequence sets Disable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false Basler scout GigE 269 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Set the Free Selection s
100. trigger rather than the frame start trigger how do you do it The answer is by using the Trigger Selector parameter Whenever you want to work with a specific type of trigger your first step is to set the Trigger Selector parameter to the trigger you want to work with either the acquisition start trigger or the frame start trigger At that point the changes you make to the Trigger Mode Trigger Source etc will be applied to the selected trigger only Exposure Time Control As mentioned earlier when a frame start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will begin to acquire a frame A critical aspect of frame acquisition is how long the pixels in the camera s sensor will be exposed to light during the frame acquisition If the camera is set for software frame start triggering the exposure time parameters will determine the exposure time for each frame If the camera is set for hardware frame start triggering there are two modes of operation timed and trigger width With the timed mode the exposure time parameters will determine the exposure time for each frame With the trigger width mode the way that you manipulate the rise and fall of the hardware signal will determine the exposure time The trigger width mode is especially useful if you want to change the exposure time from frame to frame 104 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 3 Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acqui
101. two elements The first element is the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter and the second element is the Timer Delay Time Base The delay time is the product of these two elements Delay Time Timer Delay Raw Parameter Value x Timer Delay Time Base By default the Timer Delay Time Base is fixed at 1 us Typically the delay time is adjusted by setting the Timer Delay Raw parameter value The Timer Delay Raw parameter value can range from 0 to 4095 So if the value is set to 100 for example the timer delay will be 100 x 1 us or 100 us To set the delay for a timer Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Delay Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerDelayRaw SetValue 100 Basler scout GigE 93 I O Control AW00011918000 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Changing the Delay Time Base By default the Timer Delay Time Base is fixed at 1 us minimum value and the timer delay is normally adjusted by setting the value of the Timer Delay Raw parameter However
102. used to check the camera s basic functionality and its ability to transmit an image to the host PC Test images can be used for service purposes and for failure diagnostics For test images the image is generated internally by the camera s logic and does not use the optics the imaging sensor or the ADC Six test images are available The Effect of Camera Settings on Test Images When any of the test image is active the camera s analog features such as gain black level and exposure time have no effect on the images transmitted by the camera For test images 1 2 3 and 6 the cameras digital features such as the luminance lookup table will also have no effect on the transmitted images But for test images 4 and 5 the cameras digital features will affect the images transmitted by the camera This makes test images 4 and 5 a good way to check the effect of using a digital feature such as the luminance lookup table Enabling a Test Image The Test Image Selector is used to set the camera to output a test image You can set the value of the Test Image Selector to one of the test images or to test image off You can set the Test Image Selector from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the selector set for no test image Camera TestImageSelector SetValue TestImageSelector Off set for the first test image Camera TestImageSelector SetValue Tes
103. using shift by 4 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 4 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 256 12 3 2 Digital Shift with 8 Bit Pixel Formats No Shift As mentioned in the Functional Description section of this manual the camera uses a 12 bit ADC to digitize the output from the imaging sensor When the camera is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 8 bit ox 2a T Ec tz fx effective depth by default the camera drops the 4 least significant bits from the ADC and transmits the 8 most significant bits bit 11 through 4 ADC S S B Not Shifted B p gt Shift by 1 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the output from the camera will include bit 10 through bit 3 from the ADC The result of shifting once is that the output of the 11 camera is effectively multiplied by 2 For example ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 4 0 assume that the camera is set for no shift that it is IM Ll viewing a uniform white target and that under these Le S me E B Shifted Once E conditions the reading for the brightest pixel is 10 If m gt you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1 the reading would increase to 20 230 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features If the pixel valu
104. value for P Bm 3 Low byte of brightness value for Ph 14 Bm 2 High byte of brightness value for P Bm4 Low byte of brightness value for Ph Bm High byte of brightness value for P 196 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Pixel Data Formats When the camera is set for Mono 16 the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the unsigned short little endian type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below Note that for 16 bit data you might expect a value range from 0x0000 to OXFFFF However with the camera set for Mono16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits transmitted are effective Therefore the highest data value you will see is OXOFFF indicating a signal level of 4095 This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 e e e e e e 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 D When a camera that is set for Mono 16 has only 12 bits effective the leader of transmitted frames will indicate Mono 12 as the pixel format Basler scout GigE 197 Pixel Data Formats AWO001 1918000 11 2 3 Mono 12 Packed Format When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 12 Packed pixel data format it outputs 12 bits of brightness data per pixel Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be
105. will not This makes test image 5 useful for checking the effects of digital features such as the luminance lookup table not have a 10 bit output mode available use of test image 5 on scA750 60 cameras is not normally recommended However one situation where test image 5 is useful on scA750 60 cameras is to check the effect of the luminance lookup table D On scA750 60 cameras test image 5 is a 10 bit pattern Since these cameras do Basler scout GigE 311 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Test Image 6 Moving Diagonal Color Gradient The moving diagonal color gradient test image is available on color cameras only and is designed for use when the camera is set for YUV output As shown in Figure 93 test image six consists of diagonal color gradients The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever you signal the camera to capture a new image To display this test pattern on a monitor you must convert the YUV output from the camera to 8 bit RGB Fig 93 Test Image Six 312 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 17 Device Information Parameters Each camera includes a set of device information parameters These parameters provide some basic information about the camera The device information parameters include Device Vendor Name read only contains the name of the camera s vendor For scout cameras this string will always indicate Basler as the vendor Device Model Name read o
106. your camera 14 4 Tech Support Resources If you need advice about your camera or if you need assistance troubleshooting a problem with your camera you can contact the Basler technical support team for your area Basler technical support contact information is located in the front pages of this manual You will also find helpful information such as frequently asked questions downloads and application notes in the Downloads and the Support sections of our website www baslerweb com If you do decide to contact Basler technical support please take a look at the form that appears on the last two pages of this section before you call Filling out this form will help make sure that you have all of the information the Basler technical support team needs to help you with your problem 14 2 Obtaining an RMA Number Whenever you want to return material to Basler you must request a Return Material Authorization RMA number before sending it back The RMA number must be stated in your delivery documents when you ship your material to us Please be aware that if you return material without an RMA number we reserve the right to reject the material You can find detailed information about how to obtain an RMA number in the Support section of our website www baslerweb com Basler scout GigE 339 Troubleshooting and Support AWO0001 1918000 14 3 Before Contacting Basler Technical Support To help you as quickly and efficiently as possible when yo
107. 0 20 Mar 2007 Updated the camera weights in the specification table in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added the dimensions for cameras equipped with CS mount lens adapters to Section 1 5 on page 24 Updated the description of the camera s network related parameters in Section 5 1 on page 57 Added Section 12 15 on page 306 to describe the new event reporting standard feature Added Section 13 7 on page 336 to describe the new CRC checksum chunk feature Added information for the newly released scA750 60gm gc camera Updated all affected text and tables as appropriate AW00011905000 08 Jun 2007 Added information on IP30 Section 1 5 1 1 on page 24 and Section 1 5 2 1 on page 29 Added information drawings inclusive on the 90 head housing variant Section 1 5 1 on page 24 Added Section 1 5 on page 24 with information on mechanical stress test results Modified Section 2 for the installation of the Basler pylon software version 1 0 Added information on the 8 bits effective pixel data Section 11 2 1 on page 195 Section 11 2 4 on page 200 Section 11 2 5 on page 200 and Section 11 3 2 on page 203 Minor modifications throughout the manual modified frame height to AOI height Basler scout GigE 343 Revision History AW00011918000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00011906000 12 Oct 2007 Modified mechanical drawings in Section 1 5 1 on page 24 Section 1 5 2 on page 29 Section 7 1 o
108. 0 Standard Features 12 3 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift You can enable or disable the digital shift feature by setting the value of the Digital Shift parameter When the parameter is set to zero digital shift will be disabled When the parameter is set to 1 2 3 or 4 digital shift will be set to shift by 1 shift by 2 shift by 3 or shift by 4 respectively You can set the Digital Shift parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Disable digital shift Camera DigitalShift SetValue O Enable digital shift by 2 Camera DigitalShift SetValue 2 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 233 Standard Features AWO0001 1918000 12 4 Area of Interest AOI The area of interest AOI feature lets you specify a portion of the sensor array and after each image is acquired only the pixel information from the specified portion of the array is transmitted to the host PC The area of interest is referenced to the top left corner of the sensor array The top left corner is designated as column 0 and row 0 as shown in Figure 71 The location and size of t
109. 0 s E f 0 020 90 fps So in this case the frame rate is 50 fps For more information about setting the camera for hardware acquisition start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExFSTrig signal see Section 9 4 5 2 on page 113 For more information about the electrical requirements for input lines 1 and 2 see Section 7 6 1 on page 81 For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 9 13 on page 163 and Section 9 14 on page 167 120 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 5 3 2 Exposure Modes If you are triggering the start of frame acquisition with an externally generated frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal two exposure modes are available timed and trigger width Timed Exposure Mode When timed mode is selected the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExFSTrig signal rises If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExFSTrig signal falls The following figure illustrates timed exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering ExFSTrig Signal Period ExFSTrig Signal jJ LJ Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 47 Timed Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering Note that if you attempt to trigger a new expos
110. 00 You can set the Gamma Enable parameter use the Gamma Selector and set Gamma parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values for SRGB type correction Enable the Gamma feature Camera GammaEnable SetValue true Set the gamma type to sRGB Camera GammaSelector SetValue GammaSelector sRGB The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values for user type correction Enable the Gamma feature Camera GammaEnable SetValue true Set the gamma type to User Camera GammaSelector SetValue GammaSelector User Set the Gamma value to 1 2 Camera Gamma SetValue 1 2 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 43 180 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 3 3 Matrix Color Transformation on All Color Models description file D If matrix color transformation is not available activate the Full camera For more information see Section 12 19 on page 321 Introduction The main objective of matrix color transformation is to make corrections to the color information that will account for the type of lighting used during image acquisition and to compensate for imperfections in the sensor s color g
111. 000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth You can lower the data output rate on a camera by using the Inter packet Delay parameter This parameter adds a delay between the transmission of each packet from the camera and thus slows the data transmission rate of the camera The higher the inter packet delay parameter is set the greater the delay between the transmission of each packet will be and the lower the data transmission rate will be After you have adjusted the Inter packet Delay parameter on each camera you can check the sum of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter values and see if the sum is now less than 125 MByte s 5 2 1 A Procedure for Managing Bandwidth In theory managing bandwidth sharing among several cameras is as easy as adjusting the inter packet delay In practice it is a bit more complicated because you must consider several factors when managing bandwidth The procedure below outlines a structured approach to managing bandwidth for several cameras The objectives of the procedure are To optimize network performance To determine the bandwidth needed by each camera for image data transmission To determine the bandwidth actually assigned to each camera for image data transmission For each camera to make sure that the actual bandwidth assigned for image data transmission matches the bandwidth needed To make sure that the total bandwidth assigned to all cameras does not exceed the network s bandwidth
112. 1002 is sent to the camera The camera still does not respond with a resend 10 Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 11 Because the maximum number of resend requests has been sent and the last Resend Response Timeout interval has expired packet 1002 is now considered as lost 12 End of the frame 13 Missing packets at the end of the frame 2999 and 3000 14 Interval defined by the Packet Timeout parameter S 50 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters Maximum Number Resend Requests The Maximum Number Resend Requests parameter sets the maximum number of resend requests the performance driver will send to the camera for each missing packet Resend Timeout The Resend Timeout parameter defines how long in milliseconds the performance driver will wait after detecting that a packet is missing before sending a resend request to the camera The parameter applies only once to each missing packet after the packet was detected as missing Resend Request Response Timeout The Resend Request Response Timeout parameter defines how long in milliseconds the performance driver will wait after sending a resend request to the camera before considering the resend request as lost If a resend request for a missing packet is considered lost and if the maximum number of resend requests as set by the Maximum Number Resend Requests parameter has not yet been reached another resend requ
113. 111 For more information about using a hardware trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 9 4 5 on page 112 Keep in mind that the camera will only react to frame start triggers when it is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 101 and Section 9 4 on page 107 D By default input line 1 is selected as the source signal for the frame start trigger 116 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Exposure Time Control with the Frame Start Trigger On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to one of the input lines the exposure time for each frame acquisition can be controlled with the exposure time parameters or it can be controlled by manipulating the hardware trigger signal For more information about controlling exposure time when using a software trigger see Section 9 4 4 on page 111 For more information about controlling exposure time when using a hardware trigger see Section 9 4 5 on page 112 For more information about exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 137 9 5 1 3 Setting the Frame Start Trigger Mode
114. 18000 Standard Features Note also that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while an input line changes its state This happened when input line 1 changed its state before the second frame start trigger was received see also Figure 76 state During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status D Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while the input line changes its For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values o
115. 3 on page 163 and Section 9 14 on page 167 Updated the exposure start delay values and the frame readout time formula in Section 9 12 on page 161 Updated the C5 and C constants formula 1 and the calculated example in Section 9 13 on page 163 Updated the C4 C2 and C5 constants formula 1 and the calculated example in Section 9 14 on page 167 Indicated the applicability of the gain calculation procedure for the scA640 120 and scA1300 32 corrected the dB gain values at max setting for the SCA640 120 and scA1300 32 and included a calculated example in Section 12 1 on page 219 Indicated the effect of the black level parameter setting for the scA640 120 in Section 12 2 on page 226 Modified Section 12 13 on page 302 and Section 12 14 on page 304 to take account of standard and legacy mode in image acquisition control Added events and parameter names in Section 12 15 on page 306 and removed some descriptions for transfer to the Camera Events code sample Rearranged sequence of sections 8 through 11 Removed the feedback page 348 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00011915000 13 Jul 2011 Removed information related to the scA1000 20gm gc cameras throughout the manual Simplified Figure 38 and Figure 39 in Section 7 6 on page 81 Removed the Typical LED Output Signal figure from Section 7 6 2 2 on page 83 Simplified the definit
116. 54 e e e e e e 0x01 1 0x00 0 202 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 2 Bayer RG 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 When a color camera is set for the Bayer RG 8 pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of data per pixel and the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 8 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 8 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 8 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The RG in the name Bayer RG 8 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even lines in the images pixel one will be red pixel two will be green pixel three will be red pixel four will be green etc For odd lines in the images pixel one will be green pixel two will be blue pixel three will be green pixel four will be blue etc For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 11 3 1 on page 201 The tables below describe how the data for the even lines and for the odd lines of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer RG 8 output The following standards are used in the tables Pg the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a line P the last pixel transmitted by the camera a line Bg the first byte of data for a l
117. 640 70gm gc 25 49 us 1612 86 us SCA1390 17 gm gc 46 53 us 10244 54 us SCA640 74 gm gc 22 66 us 1433 66 us SCA1400 17gm gc 46 53 us 9357 50 us scA640 120gm gc 14 16 us 1128 80 us scA1400 30gm gc 25 80 us 6418 04 us scA780 54gm gc 26 94 us 2308 54 us SCA1600 14gm gc 50 99 us 6658 82 us scA1000 30gm gc 35 39 us 4507 20 us SCA1600 28gm gc 26 62 us 2870 54 us scA1300 32gm gc 28 65 us 2806 10 us Formula 2 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the exposure time for the acquired frames 1 Max Frames s Z Exposure time in us C4 Where the constant C4 depends on the camera model as shown in the table below Camera Model C5 Camera Model C5 SCA640 70gm gc 95 us SCA1390 17 gm gc 177 us SCA640 74 gm gc 84 us SCA1400 17gm gc 175 us SCA640 120gm gc 24 us scA1400 30gm gc 97 us scA780 54gm gc 100 us scA1600 14gm gc 176 us ScA1000 30gm gc 132 us scA1600 28gm gc 95 23 us SCA1300 32gm gc 54 us For more information about setting the exposure time see Section 9 7 on page 137 Formula 3 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the frame transmission time _ Device Current Throughput Parameter Value i Payload Size Parameter Value Basler scout GigE 165 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Example Assume that you are using an scA640 70gm camera set for an exposure time of 2000 us and for 600 x 400 resolution Also assume that you have checked
118. 8 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 1000 1001 1003 i 1006 al I Time Fig 28 Example of a Receive Window with Resend Request Threshold amp Resend Request Batching Threshold Front end of the receive window Missing packets are detected here 2 Stream of packets Gray indicates that the status was checked as the packet entered the receive window White indicates that the status has not yet been checked 3 Receive window of the performance driver 4 Threshold for sending resend requests resend request threshold 5 A separate resend request is sent for each packets 997 998 and 999 6 Threshold for batching resend requests for consecutive missing packets resend request batching threshold Only one resend request will be sent for the consecutive missing packets 48 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters Resend Request Threshold This parameter determines the location of the resend request threshold within the receive window as shown in Figure 28 The parameter value is in per cent of the width of the receive window In Figure 28 the resend request threshold is set at 33 3396 of the width of the receive window A stream of packets advances packet by packet beyond the resend request threshold i e to the left of the resend request threshold in Figure 28 As s
119. 9 13 on page 163 234 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Setting the AOI Except for the scA1300 32 and scA1600 28 cameras the AOI is set by default to use the full resolution of the camera s sensor For the scA1300 32 cameras the default resolution is set to 1280 X 960 pixels for mono models and to 1278 x 958 pixels for color models For the scA1600 28 cameras the default resolution is set to 1626 x 1232 pixels for mono models and to 1624 x 1230 pixels for color models You can change the size and the position of the AOI by changing the value of the camera s X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters The value of the X Offset parameter determines the starting column for the area of interest The value of the Y Offset parameter determines the starting row for the area of interest The value of the Width parameter determines the width of the area of interest The value of the Height parameter determines the height of the area of interest When you are setting the camera s area of interest you must follow these guidelines The sum of the current X Offset setting plus the current Width setting must not exceed the width of the sensor in the camera model you are using For example on the monochrome version of the scA640 70 the sum of the current X Offset setting plus the current Width setting must not exceed 659 The sum of the current Y Offset setting plus the current Height setting must not exceed the height of t
120. 918000 7 6 1 2 Line Schematic The camera is equipped with two physical input lines designated as Input Line 1 and Input Line 2 The input lines are accessed via the 12 pin receptacle on the back of the camera As shown in the I O line schematic each input line is opto isolated See the previous section for input voltages and their significances The current draw for each input line is between 5 and 15 mA Figure 38 shows an example of a typical circuit you can use to input a signal into the camera By default Input Line 1 is assigned to receive an external hardware trigger ExTrig signal that can be used to control the start of image acquisition Your 12 Pin Gnd Receptacle I Input Tr Voltage Current Limiter l O In 1 0 to 24 VDC nto ged id lt O 4 n Your Gnd Camera Fig 38 Typical Voltage Input Circuit For more information about input line pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 7 2 on page 76 For more information about how to use an ExTrig signal to control image acquisition see Section 9 4 5 on page 112 Section 9 5 3 on page 120 and Section 9 6 3 on page 131 For more information about configuring the input lines see Section 8 1 on page 87 82 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Physical Interface 7 6 2 Output Lines 7 6 2 1 Voltage Requirements The following voltage requirements apply to the I O output VCC pin 10 of the 12 pin receptacle Voltage Significan
121. After one sequence set cycle is complete another one starts Sequence set cycle restarts are subject to asynchronous restart commands In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the available sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the im age acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used An AsyncAdvance command is sent After some delay the parameter values of the next sequence set will be loaded into the active set It is assumed here that the delay between sending the AsyncRestart command and it becoming effective will allow the acquisition of two more images When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used The AsyncAdvance command has not yet become effective because of the assumed associ ated delay When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set an
122. BG 8 Bayer RG 8 RGB 8 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed an increase of 64 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels And a decrease of 64 in the setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields an effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pixel Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed Bayer BG 16 Bayer RG 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed an increase of 4 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels A decrease of 4 in the setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels 226 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Setting the Black Level The black level can be adjusted by changing the value of the Black Level Raw parameter The Black Level Raw parameter value can range from 0 to 255 on all camera models except the scA750 60 gm gc On scA750 60 gm gc cameras the parameter value can range from 0 to 64 On scA1300 32 gm gc and scA1400 30 gm gc cameras the parameter value can range from 0 to 1023 To set the Black Level Raw parameter value 1 Set the Black Level Selector to Black Level All 2 Setthe Black Level Raw parameter to your desired value You can set the Black Level Selector and the Black Level Raw parameter value from within your applicati
123. Basler scout USER S MANUAL FOR GigE VISION CAMERAS Document Number AW000119 Version 18 Language 000 English Release Date 23 January 2015 BASLER the power of sight For customers in the USA This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for a computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules For customers in Canada This apparatus complies with the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in Radio Interference Regulations Pour utilisateurs au Canada Cet appareil est conforme aux normes Classe A pour bruits radio lectriques sp cifi
124. Basler scout GigE 169 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 170 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 Color Creation and Enhancement This chapter provides information about how color images are created on color camera models and about the features available for adjusting the appearance of the colors 10 1 Color Creation The sensor used in color models of the camera is equipped with an additive color separation filter known as a Bayer filter The pixel data output formats available on color cameras are related to the Bayer pattern so you need a basic knowledge of the Bayer filter to understand the pixel formats With the Bayer filter each individual pixel is covered by a micro lens that allows light of only one color to strike the pixel The pattern of the Bayer filter used on the camera is as shown in Figure 67 the alignment of the Bayer filter with respect to the sensor is shown as an example only the figure shows the BG filter alignment As the figure illustrates within each square of four pixels one pixel sees only red light one sees only blue light and two pixels see only green light This combination mimics the human eye s sensitivity to color Basler scout GigE 171 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 1918000 E i8 El 8 El 6 F3 6 E 8 El 6 El I6 Fl i8 pP CERA ERA ERE ERA ARA ARE ARE gn El i8 El 6 El 6 F3 6 El I8 El 6 El I6 Fl ERA ERA ERA ERA ARA ARE EREC ER E i8
125. C E 219 12 2 Black L Vel oret peek Roe Ia Ex RR Teac a Rte ten nes 226 12 3 Digital Shift rriei Teeba VSS slc cR Reb bs AE ELATALlS e ee ORE ORY bitte 228 12 3 1 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats 0 0 00 e ee eee 228 12 3 2 Digital Shift with 8 Bit Pixel Formats 0 0 0 eee ee eee 230 12 3 3 Precautions When Using Digital Shift lllllllelsersss 232 12 3 4 Enabling and Setting Digital Shift llle 233 12 4 Area of Interest AOI 0 0 0 00 hn 234 12 4 1 Changing AOI Parameters On the Fly 00 0002 e eee eee eee 236 12 5 Sequencer cuelga ee ala tee E ea Ua ACA eee 237 12 5 1 Auto Sequence Advance Mode 0 cece tee 242 12 5 2 Controlled Sequence Advance Mode 0 cece eee eee 247 12 5 2 1 Operation with the Always Active Sequence Control Source 248 12 5 2 2 Operation with an Input Line as Sequence Control Source 252 12 5 2 3 Operation with the Disabled Sequence Control Source 258 12 5 2 4 Configuration 4 so EXER er Re mde 262 12 5 3 Free Selection Sequence Advance Mode sllslselsesrsss 265 12 5 3 T Operation o c ee esum e donee eodd E ERA ER RE 265 12 5 3 2 Configuratii oa s Peek Eum a e a ERE 4 Re PL 269 12 6 Binning All Models Except scA750 60 6 2 et ee 271 12 6 1 Considerations When Using Binning 2 0 2 cee eee eee 272 12 7 Reverse X iu niiin ieta er eee Pe ana b
126. Camera Height SetValue 200 Camera OffsetY SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 12 4 1 Changing AOI Parameters On the Fly Making AOI parameter changes on the fly means making the parameter changes while the camera is capturing images continuously On the fly changes are only allowed for the parameters that determine the position of the AOI i e the Offset X and Offset Y parameters Changes to the AOI size are not allowed on the fly 236 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 5 Sequencer For more information about the auto functions feature see Section 12 9 on D The sequencer feature will not work if the auto functions feature is enabled page 283 control We strongly recommend to use the standard mode when using the sequencer feature and avoid using the legacy mode For more information about the standard mode see Section 8 on page 87 D This section assumes that the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition If the sequencer feature is not available activate the Full camera description file For more information see Section 12 19 on page 321 The sequencer feature allows to apply specific sets of configuratio
127. Checking the State of All Lines llle 97 9 Image Acquisition Control lelslslleeeeeelennnee 99 9 1 Image Acquisition Control Modes Legacy and Standard 0005 99 9 2 Means for Controlling Image Acquisition in Standard Mode 101 ii Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Table of Contents 9 3 Acquisition Start and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode 9 4 9 5 9 6 Basler scout GigE Legacy and Standard Mode 0 00 cece tee eee 105 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Standard Mode 0000000 ee eee 107 9 4 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode 005 108 9 4 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off 0 0 108 9 4 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On 2 000 108 9 4 2 Acquisition Frame Count Standard Mode 2 20002 ees 109 9 4 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters Standard MOd6 sak oyna ta amens b de ee ane bowed RUE ade eas 110 9 4 4 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode raa css eed e eee wea E de ee ed dae 111 9 4 4 1 IntroductiOn zr ci ele EE emet tees 111 9 4 42 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 111 9 4 5 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode spaasid ese RR Rx RARE De 112 9 4 54 Introduction ssegar ie Bet Boe Poe
128. Delay Abs parameter to set the delay time the camera accomplishes the setting change by automatically changing the Timer Delay Raw parameter to achieve the value specified by the Timer Delay Abs setting This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you use Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay time That is you must set the Timer Delay Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Timer Delay Raw and the current Timer Delay Base parameters For example if the time base was currently set to 50 us you could use the Timer Delay Abs parameter to set the delay to 50 us 100 us 150 us etc Note that if you set the Timer Delay Abs parameter to a value that you could not achieve by using the Timer Delay Raw and current Timer Delay Time Base parameters the camera will automatically change the setting for the Timer Delay Abs parameter to the nearest achieveable value 94 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 I O Control You should also be aware that if you change the delay time using the raw settings the Timer Delay Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new delay time 8 2 4 3 Setting a Timer Duration Time There are two ways to set the duration time for a timer by setting raw values or by setting an absolute value You can use whichever method you prefer to set the duration time Setting the Duration with Raw Values When the duration time for a timer is set using
129. Dx C 6 ar leiests Exposure Time in us AOI Height 1 x C4 C5 Where AO Height the height of the acquired frames as determined by the AOI Height settings The constants C4 and Cs depend on the camera model as shown in the table below scA750 60 gm gc C4 30 99 us Co 185 93 us For more information about setting the exposure time see Section 9 7 on page 137 168 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Formula 2 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the frame transmission time Device Current Throughput Parameter Value Max F vevice Lurrent nrougnput Farameter value aC Framesi Payload Size Parameter Value Example Assume that you are using a monochrome scA750 60 camera set for an exposure time of 2000 us and for 600 x 400 resolution Also assume that you have checked the value of the Device Current Throughput parameter and the Payload Size parameters and found them to be 110000000 and 240000 respectively Formula 1 1 Max F 2000 us 400 1 x 30 99 us 185 93 us ax Frames s 2000 us 400 1 x 30 99 us 185 93 us Max Frames s 68 4 frames s Formula 2 110000000 240000 Max Frames s 458 3 frames s Max Frames s Formula one returns the lowest value So in this case the limiting factor is the sum of the exposure time plus the sensor readout time and the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate would be 68 4 frames per second
130. EHE n an E u SOOO Image AOI 0123456 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 ER 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 5 16 17 18 19 20 21 Auto Function AOI Image AOI J 1 1 1r g 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 BHOLDOOOOOUULDL _ Auto Function AOI PE N Image AOI MS 0 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Auto Function AOI z EHEHEHE a an a m E Image AOI
131. Formats By selecting a pixel data format you determine the format layout of the image data transmitted by the camera This section provides detailed information about the available pixel data formats 11 1 Setting the Pixel Data Format The setting for the camera s Pixel Format parameter determines the format of the pixel data that will be output from the camera The available pixel formats depend on the camera model and whether the camera is monochrome or color Table 14 lists the pixel formats available on each monochrome camera model and Table 15 lists the pixel formats available on each color camera model Mono Camera Model Mono 8 Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed SCA640 70 SCA640 74 SCA640 120 ScA750 60 SCA780 54 scA1000 30 scA1300 32 scA1390 17 scA1400 17 scA1400 30 scA1600 14 scA1600 28 Table 14 Pixel Formats Available on Monochrome Cameras Basler scout GigE format available 193 Pixel Data Formats AWO001 1918000 Color Camera Mono 8 Bayer Bayer Bayer Bayer BG 12 RGB 8 YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 Model RG8 BG8 BG 16 Packed Packed Packed YUYV Packed SCA640 70 e E e e scA640 74 e e e e e e SCA640 120 e e e e e e scA750 60 E e e e SCA780 54 e e e e e e scA1000 30 e e e e scA1300 32 e e e e e s
132. Function AOI 2 will not be used to control the white balance of the image However as soon as the Balance White Auto function is set to once operation mode the Balance Ratio Abs parameter values for red green and blue are each set to 1 5 These settings will control the white balance of the image For information on the white balance feature see Section 10 3 1 on page 177 To use the balance white auto function carry out the following steps 1 Select Auto Function AOI2 2 Set the position and size of Auto Function AOl2 3 Enable the balance white auto function by setting it to once You can carry out steps 1 to 3 from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to use the auto function Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI2 See the Auto Function AOI section above Enabling the balance white auto function and selecting the once mode of operation Select the AOI to use for auto white balancing Currently AOI2 is predefined to gather the pixel data needed for automatic white balancing Set position and size of the auto function AOI Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI2 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue O Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue O Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax
133. Line 1 as the Sequence Control Source Synchronous Restart You can restart the sequence cycle by selecting the input line that is not used for sequence advance control as the source for controlling sequence cycle restart In the following use case see also Figure 77 the same settings were made as in the previous use case The Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering 254 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Line 1 was selected as the sequence control source for controlling sequence set advance In addition Line 2 was selected as the source for controlling sequence cycle restart Both input lines are not set for invert Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisi
134. LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Outl Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource AcquisitionTriggerWait You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 9 11 6 Camera Events Certain camera events allow you to get informed about the current camera acquisition status AcquisitionStartEventData event An acquisition start trigger has occurred FrameStartEventData event A frame start trigger has occurred ExposureEndEventData event The end of an exposure has occurred For more information about camera events and event reporting see Section 12 15 on page 306 160 Basler scout GigE AW O0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 12 Acquisition Timing Chart Figure 66 shows a timing chart for image acquisition and transmission The chart assumes that exposure is triggered by an ExTrig signal with rising edge activation and that the camera is set for the timed exposure mode The ExTrig signal will be an externally triggered frame start trigger signal when using image acquisition control in standard mode The ExTrig signal will be an externally triggered acquisition start trigger signal when using image acquisition control in legacy mode As Figure 66 shows there is a slight delay between the rise of the ExTrig signal and the start of exposure After the exposure time for an image acquisition is complete the camera begins reading out the acquired image data from the CCD sensor into a buffer in th
135. Models Except scA750 60 SCA750 60 gm gc For information about scA750 60 gm g cameras see The information in this section applies to all camera models except the Section 9 10 on page 151 The image acquisition process on the camera includes two distinct parts The first part is the exposure of the pixels in the imaging sensor Once exposure is complete the second part of the process readout of the pixel values from the sensor takes place In regard to this image acquisition process there are two common ways for the camera to operate with non overlapped exposure and with overlapped exposure In the non overlapped mode of operation each time an image is acquired the camera completes the entire exposure readout process before acquisition of the next image is started This situation is illustrated in Figure 59 Image Acquisition N Image Acquisition N 1 Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Time Fig 59 Non overlapped Exposure While operating in a non overlapped fashion is perfectly normal and is appropriate for many situations it is not the most efficient way to operate the camera in terms of acquisition frame rate On this camera however it is allowable to begin exposing a new image while a previously acquired image is being read out This situation is illustrated in Figure 60 and is known as operating the camera with overlapped
136. OFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 34 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 6 2 LZ4 Licensing The software in the camera includes the LZ4 implementation The copyright information for this implementation is as follows LZ4 Fast LZ compression algorithm Copyright C 2011 2013 Yann Collet BSD 2 Clause License http www opensource org licenses bsd license php Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
137. PC at a very low CPU load You can download the Basler Camera Software Suite from the Basler website www baslerweb com The pylon Camera Software Suite includes several tools that you can use to change the parameters on your camera including the pylon Viewer and the pylon API for different programming languages The remaining sections in this chapter provide an introduction to these tools For more information about installing pylon software see the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with pylon for Windows AW000611 You can download the guide from the Basler website www baslerweb com 3 1 1 pylon Viewer The Basler pylon Viewer is a standalone application that lets you view and change most of the camera s parameter settings via a GUI based interface The viewer also lets you acquire images display them and save them Using the pylon Viewer software is a very convenient way to get your camera up and running quickly when you are doing your initial camera evaluation or doing a camera design in for a new project For more information about using the viewer see the nstallation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with pylon for Windows AW000611 You can download the guide from the Basler website www baslerweb com Basler scout GigE 43 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters AWO0001 1918000 3 1 2 pylon IP Configurator The Basler pylon IP Configurator is a standalone application that lets you change the IP configuration of the ca
138. PI The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter values Payload Size int64 t payloadSize Camera PayloadSize GetValue GevStreamChannelSelector Camera GevStreamChannelSelector SetValue GevStreamChannelSelector StreamChannelO PacketSize Camera GevSCPSPacketSize SetValue 1500 Inter packet Delay Camera GevSCPD SetValue 1000 Frame transmission Delay Camera GevSCFTD SetValue 1000 Bandwidth Reserve Camera GevSCBWR SetValue 10 62 Basler scout GigE AW0001 1918000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation Camera GevSCBWRA SetValue 10 Frame Jitter Max int64 t jitterMax Camera GevSCFJM GetValue Device Max Throughput int64 t maxThroughput Camera GevSCDMT GetValue Device Current Throughput int64 t currentThroughput Camera GevSCDCT GetValue Resulting Framerate double resultingFps Camera ResultingFrameRateAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference Basler scout GigE 63 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00011918000 5 2 Managing Bandwidth When Multiple Cameras Share a Single Network Path If you are using a single camera on a GigE network the problem of managing bandwidth is simple The network can easily handle the bandwidth needs of a
139. Result Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result Basler scout GigE 331 Chunk Features AWO001 1918000 ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t triggerinputCounter Camera ChunkTriggerinputcounter GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Comparing Counter Chunk Data When comparing trigger input counter data and frame counter data related to the same image be aware that the trigger input counter initially starts at 1 whereas the frame counter starts at O Therefore the trigger input count will always be ahead of the matching frame count by one if both counters were started at the same time and if an image was acquired for every trigger Whenever the counters restart after having reached 4294967295 they will both start another counting cycle at 0 Accordingly the difference between matching counts will always be one regardless of the number of counting cycles Note that if both counters were started at the same time and not reset since and if the trigger input counter is ahead of the matching frame counter by more than one the camera was overtriggered and not all external triggers resulted in frame acquisitions Trigger Input C
140. TemperatureAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily read the parameters and to read or write the Device User ID You can use the Basler pylon IP Configurator to read or write the Device User ID For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 For more information about the pylon IP Configurator see Section 3 1 2 on page 44 314 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 18 Configuration Sets A configuration set is a group of values that contains i all of the parameter settings needed to control the Menon camera There are three basic types of configuration Flash Volatile sets the active set the default set and user sets MO lt gt User Set 2 The Active Set UserSet3 The active set contains the camera s current parameter settings and thus determines the camera s performance that is what your image currently looks gt like When you change parameter settings using the pylon API or direct register access you are making User Set 1 changes to the active set The active set is located in the camera s volatile memory and the settings are lost if the camera is reset or if power is switched off Standard prc e High Gain The Default Set Factory Setup Auto Functions When a camera is
141. The ExFSTrig signal facilitates periodic or non periodic acquisition start Modes are available that allow the length of exposure time to be directly controlled by the ExFSTrig signal or to be set for a pre programmed period of time Accumulated charges are read out of the sensor when exposure ends At readout accumulated charges are transported from the sensor s light sensitive elements pixels to the vertical shift registers see Figure 32 on page 72 The charges from the bottom line of pixels in the array are then moved into a horizontal shift register Next the charges are shifted out of the horizontal register As the charges move out of the horizontal shift register they are converted to voltages proportional to the size of each charge Each voltage is then amplified by a Variable Gain Control VGC and digitized by an Analog to Digital converter ADC After each voltage has been amplified and digitized it passes through an FPGA and into an image buffer All shifting is clocked according to the camera s internal data rate Shifting continues in a linewise fashion until all image data has been read out of the sensor The pixel data leaves the image buffer and passes back through the FPGA to an Ethernet controller where it is assembled into data packets The packets are then transmitted via an Ethernet network to a network adapter in the host PC The Ethernet controller also handles transmission and receipt of control data such as changes to the
142. WO0001 1918000 Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue true Camera AcquisitionFrameRateAbs SetValue 60 0 Start frame capture Camera AcquisitionStart Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 9 5 2 Using a Software Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 9 5 2 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software frame start trigger signal to the camera to begin each frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status frame exposure will start when the software frame start trigger signal is received by the camera Figure 46 illustrates frame acquisition with a software frame start trigger signal When the camera receives a software trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new frame start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new frame start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the camera s Exposure Mode parameter must be set to timed The exposure time for each ac
143. When the Frame Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to off the camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera With the trigger mode set to off the way that the camera will operate the frame start trigger depends on the setting of the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame the camera will automatically generate a single frame start trigger signal whenever it receives an Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame the camera will automatically begin generating frame start trigger signals when it receives an Acquisition Start command The camera will continue to generate frame start trigger signals until it receives an Acquisition Stop command The rate at which the frame start trigger signals are generated may be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter If the parameter is not enabled the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the maximum rate allowed with the current camera settings If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value less than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate frame start trigger signals at the rate specified by the parameter setting If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value greater than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current
144. a e g if the I O device s signal voltage for the low logic state is above 1 4 V or if additional protection of the signal transmission against EMI or ESD is required use a PLC power and I O cable D You must use a power and I O cable suitable for the camera and the connected For more information about input voltage requirements see Section 7 6 1 on page 81 For more information about EMI and ESD see Section 1 7 on page 36 General Recommendations The power and I O cable that connects to the camera must be terminated with a suitable I O connector For more information see Section 7 2 3 on page 77 must be shielded and must be constructed with twisted pair wire Use of twisted pair wire is essential to ensure that input signals are correctly received Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided must have a cross section of at least 0 14 mm approximately equal to an American wire gauge AWG rating of AWG 26 78 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Physical Interface The maximum recommended length of the power and I O cable is 10 meters The required I O connector is available from Basler Basler also offers a cable assembly that is terminated with an I O connector on one end and unterminated on the other Contact your Basler sales representative to order connectors or cables camera power VCC through two separate wires between the power supply and the camera as shown in the figure above
145. a specific situation has occurred The camera can generate and transmit events for these types of situations An acquisition start trigger has occurred AcquisitionStartEventData Overtriggering of the acquisition start trigger has occurred AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventData A frame start trigger has occurred FrameStartEventData Overtriggering of the frame start trigger has occurred FrameStartOvertriggerEventData The end of an exposure has occurred ExposureEndEventData An event overrun has occurred EventOverrunEventData see below for more information An Example of Event Reporting An example related to the Exposure End event illustrates how event reporting works The example assumes that your system is set for event reporting see below and that an end of exposure has just occurred in the camera In this case 1 An Exposure End event is generated The event contains the event in the strict sense and sup plementary information An Event Type Identifier In this case the identifier would show that an exposure end type event has occurred A Frame ID This number indicates the frame count at the time that the event occurred A Stream Channel Identifier Currently this identifier is always 0 A Timestamp This is a timestamp indicating when the event occurred The time stamp timer starts running at power off on or at camera reset The unit for the timer is ticks where one tick 8 ns The timestamp is a 64 bit value
146. a U or a V component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 127 OxFE 126 e e e e e e 0x81 1 0x80 0 Ox7F 1 e e e e e e 0x01 127 0x00 128 The signal level of a U component or a V component can range from 128 to 127 decimal Notice that the data values have been arranged to represent the full signal level range 214 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 8 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 When a color camera is set for the Mono 8 pixel data format the pixel values in each captured image are first interpolated and converted to the YUV color model as described for the YUV 4 2 2 Packed format The camera then transmits the 8 bit Y value for each pixel to the host PC In the YUV color model the Y component for each pixel represents a brightness value This brightness value can be considered as equivalent to the value that would be sent from a pixel in a monochrome camera So in essence when a color camera is set for Mono 8 it outputs an 8 bit monochrome image This type of output is sometimes referred to as Y Mono 8 The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when a color camera is set for Mono 8 output The following standards are used in the table Po
147. a parameter value until the related image property reaches a target value Note that the manual setting of the parameter value is not preserved For example when the Gain Auto function adjusts the gain parameter value the manually set gain parameter value is not preserved For some auto functions the target value is fixed For other auto functions the target value can be set as can the limits between which the related parameter value will be automatically adjusted For example the gain auto function lets you set an average gray value for the image as a target value and also set a lower and an upper limit for the gain parameter value Generally the different auto functions can operate at the same time For more information see the following sections describing the individual auto functions pertinent camera settings and with the general circumstances used for capturing D A target value for an image property can only be reached if it is in accord with all images Otherwise the target value will only be approached For example with a short exposure time insufficient illumination and a low setting for the upper limit of the gain parameter value the Gain Auto function may not be able to achieve the current target average gray value setting for the image Basler scout GigE 283 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 only not available on scA750 60 cameras An auto function uses the binned pixel You can use an auto f
148. a s AOI Height settings The amount of time that it takes to transmit an acquired frame from the camera to your host PC The amount of time needed to transmit a frame depends on the bandwidth assigned to the camera acquisition frame rate for a given AOI cannot be achieved To achieve the maximum possible acquisition frame rate set the camera for the continuous acquisition mode D When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame the maximum possible To determine the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with your current camera settings you can read the value of the camera s Resulting Frame Rate parameter This parameter indicates the camera s current maximum allowed frame rate taking the AOI exposure time and bandwidth settings into account For more information about AOI settings see Section 12 4 on page 234 For more information about the Resulting Frame Rate parameter see Section 5 1 on page 57 Basler scout GigE 167 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Increasing the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate You may find that you would like to acquire frames at a rate higher than the maximum allowed with the camera s current settings In this case you must first use the two formulas described below to determine what factor is restricting the maximum frame rate the most Next you must try to make that factor less restrictive You will often find that the sum of the exposure time plus the sensor reado
149. acquisition start triggers when it is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 101 and Section 9 4 on page 107 D By default input line 1 is selected as the source signal for the acquisition start Exposure Time Control with the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to e g input line 1 the exposure time for each frame acquisition can be controlled with the exposure time parameters or it can be controlled by manipulating the hardware trigger signal For more information about controlling exposure time when using a software trigger see Section 9 4 4 on page 111 For more information about controlling exposure time when using a hardware trigger see Section 9 4 5 on page 112 For more information about exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 137 Basler scout GigE 127 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 6 1 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters You can set the Trigger Mode and related parameter values for the frame start trigger from within your application software b
150. al All Models Except scA750 60 SCA750 60 gm gc For information about scA750 60 gm gc cameras see The information in this section applies to all camera models except the Section 9 11 4 on page 155 As described in the previous section the cameras can operate in an overlapped acquisition fashion When the camera is operated in this manner it is especially important that the exposure time of a new image acquisition not start until exposure of the previously acquired image is complete and the exposure time of a new image acquisition not end until readout of the previously acquired image is complete The camera supplies a Trigger Ready TrigRdy output signal you can use to ensure that these conditions are met when you are using a hardware trigger signal to trigger image acquisition The trigger ready signal relates to different trigger signals depending on the image acquisition control mode In standard mode the trigger ready signal relates to the frame start trigger signal In legacy mode the trigger ready signal relates to the acquisition start trigger signal When you are acquiring images the camera automatically calculates the earliest moment that it is safe to trigger each new acquisition The trigger ready signal will go high when it is safe to trigger an acquisition will go low when the acquisition has started and will go high again when it is safe to Basler scout GigE 153 Image Acquisition
151. al sensor lines The affected formulas appear on page 162 page 164 and Basler scout GigE 273 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 7 Reverse X The reverse X feature is a horizontal mirror image feature When the reverse X feature is enabled the pixel values for each line in a captured image will be swapped end for end about the line s cen ter This means that for each line the value of the first pixel in the line will be swapped with the value of the last pixel the value of the second pixel in the line will be swapped with the value of the next to last pixel and so on Figure 82 shows a normal image on the left and an image captured with reverse X enabled on the right Normal Image Mirror Image E 0000000000000000 Fig 82 Reverse X Mirror Imaging Using AOls with Reverse X You can use the AOI feature when using the reverse X feature Note however that the position of an AOI relative to the sensor remains the same regardless of whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled As a consequence an AOI will display different images depending on whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled 274 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Normal Image Mirror Image I I E L EIL LE Cu HG ge l oecooocoooccocoo Ee aT AOI AOI Fig 83 Using an AOI with Reverse X Mirror Imaging For color cameras provisions are made ensuring that the effective color filter alignment will be constant fo
152. ally you would expect exposure to take place only when the ExASTrig signal is high But since the signal falls while the previous frame is still reading out the camera automatically extends exposure until the readout is complete On the second cycle of the ExASTrig signal shown in the figure the signal rises during previous frame readout but falls after the readout is complete This is a normal situation and exposure would be determined by the high time of the ExASTrig signal as you would expect Basler scout GigE 133 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 TrigRdy Signal Exposure ExASTrig Signal ee 0 0 foL Frame Readout Oo mes cmm Fig 54 Trigger Width Exposure Mode with Overlapped Exposure You can set the exposure time parameter value and select an exposure mode from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the exposure time parameter and select the exposure mode set for the timed exposure mode set exposure time to 3000 us Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 set for the width exposure mode set minimum exposure time to 3000 us Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode TriggerWidth Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler p
153. an also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 12 5 2 4 Configuration Configuring Sequence Sets and Advance Control Use the following procedure for populating sequence sets and setting the sources for sequence set advance and sequence cycle restart Make sure that the sequencer feature is disabled Set the Sequence Advance mode to Controlled Set the Sequence Set Total Number parameter The maximum number is 64 Set the Sequence Control Selector parameter to Advance to configure sequence set advance Set the Sequence Control Source parameter to specify the source that will control synchronous sequence set advance Note that the same source will apply to all sequence sets available at the same time in the camera The following sources are available Always Active Line 1 Line 2 Disabled Set the Sequence Control Selector parameter to Restart to configure sequence set cycle restart Set the Sequence Control Source parameter to specify the source for restart set cycle restart with one exception If you want to only use asynchronous advance and restart choose Disabled as the source for advance and restart D Never choose the same source for sequence set advance and sequence 262 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features The following sources are available Line 1 Line 2 Disabled Select a sequence set index number by setting the Sequence Set Index parameter Th
154. and Command Executed Executed Neaeeaeeeees ZEE BESS SSIS Acquisition Start Trigger Signal applied to line 1 ZZ Frame Start i a E f f y Trigger Signal J Ka a e dicke a E E uie d toc e am d cie monis ee ee Sele was Time Fig 57 Use Case 3 Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger Off 146 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 4 Acquisition Start and Frame Start Triggers Both On Use case four is illustrated on page 148 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on Because the acquisition start trigger mode is set to on the user must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera In this case we have set the acquisition start trigger signal source to software so the execution of an acquisition trigger software command will serve as the acquisition start trigger signal The Acquisition Frame Count parameter is set to 3 When an acquisition trigger software command is executed the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has acquired 3 frames it will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Before any more frames can be acquired a new acq
155. and Related Parameters You can set the Trigger Mode and related parameter values for the frame start trigger from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API If your settings make it necessary you can also set the Trigger Source parameter The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger to on and the Trigger Source to input line 1 Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode to continuous the Trigger Mode to off and the Acquisition Frame Rate to 60 Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Set the exposure time Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Enable the acquisition frame rate parameter and set the frame rate Enabling the acquisition frame rate parameter allows the camera to control the frame vate internally Basler scout GigE 117 Image Acquisition Control A
156. are by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to read the parameters or write the Device User ID Read the Vendor Name parameter Pylon String t vendorName Camera DeviceVendorName GetValue Read the Model Name parameter Pylon String t modelName Camera DeviceModelName GetValue Read the Manufacturer Info parameter Pylon String t manufacturerInfo Camera DeviceManufacturerInfo GetValue Read the Device Version parameter Pylon String t deviceVersion Camera DeviceVersion GetValue Read the Firmware Version parameter Pylon String t firmwareVersion Camera DeviceFirmwareVersion GetValue Basler scout GigE 313 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Read the Device ID parameter Pylon String t deviceID Camera DeviceID GetValue Write and read the Device User ID Camera DeviceUserID custom name Pylon String t deviceUserID Camera DeviceUserID GetValue Read the Sensor Width parameter int64 t sensorWidth Camera SensorWidth GetValue Read the Sensor Height parameter int64 t sensorHeight Camera SensorHeight GetValue Read the Max Width parameter int64 t maxWidth Camera WidthMax GetValue Read the Max Height parameter int64 t maxHeight Camera HeightMax GetValue Read the Temperature Abs parameter camera TemperatureSelector SetValue TemperatureSelector Sensorboard double temperature camera
157. asler scout GigE 151 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 11 Acquisition Monitoring Tools 9 11 1 Exposure Active Signal The camera s exposure active ExpAc signal goes high when the exposure time for each image acquisition begins and goes low when the exposure time ends as shown in Figure 62 This signal can be used as a flash trigger and is also useful when you are operating a system where either the camera or the object being imaged is movable For example assume that the camera is mounted on an arm mechanism and that the mechanism can move the camera to view different portions of a product assembly Typically you do not want the camera to move during exposure In this case you can monitor the ExpAc signal to know when exposure is taking place and thus know when to avoid moving the camera Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure Frame N Frame N 1 Frame N 2 2 3 5 us lt ka ii 10 26 use a 10 p ExpAc Bs i 0 26 us e Signal Timing charts are not drawn to scale Times stated are typical 2 3 5 us lt Fig 62 Exposure Active Signal and the fall of the signal in relation to the start and the end of exposure See When you use the exposure active signal be aware that there is a delay in the rise Figure 62 for details By default the ExpAc signal is assigned to physical output line 1 on the camera However the assignment of the ExpAc signal to a physical output line can be changed
158. assume that you want to set your camera for Bayer BG 8 output and therefore you must set the Processed Raw Enable parameter value to enabled The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Set the camera for Bayer BG8 pixel data output format Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat BayerBG8 Because the camera is set for a Bayer output format the Processed Raw Enabled parameter must be set to enabled Camera ProcessedRawEnable SetValue true 188 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement Enable the Color Adjustment feature Camera ColorAdjustmentEnable SetValue true Select red as the color to adjust Camera ColorAdjustmentSelector SetValue ColorAdjustmentSelector Red Set the red hue as a floating point value Camera ColorAdjustmentHue SetValue 1 125 Set the red saturation as a floating point value Camera ColorAdjustmentSaturation SetValue 1 375 Select cyan as the color to adjust Camera ColorAdjustmentSelector SetValue ColorAdjustmentSelector Cyan Set the cyan hue as an integer value Camera ColorAdjustmentHueRaw SetValue 36 Set the cyan saturation as an integer value Camera ColorAdjustmentSaturationRaw SetValue 176 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 43 Color Adjust
159. ate of an individual output line To check the state of a line Use the Line Selector parameter to select an output line Read the value of the Line Status parameter to determine the current state of the selected line A value of true means the line s state is currently high and a value of false means the line s state is currently low You can set the Line Selector and read the Line Status parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and read the parameter value Select output line 2 and read the state Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out2 bool outputLine2State Camera LineStatus GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 8 3 2 Checking the State of All Lines You can determine the current state of all input and output lines with a single operation To check the state of all lines Read the value of the Line Status All parameter You can read the Line Status All parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read the parameter value int64 t lineState Camera LineStatusAll GetValue
160. ation about using a suitable power and I O cable in Section 7 3 2 on page 78 Added information related to the maximum wire diameter in Section 7 3 2 on page 78 Updated information related to the maximum cable length in Section 7 3 2 on page 78 Removed information related to the PLC I O cable voltage levels in Section 7 6 1 on page 81 Basler scout GigE 351 Revision History AWO0001 1918000 352 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Index A acquisition frame count parameter 109 111 acquisition frame rate and AOL SIZe eere tai 167 maximum allowed 167 acquisition frame rate abs parameter 115 E 126 128 acquisition mode parameter 105 acquisition start command 101 105 304 acquisition start trigger 102 details tee 107 acquisition start trigger delay legacy mode 134 acquisition start trigger mode parameter 108 acquisition status sseeesss 304 acquisition stop command 101 105 acquisition trigger wait signal 158 acquistion start trigger in legacy mode 125 active configuration set 315 active Set casco hien eda 237 see active configuration set additive mixing eenen 185 advance asynchronous nosen 240 synchronous nossen 240 AO see area of interest area of interest auto function AOI 283 default resolution
161. atus of packets The check for missing packets is made as packets enter the receive window If a packet arrives from higher in the sequence of packets than expected the preceding skipped packet or packets are detected as missing For example suppose packet n 1 has entered the receive window and is immediately followed by packet n 1 In this case as soon as packet n 1 enters the receive window packet n will be detected as missing Basler scout GigE 47 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AWO001 1918000 General Parameters Enable Resend Enables the packet resend mechanisms If the Enable Resend parameter is set to false the resend mechanisms are disabled The performance driver will not check for missing packets and will not send resend requests to the camera If the Enable Resend parameter is set to true the resend mechanisms are enabled The performance driver will check for missing packets Depending on the parameter settings and the resend response the driver will send one or several resend requests to the camera Receive Window Size Sets the size of the receive window Threshold Resend Mechanism Parameters The threshold resend request mechanism is illustrated in Figure 28 where the following assumptions are made Packets 997 998 and 999 are missing from the stream of packets Packet 1002 is missing from the stream of packets DIAGRAM IS NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 3 4 5 6 1 2 985 986 987 98
162. auto functions s parameter value If necessary set the target value If necessary set the auto function profile to define priorities between auto functions Enable the auto function by setting it to once or continuous For more information about the individual settings see the next sections that describe the individual auto functions Basler scout GigE 289 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 9 2 Gain Auto Gain Auto is the automatic counterpart of the manual gain feature When the gain auto function is operational the Gain Raw All parameter value is automatically adjusted within set limits until a target average gray value for the pixel data from Auto Function AOI1 is reached The gain auto function uses Auto Function AOI1 and can be operated in the once and continuous modes of operation If Auto Function AOI1 does not overlap the Image AOI see the Auto Function AOI section the pixel data from Auto Function AOI will not be used to control the image brightness Instead the current manual setting of the Gain Raw All parameter value will control the image brightness When the gain auto function is used the exposure auto function can be used at the same time In this case however you must also set the auto function profile feature For more information about gain see Section 12 1 on page 219 For more information about the auto function profile feature see Section 12 9 4 on page 294 To use the gain auto fu
163. bit s Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed RGB 8 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 12 VDC 5 to 24 VDC 5 lt 1 ripple 43W 12V I O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional 10 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification SCA1600 28 gm gc Size Lx W x H standard housing 90 head housing 73 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 91 65 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors and front module Weight standard housing 90 head housing 170 g typical 190 g typical Conformity CE RoHS GenlCam GigE Vision IP30 FCC The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Software Ba
164. bsolute value The two methods are described below You can use whichever method you prefer to set the exposure time The exposure time must not be set below a minimum specified value The minimum exposure time varies by camera model as shown in Table 11 The maximum exposure time that can be set also varies by camera model as shown in Table 11 Camera Model Minimum Allowed Exposure Time Maximum Possible Exposure Time SCA640 70gm gc 24 us 10000000 us SCA640 74 gm gc 24 us 10000000 us scA640 120gm gc 16 us 10000000 us scA750 60gm gc 124 us 126976 us scA780 54gm gc 26 us 10000000 us scA1000 30gm gc 32 us 10000000 us SCA1300 32gm gc 22 us 10000000 us SCA1390 17 gm gc 34 us 10000000 us scA1400 17gm gc 38 us 10000000 us SCA1400 30gm gc 28 us 10000000 us SCA1600 14gm gc 31 us 10000000 us SCA1600 28gm gc 31 us 10000000 us Table 11 Minimum Allowed Exposure Time and Maximum Possible Exposure Time automatically adjusted Exposure Auto is an auto function and the automatic counterpart to manually setting an absolute exposure time The exposure auto function automatically adjusts the Auto Exposure Time Abs parameter value In contrast to the manually set absolute exposure time the automatically adjusted absolute exposure time is not restricted to multiples of the current exposure time base The automatic adjustment is not available when trigger width exposure mode is selected
165. cA1390 17 e e e e e e scA1400 17 e e e e e e scA1400 30 e e e e e scA1600 14 e e e e e e e SCA1600 28 e e 9 e e Table 15 Pixel Formats Available on Color Cameras format available default set to the Bayer BG 8 pixel format and all other color cameras are by For optimum use of the available bandwidth the scA1600 28gc cameras are by default set to the YUV 4 2 2 pixel format Details of the monochrome formats are described in Section 11 2 on page 195 and details of the color formats are described in Section 11 3 on page 201 You can set the Pixel Format parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat Mono8 Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat Monol2Packed Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat_Monol PixelFormat YUVA422Packed PixelFormat YUV422 YUYV Packed Camera PixelFormat SetValue Camera PixelFormat SetValue Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat BayerBG8 Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat BayerBG16 PixelFormat RGB8Packed Camera PixelFormat SetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more informa
166. camera has cycled once through the complete sequence set cycle When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 2 for sequence set 5 this sequence set can not after two uses be used again in the current sequence set cycle Therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Another sequence set cycle has started The sequencer feature is disabled while frame exposure and readout are in progress The complete frame is transmitted and the cycling through sequence sets is terminated The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled Use Case Operation in auto sequence advance mode Automatic cycling through the sequence set cycles with no action by the user Enabling and disabling of the sequencer feature Settings Sequence Set Total Number 6 Sequence Set Executions 1 for sequence sets 0 2 3 and 4 Sequence Set Executions 2 for sequence set 5 Sequence Set Executions 3 for sequence set 1 v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequence Se
167. capacity To make adjustments if the bandwidth capacity is exceeded Step 1 Improve the Network Performance If you use as recommended the Basler performance driver with an Intel PRO network adapter or a compatible network adapter the network parameters for the network adapter are automatically optimized and need not be changed If you use the Basler filter driver and have already set network parameters for your network adapter during the installation of the Basler pylon software continue with step two Otherwise open the Network Connection Properties window for your network adapter and check the following network parameters If you use an Intel PRO network adapter Make sure the Receive Descriptors parameter is set to its maximum value and the Interrupt Moderation Rate parameter is set to Extreme Also make sure the Speed and Duplex Mode parameter is set to Auto Detect If you use a different network adapter see whether parameters are available that will allow setting the number of receive descriptors and the number of CPU interrupts The related parameter names may differ from the ones used for the Intel PRO adapters Also the way of setting the parameters may be different You may e g have to use a parameter to set a low number for the interrupt moderation and then use a different parameter to enable the interrupt moderation If possible set the number of receive descriptors to a maximum value and set the number of Basler
168. ce 30 0 VDC Absolute maximum The absolute maximum must never be exceeded Otherwise the camera can be damaged and the warranty becomes void 3 3 to 24 VDC Safe operating I O output supply voltage range lt 43 3 VDC The I O output may operate erratically Table 10 Voltage Requirements for the I O Output VCC 7 6 2 2 Line Schematic The camera is equipped with four physical output lines designated as Output Line 1 Output Line 2 Output Line 3 and Output Line 4 The output lines are accessed via the 12 pin receptacle on the back of the camera As shown in the I O schematic each output line is opto isolated See the previous section for the recommended operating voltage The maximum current allowed through an output circuit is 50 mA A conducting transistor means a logical one and a non conducting transistor means a logical zero Figure 39 shows a schematic circuit you can use to monitor an output line with a voltage signal The circuit in Figure 39 is monitoring output line 1 Your Gnd Out_1_ Ctrl spel a gt 35 a aA gi L 3 3 to 24 4 7 VDC ee I I I l l O Out 1 one 7 pe Wee Signal to You Load a l O Out VCC Resistance odis Your Gnd 12 Pin Receptacle Fig 39 Typical Voltage Output Circuit Basler scout GigE 83 Physical Interface AWO0001 1918000 By default the camera s exposure active ExpAc signal is assigned to Output Line 1 The exposure active signal ind
169. ce set 0 The Sequence Set Total Number parameter specifies the total number of different sequence sets that are available and included within a sequence set cycle The maximum number is 64 Operating the Sequencer The following use case see also Figure 73 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in auto sequence advance mode As images are captured continuously the camera advances automatically with no action by the user from one sequence set to the next in ascending sequence set index numbers The advance is also subject to the Sequence Set Executions parameter settings After one sequence set cycle is complete another one starts 242 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the available sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence sets 0 2 3 and 4 to 2 for sequence set 5 and to 3 for sequence set 1 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received sequence set 0 is used for the image acquisi
170. cessed or interpolated in any way For each pixel covered with a red portion of the filter you get 8 or 12 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green portion of the filter you get 8 or 12 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue portion of the filter you get 8 or 12 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output For complete details of these pixel data output formats see Section 11 1 on page 193 and Section 11 3 on page 201 RGB Format All color cameras with a Bayer filter can output pixel data in RGB 8 Packed format When a color camera is set for this format a demosaicing algorithm is performed to get RGB data for each pixel This is required because color cameras with a Bayer filter on the sensor gather only one color of light for each individual pixel Once the demosaicing is complete 8 bits of red green and blue data is transmitted for each pixel to the host PC For complete details of this pixel data output format see Section 11 3 5 on page 209 YUV Formats All color cameras with a Bayer filter can output pixel data in YUV 4 2 2 Packed format or in YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed format When a color camera is set for either of these formats each pixel in the captured image goes through a two step conversion process as it exits the sensor and passes through the camera s electronics This process yields Y U and V color information for each pixel In the first s
171. code snippets programming language 39 proper use ttes 39 color adjustment sessssse 185 color adjustment enable parameter 188 color adjustment hue parameter 188 color adjustment saturation parameter 188 COlOF CUDO teintes 185 color enhancement setting procedure 190 color factory setup 315 317 color filler uite 171 color hexagon seeeeeeeeese 185 color mixing eseria iiri eaea eraa 185 color transformation mode parameter 182 configuration set loaded at startup 320 configuration sets 315 320 conformity sseusssss 3 5 7 9 11 CONNGCIONS 4i ere peterem eg 75 continuous acquisition mode 105 CPU interrupts esses 65 CRC checksum chunk 336 CUrT nit Sel Lernen 238 D debouncer and exposure start delay 162 explained esee 298 Setting airi eem 299 300 default configuration set 315 device current throughput parameter 62 device firmware version parameter 313 device ID parameter 313 device manufacturer info parameter 313 device max throughput parameter 61 device model name parameter 313 device scan type parameter 313 device user ID param
172. controlling image acquisition with a software trigger you can use the acquisition status feature to determine when the camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition Using this feature you can avoid triggering the camera at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings For other means of checking the acquisition status see also the Acquisition Monitoring Signals section you cannot use the status of the Acquisition Start command to determine when the Itis not possible to monitor the status of the Acquisition Start command Therefore camera is ready to be triggered for an image acquisition Note the different applicability of the acquisition status feature depending on the image acquisition control mode Standard mode The acquisition status can be determined for the frame start trigger Legacy mode The acquisition status can be determined for the acquisition start trigger Determining the Acquisition Status To determine the acquisition status of the camera Use the Acquisition Status Selector to select the Frame Trigger Wait status The Frame Trigger Wait parameter also applies when operating the camera in legacy mode where actually the status of the acquisition start trigger is determined Read the value of the AcquisitionStatus parameter Standard mode If the value is set to false the camera is not ready to receive a frame start trigger if the value is set to tru
173. cquisition The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status frame acquisition will start whenever the appropriate edge transition is received by the camera When the camera receives a hardware trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new acquisition start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new acquisition start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When the camera is operating under control of an EXASTrig signal the period of the ExASTrig signal will determine the rate at which the camera is acquiring frames 1 OF R ExASTrig period in seconds Ee For example if you are operating a camera with an ExASTrig signal period of 20 ms 0 020 s 1 0 020 Vm So in this case the frame rate is 50 fps acquire frames at too high a rate some of the acquisition trigger signals that you apply will be received by the camera when it is not in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status The camera will ignore any acquisition start trigger signals that it receives when it is not waiting for acquisition start trigger This situation is commonly referred to as over triggering
174. ctor and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerDurationAbs SetValue 100 When you use the Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration time the camera accomplishes the setting change by automatically changing the Timer Duration Raw parameter to achieve the value specified by the Timer Duration Abs setting This leads to a limitation that you must keep in mind if you use Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration time That is you must set the Timer Duration Abs parameter to a value that is equivalent to a setting you could achieve by using the Timer Duration Raw and the current Timer Duration Base parameters For example if the time base was currently set to 50 us you could use the Timer Duration Abs parameter to set the duration to 50 us 100 us 150 us etc If you read the current value of the Timer Duration Abs parameter the value will indicate the product of the Timer Duration Raw parameter and the Timer Duration Time Base In other words the Timer Duration Abs parameter will indicate the current duration time setting You should also be aware that if you change the duration time using the raw settings the Timer Duration Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new duration time 96 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 I O Control 8 3 Checking the State of the I O Lines 8 3 4 Checking the State of a Single Output Line You can determine the current st
175. cute disable reset Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Off For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler scout GigE 333 Chunk Features AWO001 1918000 13 6 Line Status All TheLine Status All feature samples the status of all of the camera s input lines and output lines each time an image acquisition is triggered It then adds a chunk to each acquired image containing the line status information The line status all information is a 32 bit value As shown in Figure 95 certain bits in the value are associated with each line and the bits will indicate the state of the lines If a bit is 0 it indicates that the state of the associated line was low at the time of triggering If a bit is 1 it indicates that the state of the associated line is was high at the time of triggering Indicates output line 4 state Indicates output line 3 state Indicates output line 2 state Indicates input line 2 state Indicates output line 1 state Indicates input line 1 state 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 o 8 7 6 5 43 2 o Fig 95 Line Status All Parameter Bits or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive disables all The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the line status al
176. d Features AWO001 1918000 12 13 Trigger Delay The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of a hardware trigger and it becoming effective The trigger delay can be specified in the range from 0 to 10000000 ys equivalent to 10 s When the delay is set to 0 us no delay will be applied Note the different applicability of the trigger delay depending on the image acquisition control mode Standard mode The trigger delay can be applied to the acquisition start trigger parameter is set to off the camera will generate all acquisition start trigger The trigger delay will not operate if the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode signals internally or if you are using a software acquisition start trigger The trigger delay can be applied to the frame start trigger set to off the camera will generate all frame start trigger signals internally or The trigger delay will not operate if the Frame Start Trigger Mode parameter is if you are using a software frame start trigger Legacy mode The trigger delay can be applied to the acquisition start trigger parameter is set to off the camera will generate all acquisitiion start trigger The trigger delay will not operate if the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode signals internally or if you are using a software acquisition start trigger Setting the Trigger Delay You can set
177. d how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 99 The frame start trigger is used to begin frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status it will begin a frame acquisition each time it receives a frame start trigger signal Note that in order for the camera to be in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The Acquisition Mode parameter must be set correctly A proper Acquisition Start command must be applied to the camera A proper acquisition start trigger signal must be applied to the camera if the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on For more information about the Acquisition Mode parameter and about Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands see Section 9 2 on page 101 and Section 9 3 on page 105 For more information about the acquisition start trigger and about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 101 and Section 9 4 on page 107 Referring to the use case diagrams that appear in Section 9 8 on page 140 can help you understand the explanations of the frame start trigger 114 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 5 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Standard Mode The main parameter associated with the frame start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger has two available settings off and on 9 5 1 1 Frame Start Trigger Mode Off
178. d uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used 258 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features The AsyncAdvance command has not yet become effective because of the assumed associ ated delay When the AsyncAdvance command becomes effective the camera happens to be in waiting for frame start trigger status The parameter values of the next sequence set i e of sequence set 1 are loaded into the active set Note that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while the parameter values of sequence set 1 are loaded into the active set see also Figure 78 sequence set are loaded into the active set During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status D Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while the parameter values of a For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame start trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter va
179. d with a resend 6 Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 7 The Resend Timeout interval expires and the third resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera does not respond with a resend 8 Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 52 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 9 Because the maximum number of resend requests has been sent and the last Resend Response Timeout interval has expired packet 1002 is now considered as lost 10 End of the frame 11 Missing packets at the end of the frame 2999 and 3000 12 Interval defined by the Packet Timeout parameter You can set the performance driver parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read and write the parameter values Get the Stream Parameters object Camera t StreamGrabber t StreamGrabber Camera GetStreamGrabber 0 Write the ReceiveWindowSize parameter StreamGrabber ReceiveWindowSize SetValue 16 Disable packet resends StreamGrabber EnableResend SetValue false Write the PacketTimeout parameter StreamGrabber PacketTimeout SetValue 40 Write the ResendRequestThreshold parameter StreamGrabber ResendRequestThreshold SetValue 5 Write the ResendRequestBatching parameter StreamGrabber ResendRequestBatching SetValue 10 W
180. de Basler scout GigE 125 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 6 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Legacy Mode The main parameter associated with the acquisition start trigger is the Trigger Mode parameter The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger has two available settings off and on 9 6 1 1 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off When the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to off the camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera With the trigger mode set to off the way that the camera will operate the acquisition start trigger depends on the setting of the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame the camera will automatically generate a single acquisition start trigger signal whenever it receives an Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame the camera will automatically begin generating acquisition start trigger signals when it receives an Acquisition Start command The camera will continue to generate acquisition start trigger signals until it receives an Acquisition Stop command The rate at which the acquisition start trigger signals are generated will be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter If the parameter is not enabled the camera will generate acqu
181. dex numbers A maximum of four sequence sets can be used Sequence Set Address Related Sequence Set Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 Sequence Set 0 0 1 Sequence Set 1 1 0 Sequence Set 2 1 1 Sequence Set 3 Table 19 Sequence Set Addresses and Related Sequence Sets The Sequence Set Total Number parameter specifies the total number of sequence sets that will be available The parameter also specifies the length of the settable sequence set address If the Sequence Set Total Number parameter is set to two Bit 0 of the binary sequence set index number see Table 19 can be set When the bit is set to 0 sequence set 0 will be selected and when the bit is set to 1 sequence set 1 will be selected see Table 19 You can use the states of either input line 1 or input line 2 to set bit 0 If the input line is not set for invert the high state of the input line will set bit O to 1 and the low state will set bit O to O If the input line is set for invert the low state of the input line will set bit O to 1 and the high state will set bit O to 0 If the Sequence Set Total Number parameter is set to higher than two Bits 1 and 0 of the binary sequence set index number see Table 19 can be set When e g bit 0 is set to 0 and bit 1 is set to 1 sequence set 2 will be selected see Table 19 You can use the states of input line 1 to set bit 0 and the states of input line 2 to set bit 1 or vice versa If the input lines are
182. dware To apply trigger signals via software you must first select the acquisition start or the frame start trigger and then indicate that software will be used as the source for the selected trigger signal At that point each time a Trigger Software command is executed the selected trigger signal will be applied to the camera To apply trigger signals via hardware you must first select the acquisition start or the frame start trigger and indicate that input line 1 will be used as the source for the selected trigger signal At that point each time a proper electrical signal is applied to input line 1 an occurrence of the selected trigger signal will be recognized by the camera The Trigger Selector The concept of the trigger selector is very important to understand when working with the acquisition start and frame start triggers Many of the parameter settings and the commands that apply to the triggers have names that are not specific to a particular type of trigger for example the acquisition start trigger has a mode setting and the frame start trigger has a mode setting But in Basler pylon there is a single parameter the Trigger Mode parameter that is used to set the mode for both of these triggers Also the Trigger Software command mentioned earlier can be executed for either the acquisition start trigger or the frame start trigger So if you want to set the Trigger Mode or execute a Trigger Software command for the acquisition start
183. e You can carry out steps 1 to 7 from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI1 See the Auto Function AOI section above Setting the limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value the set parameter values serve as examples Setting the target average gray value A medium gray value is selected as an example Enabling the exposure auto function and selecting for example the continuous mode of operation Select the appropriate auto function AOI for luminance statistics Currently AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 is predefined to gather luminance statistics Set position and size of the auto function AOI Camera AutoFunctionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetX SetValue O Camera AutoFunctionAOIOffsetY SetValue O Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax Set exposure time limits for luminance control Camera AutoExposureTimeAbsLowerLimit SetValue 1000 Camera AutoExposureTimeAbsUpperLimit SetValue 1 0E6 Set target value for luminance control This is always expressed by an 8 bit value regardless of the current pixel format Settable range 50 to 205 Camera AutoTargetValue SetValue 128 Se
184. e the camera is ready to receive a frame start trigger Legacy mode If the value is set to false the camera is not ready to receive an acquisition start trigger if the value is set to true the camera is ready to receive an acquisition start trigger You can set the Acquisition Status Selector and read the AcquisitionStatus parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set and read the parameter values Set the Acquisition Status Selector Camera AcquisitionStatusSelector SetValue AcquisitionStatusSelector FrameTrig gerWait Read the acquisition status bool IsWaitingForFrameTrigger Camera AcquisitionStatus GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the Acquisition Status Selector 304 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 9 1 on page 99 Basler scout GigE 305 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 15 Event Reporting Event reporting is available on the camera With event reporting the camera can generate an event and after some intermediate steps transmit a related event message to the PC whenever
185. e This burst of resends will delay the start of transmission of the next acquired frame The Frame Max Jitter parameter indicates the maximum time in ticks one tick 8 ns that the next frame transmission could be delayed due to a burst of resends Device Max Throughput read only Indicates the maximum amount of data in bytes per second that the camera could generate given its current settings and an ideal world This parameter gives no regard to whether the GigE network has the capacity to carry all of the data and does not consider any bandwidth required for resends In essence this parameter indicates the maximum amount of data the camera could generate with no network restrictions If the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter has been used to set the camera s frame rate the camera will use this frame rate setting to calculate the device max throughput If software or hardware triggering is being used to control the camera s frame rate the maximum frame rate allowed with the current camera settings will be used to calculate the device max throughput Basler scout GigE 61 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW 0001 1918000 Device Current Throughput read only Indicates the actual bandwidth in bytes per second that the camera will use to transmit image data and chunk data given the current area of interest settings chunk feature settings and the pixel format setting If the Acquisition Frame Rate abs param
186. e available numbers range from 0 to 63 When selecting index numbers for configuring make sure to always start a sequence with 0 and to only set a continuous series of index numbers For example specifying a sequence of sets only with index numbers 5 6 and 8 is therefore not allowed If you did nonetheless the not ex plicitly configured sequence sets would within the scope of the sequence set total number be populated by default parameter values Set up your first acquisition scenario i e lighting object positioning etc Adjust the camera parameters to get the best image quality with this scenario you are adjusting the parameters in the active set Execute the Sequence Set Store command to copy the sequence parameter values currently in the active set into the selected sequence set Any existing parameter values in the sequence set will be overwritten Repeat the above steps for the other sequence sets For information about setting the input line for invert see Section 8 1 3 on page 88 Configuring Sequence Sets and Advance Control Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for configuring sequence sets from within your application software The following code snippet gives example settings It illustrates using the API to set the controlled sequence advance mode In the example Line 1 is set as the sequence control source for synchronous sequence set advance Disabled is set as the sequence c
187. e the bandwidth assigned is calculated this way X Packets _ Y Bytes Frame Packet X Packets Y Bytes 8 ns X Packets _ Frame Packet Byte Frame Bandwidth Assigned 1 x IPD x8 ns Where X number of packets needed to transmit the frame Y number of bytes in each packet IPD Inter packet Delay setting in ticks with a tick set to the 8 ns standard When considering this formula you should know that on a Gigabit network it takes one tick to transmit one byte Also be aware that the formula has been simplified for easier understanding Bandwidth Reserve read write Used to reserve a portion of the assigned bandwidth for packet resends and for the transmission of control data between the camera and the host PC The setting is expressed as a percentage of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter For example if the Bandwidth Assigned parameter indicates that 58 Basler scout GigE AW0001 1918000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth 30 MByte s have been assigned to the camera and the Bandwidth Reserve parameter is set to 5 then the bandwidth reserve will be 1 5 MByte s Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation read write A software device called the bandwidth reserve accumulator is designed to handle unusual situations such as a sudden EMI burst that interrupts an image transmission If this happens a larger than normal number of packet resends may be needed to properly transmit a complete image The accumulato
188. e Auto Function AOI is completely included in the Image AOI see a in Figure 89 the pixel data from the Auto Function AOI will be used to control the image property If the Image AOI is completely included in the Auto Function AOI see b in Figure 89 only the pixel data from the Image AOI will be used to control the image property If the Image AOI only partially overlaps the Auto Function AOI see c in Figure 89 only the pixel data from the area of partial overlap will be used to control the image property If the Auto Function AOI does not overlap the Image AOI see d in Figure 89 the Auto Function will not or only to a limited degree control the image property For details see the sections below describing the individual auto functions D We strongly recommend completely including the Auto Function AOI within the Image AOI or depending on your needs choosing identical positions and sizes for Auto Function AOI and Image AOI D You can use auto functions when also using the reverse X feature For information about the behavior and roles of Auto Function AOI and Image AOI when also using the reverse X feature see the Reverse X section 286 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Auto Function AOI a EEHE
189. e III 44 3 1 3 pylon SDKS ene oriente ERR ERSRES HR n eh da ACA Rohde 44 4 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters se 45 4 31 The Basler Filter Driver llle ire 46 4 2 The Basler Performance Driver 0 0 c eect eee 47 4 3 Transport Layer Parameters 0 cece es 55 5 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth 57 5 1 Network Related Parameters in the Camera 0 00 cece eee eee 57 5 2 Managing Bandwidth When Multiple Cameras Share a Single Network Path 64 5 2 1 A Procedure for Managing Bandwidth 0 cee eee 65 Basler scout GigE i Table of Contents AWO0001 1918000 6 Camera Functional Description 00 0c eee eee 71 6 1 Overview All Models Except SCA750 60 1 0 0 0 ee ee 71 6 2 Overview SCA750 60 Only 0 0 ee n 73 7 Physical interface iseic 40v nee nner neal Ex RR Pus 75 7 1 General Description of the Connectors 0 0 cee eee 75 7 2 Camera Connector Types Connection Numbering and Assignments 76 7 2 4 Pin Numbering llle 76 7 2 2 8 pin RJ 45 Jacki crne da na iaa ehh 76 1 2 3 42 pin Connector eese aa eaa Se DA E De Ea ee ea e E 77 7 3 Cabling Requirements saasaa nananana nananana teenies 78 7 344 Ethernet Gables erre reaa ead ber NR ea KEE ERR a 78 7 3 2 Power and I O Cable 0 000 eee 78 7 4 Camera Power 2 00 0 hs 80 7 5 Ethernet GigE
190. e SetValue false Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Basler scout GigE 135 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set for the trigger width exposure mode Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode TriggerWidth Prepare for frame acquisition here Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Frame acquisition will start each time the externally generated acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig signal goes high Retrieve the captured frames Camera AcquisitionStop Execute For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 136 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 7 Exposure Time Parameters Many of the camera s image acquisition modes require you to specify an exposure time There are two ways to set exposure time by setting raw values or by setting an a
191. e auto function is set to off in which case the parameter value resulting from the latest automatic adjustment will operate unless the parameter is manually adjusted When an auto function is set to off the parameter value resulting from the latest automatic adjustment will operate unless the parameter is manually adjusted You can enable auto functions and change their settings while the camera is capturing images on the fly 284 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features the camera was continuously capturing images the auto function will become effective with a short delay and the first few images may not be affected by the auto function D If you have set an auto function to once or continuous operation mode while 12 9 1 2 Auto Function AOI An Auto Function AOI must be set separately from the AOI used to define the size of captured images the image AOI You can specify a portion of the sensor array and only the pixel data from the specified portion will be used for auto function control An Auto Function AOI is referenced to the top left corner of the sensor array The top left corner is designated as column 0 and row 0 as shown in Figure 88 The location and size of an Auto Function AOI is defined by declaring an X offset coordinate a width a Y offset coordinate and a height For example suppose that you specify the X offset as 14 the width as 5 the Y offset as 7 and the
192. e before the next event is placed in the queue If there is an occasional short term delay in event message transmission the queue can buffer several events and can send them within a single event message as soon as transmission time is available However if you are operating the camera at high frame rates with a small AOI the camera may be able to generate and queue events faster than they can be transmitted and acknowledged In this case The queue will fill and events will be dropped 2 An event overrun will occur 3 Assuming that you have event overrun reporting enabled the camera will generate an event overrun event and place it in the queue 4 As soon as transmission time is available an event message containing the event overrun event will be transmitted to the PC The event overrun event is simply a warning that events are being dropped The notification contains no specific information about how many or which events have been dropped Basler scout GigE 307 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Setting Your System for Event Reporting Event reporting must be enabled in the camera and some additional software related settings must be made This is described in the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit Event reporting must be specifically set up for each type of event using the parameter name of the event and of the supplementary information The following table lists the relevant param
193. e binning keep in mind that the settings for your area of interest AOI will refer to the binned lines and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the sensor as they normally would Another way to think of this is by using the concept of a virtual sen sor For example assume that you are using a scA780 54 gm camera set for 3 by 3 binning as de scribed above In this case you would act as if you were actually working with a 260 column by 194 line sensor when setting your AOI parameters The maximum AOI width would be 260 and the max imum AOI height would be 194 When you set the X Offset and the Width for the AOI you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor columns And when you set the Y Offset and the Height for the AOI you will be setting these values in terms of virtual sensor lines For more information about the area of interest AOI feature see Section 12 4 on page 234 Binning s Effect on the Sensor Readout and Frame Rate Formulas In several areas of the manual formulas appear for sensor readout time and for calculating the maximum frame rate In several of these formulas you must enter the current height of the area of interest AOI If you are not using binning you would enter the height of the AOI in physical sensor lines If binning is enabled however you must use the concept of a virtual sensor as described above and the height of the AOI that you use in the formulas would be in terms of virtu
194. e camera When the camera has determined that a sufficient amount of image data has accumulated in the buffer it will begin transmitting the data from the camera to the host PC This buffering technique avoids the need to exactly synchronize the clock used for sensor readout with the data transmission over your Ethernet network The camera will begin transmitting data when it has determined that it can safely do so without over running or under running the buffer This buffering technique is also an important element in achieving the highest possible frame rate with the best image quality The exposure start delay is the amount of time between the point where the trigger signal transitions and the point where exposure actually begins The frame readout time is the amount of time it takes to read out the data for an acquired image from the CCD sensor into the image buffer The frame transmission time is the amount of time it takes to transmit the acquired image from the buffer in the camera to the host PC via the network The transmission start delay is the amount of time between the point where the camera begins reading out the acquired image data from the sensor to the point where it begins transmitting the data for the acquired image from the buffer to the host PC The exposure start delay varies from camera model to camera model The table below shows the exposure start delay for each camera model Ca
195. e colors in the image with a predominant red component See Section 10 3 1 on page 177 for more information about the white balance and see Section 10 3 5 on page 190 for a overall procedure for setting the color enhancement features D For the color adjustments to work properly the white balance must be correct transformation we nonetheless strongly recommend to also use color matrix transformation to make full use of the camera s color enhancement capabilities See Section 10 3 3 on page 181 for more information about color matrix transformation D Although color adjustment can be used without also using color matrix The RGB Color Space The RGB color space includes light with the primary colors red green and blue and all of their combinations When red green and blue light are combined and when the intensities of R G and B are allowed to vary independently between 0 and 100 all colors within the RGB color space can be formed Combining colored light is referred to as additive mixing When two primary colors are mixed at equal intensities the secondary colors will result The mixing of red and green light produces yellow light Y the mixing of green and blue light produces cyan light C and the mixing of blue and red light produces magenta light M When the three primary colors are mixed at maximum intensities white will result In the absence of light black will result The color space can b
196. e ee ne baw wed bee eee e 274 12 8 Luminance Lookup Table 0 eens 277 12 8 1 Lookup Table All Models Except scA750 60 00008 277 12 8 2 Lookup Table scA750 60 Only 0 ee eee 280 12 9 Ato FUNCOMS ue e 5 is coeno pesce Vc Libere P e HCM 283 12 9 4 Common Characteristics 0 2 0 0 cee ee 283 Basler scout GigE v Table of Contents AWO0001 1918000 12 9 1 1 Modes of Operation 0 eee ee 284 12 9 1 2 Auto Function AOI 0 ec ee 285 12 9 1 8 Using an Auto Function 0 0 0 0 ee ee 289 12 9 2 GalInAULO utes hi Coe ae ug vated etiain e YE YEN 290 129 3 ExpOoSure AUtO e de e erm en WA aie ees ote ve Bente yO 292 12 9 4 Auto Function Profile 0 cece mh 294 12 9 5 Balance White Auto 295 12 10 Disable Parameter Limits llle 297 12 11 Debourncer 21 extr RE xh UE E deed ERE c pO RR utes 298 12 12 Minimum Output Pulse Width illie 300 1213 Trigger Delay ii crise ete shee oe ERR ERE g Mp tte nane Bee Reet hee T 302 1214 Acquisition Status xri eee Riad eee DOE Free RIPE NN EE YS 304 12 15 Event Reporting llllillleeleeeseeeeele en 306 12 16 Test Imaje S i etx rH Rex te Wie rt EE Re n e d 309 12 17 Device Information Parameters 0 0 00 cece eee 313 12 18 Configuration Sets csse DeL rd RR RR Re Ere 315 12 18 1 Saving User Sets ssec ge db gr eee epee nee oboe yee MAU 316 12 18 2 Selecting a Fac
197. e for P bits 11 4 Basler scout GigE 207 Pixel Data Formats Odd Rows Byte Data Bo Green value for Pg bits 11 4 B Red value for P bits 3 0 Green value for Py bits 3 0 Bo Red value for P bits 11 4 B3 Green value for Po bits 11 4 By Red value for P3 bits 3 0 Green value for P3 bits 3 0 Bs Red value for P5 bits 11 4 Bg Green value for P4 bits 11 4 B7 Red value for P5 bits 3 0 Green value for P4 bits 3 0 Bg Red value for Ps bits 11 4 e e e e e e e e e e e e Bm 5 Green value for P 3 bits 11 4 Bm 4 Red value for P bits 3 O Green value for P 3 bits 3 Bm 3 Red value for Py bits 11 4 Bm 2 Green value for P bits 11 4 Bm 1 Red value for P bits 3 0 Green value for P bits 3 Bm Red value for P bits 11 4 AW00011918000 When a color camera is set for Bayer BG 12 Packed the pixel data output is 12 bit data of the unsigned type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 e e e e e e 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 208 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 5 RGB 8 Packed Format When a color camera is
198. e frame start trigger Acquisition start trigger signals can be generated within the camera or may be applied externally as software or hardware acquisition start trigger signals When the acquisition start trigger is enabled the camera s initial acquisition status is waiting for acquisition start trigger When the camera is in this acquisition status it will ignore any frame start trigger signals it receives If an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status In this acquisition status the camera can react to frame start trigger signals and will begin to expose a frame each time a proper frame start trigger signal is applied A primary feature of the acquisition start trigger is that after an acquisition start trigger signal has been applied to the camera and the camera has entered the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status once a specified number of frame start triggers has been received Before more frames can be acquired a new acquisition start trigger signal must be applied to the camera to exit it from waiting for acquisition start trigger status Note that this feature only applies when the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on This feature is explained
199. e image acquisition As you are acquiring frames the camera automatically monitors the acquisition start trigger status and supplies a signal that indicates the current status The Acquisition Trigger Wait signal will go high whenever the camera enters a waiting for acquisition start trigger status The signal will go low when an external acquisition start trigger ExASTrig signal is applied to the camera and the camera exits the waiting for acquisition start trigger status The signal will go high again when the camera again enters a waiting for acquisition trigger status and it is safe to apply the next acquisition start trigger signal If you base your use of the ExASTrig signal on the state of the acquisition trigger wait signal you can avoid acquisition start overtriggering i e applying an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera when it is not in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status If you do apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera when it is not ready to receive the signal it will be ignored and an acquisition start overtrigger event will be reported Figure 65 illustrates the Acquisition Trigger Wait signal with the Acquisition Frame Count parameter set to 3 and with exposure and readout overlapped The figure assumes that the trigger mode for the frame start trigger is set to off so the camera is internally generating frame start trigger signals 158 Basler scout GigE
200. e other camera description file is selected D The CameraFeatureSet parameter setting persists when the camera is switched You can use either one of the following camera description files The Full camera description file provides the complete feature set All features will be available The Basic camera description file provides all features except the following ones Matrix color correction see Section 10 3 3 on page 181 Color adjustment see Section 10 3 4 on page 185 Sequencer see Section 12 5 on page 237 Accordingly the features listed above will not be available Processing the selected camera description file takes some time The time depends on the number and nature of the included features Accordingly the different camera description files require different periods to elapse until the camera features are available for use The camera features are sooner available when you use the Basic camera description file CameraFeatureSet parameter value at the Basic factory setting This will make If you will only use the smaller feature set we recommend to leave the the camera features sooner available Basler scout GigE 321 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 To Activate a Camera Description File 1 Select the camera description file by setting the CameraFeatureSet parameter value to either Full or Basic as desired 2 Restart the camera by switching camera power off and on
201. e parameter to true or false You can use the Color Adjustment Selector parameter to select a color to adjust The colors you can select are red yellow green cyan blue and magenta You can use the Color Adjustment Hue parameter to set the hue for the selected color as a floating point value in a range from 4 0 to 3 96875 As an alternative you can use the Color Adjustment Hue Raw parameter to set the hue as an integer value on a scale ranging from 128 to 127 This integer range maps linearly to the floating point range with 256 being equivalent to 4 0 32 being equivalent to 1 0 and 255 being equivalent to 3 96875 You can use the Color Adjustment Saturation parameter to set the saturation for the selected color as a floating point value in a range from 0 0 to 1 99219 As an alternative you can use the Color Adjustment Saturation Raw parameter to set the saturation as an integer value on a scale ranging from 0 to 255 This integer range maps linearly to the floating point range with 0 being equivalent to 0 0 128 being equivalent to 1 0 and 255 being equivalent to 1 99219 Enabling and Setting Color Adjustment You can set the Processed Raw Enable Color Adjustment Enable Color Adjustment Selector Color Adjustment Hue Color Adjustment Hue Raw Color Adjustment Saturation and Color Adjustment Saturation Raw parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API In this example we
202. e parameters see Section 9 7 on page 137 Basler scout GigE 129 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 6 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software acquisition start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execute the commands related to software acquisition start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with software frame start trigger signals Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set for the timed exposure mode Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Set the exposure time Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute a
203. e pylon API Currently the parameter limits can only be disabled on the Gain feature Disabling Parameter Limits To disable the limits for a parameter Use the Parameter Selector to select the parameter whose limits you wish to disable Set the value of the Remove Limits parameter You can set the Parameter Selector and the value of the Remove Limits parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the feature whose factory limits will be disabled Camera ParameterSelector SetValue ParameterSelector Gain Disable the limits for the selected feature Camera RemoveLimits SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Note that the disable parameter limits feature will only be available at the guru viewing level For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 297 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 11 Debouncer The debouncer feature aids in discriminating between valid and invalid input signals and only lets valid signals pass to the camera The debouncer value specifies the minimum time that an input signal must remain high or remain low in order to be consid
204. e represented as a color cube see Figure 68 on page 186 where the primary colors R G B the secondary colors C M Y and black and white define the corners All shades of gray are represented by the line connecting the black and the white corner For ease of imagination the color cube can be projected onto a plane as shown in Figure 68 such that a color hexagon is formed The primary and secondary colors define the corners of the color Basler scout GigE 185 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 1918000 hexagon in an alternating fashion The edges of the color hexagon represent the colors resulting from mixing the primary and secondary colors The center of the color hexagon represents all shades of gray including black and white The representation of any arbitrary color of the RGB color space will lie within the color hexagon The color will be characterized by its hue and saturation Hue specifies the kind of coloration for example whether the color is red yellow orange etc Saturation expresses the colorfulness of a color At maximum saturation no shade of gray is present At minimum saturation no color but only some shade of gray including black and white is present Fig 68 RGB Color Cube With YCM Secondary Colors Black and White Projected On a Plane 186 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement Gray Decrease Saturation Adjustment Increase Hue Adjustment F
205. e request is sent to the camera via the transport layer this parameter designates the time out in milliseconds within which an acknowledge must be received Heartbeat Timeout The GigE Vision standard requires implementation of a heartbeat routine to monitor the connection between the camera and the host PC This parameter sets the heartbeat timeout in milliseconds If a timeout occurs the camera releases the network connection and enters a state that allows reconnection GigE implementation and changing this parameter is not required for normal camera operation However if you are debugging an application and you stop at a break point you will have a problem with the heartbeat timer The timer will time out when you stop at a break point and the connection to the camera will be lost When debugging you should increase the heartbeat timeout to a high value to avoid heartbeat timeouts at break points When debugging is complete you should return the timeout to its normal setting D Management of the heartbeat time is normally handled by the Basler s basic You can set the driver related transport layer parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to read and write the parameter values Read Write Timeout Camera t TlParams t TlParams Camera GetTLNodeMap TlParams ReadTimeout SetValue 500 500 milliseconds TlParams WriteTimeout SetVa
206. e states of both input lines are found to be low This corresponds to the address of sequence set 0 Accordingly sequence set 0 is selected The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 1 and 2 Input line 1 is found to be low and input line 2 is found to be high This corresponds to the address of sequence set 2 Accordingly sequence set 2 is selected The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition The sequence sets for the next five frame start triggers are selected and used according to the scheme that applied to the preceding frame start triggers While frame exposure and readout for the fifth frame start trigger are in progress the sequencer feature is disabled The complete frame is transmitted The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Use Case Operation in free selection sequence advance mode Sequence sets are selected at will The selection is controlled by the states of the input lines Settings Sequence Set Total Number 4 Input line 1 not set for invert sets bit 0 of the sequence set address Input line 2 not set for invert sets bit 1of the sequence set address camera is waiting for a frame start trigger v camera sel
207. e that the camera needs to transmit an acquired frame image Increasing the frame transmission time can restrict the camera s maximum allowed frame rate D If you increase the inter packet delay to lower a camera s data output rate there is Step 7 Check that the total bandwidth assigned is less than the network capacity 1 For each camera determine the current value of the Bandwidth Assigned parameter The value is in Byte s Make sure that you determine the value of the Bandwidth Assigned param eter after you have made any adjustments described in the earlier steps 2 Find the sum of the current Bandwidth Assigned parameter values for all of the cameras If the sum of the Bandwidth Assigned values is less than 125 MByte s for a GigE network or 12 5 M Byte s for a 100 Bit s network the bandwidth management is OK If the sum of the Bandwidth Assigned values is greater than 125 MByte s for a GigE network or 12 5 M Byte s for a 100 Bit s network the cameras need more bandwidth than is available and you must make adjustments In essence you must lower the data bandwidth needed by one or more of the 68 Basler scout GigE AW0001 1918000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth cameras and then adjust the data bandwidths assigned so that they reflect the lower bandwidth needs You can lower the data bandwidth needed by a camera either by lowering its frame rate or by decreasing the size of the area of
208. e used to reset the white balance adjustments This feature is especially useful if you have badly misadjusted the white balance and you want to quickly return to reasonable settings When the reset command is used it will return the camera to the settings defined by your current Light Source Selector parameter setting You can execute the White Balance Reset command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to execute the command Reset the white balance adjustments Camera BalanceWhiteReset Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily execute the command For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 43 For more information about the Light Source Selector parameter setting see Section 10 3 3 on page 181 178 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 3 2 Gamma Correction The gamma correction feature lets you modify the brightness of the pixel values output by the camera s sensor to account for a non linearity in the human perception of brightness There are two modes of gamma correction available on the camera sRGB and User sRGB Gamma When the camera is set for SRGB gamma correction it automatically sets the gamma correction to adjust the pixel values so that they are suitable for display on an sRGB monitor If you will be displaying the images on an SRGB mo
209. e width increase Output signal jl l l Minimum output pulse width max 100 us TIMING CHARTS ARE NOT DRAWN TO SCALE Fig 91 Increasing the Signal Width of an Output Signal Setting the Minimum Output Pulse Width The minimum output pulse width is determined by the value of the MinOutPulseWidthAbs parame ter The parameter is set in microseconds and can be set in a range from 0 to 100 us To set the minimum output pulse width parameter value Use the Line Selector to select the camera output line for which you want to set the minimum output pulse width parameter value output line 1 2 3 or 4 Set the value of the MinOutPulseWidthAbs parameter You can set the Line Selector and the value of the MinOutPulseWidthAbs parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value 300 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Select the input line Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Outl Set the parameter value to 10 0 microseconds Camera MinOutPulseWidthAbs SetValue 10 0 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 301 Standar
210. ecified period the driver will send a resend request for the missing packet or group of packets The parameters associated with the filter driver are described below Enable Resend Enables or disables the packet resend mechanism If packet resend is disabled and the filter driver detects that a packet has been lost during transmission the grab result for the returned buffer holding the image will indicate that the grab failed and the image will be incomplete If packet resend is enabled and the driver detects that a packet has been lost during transmission the driver will send a resend request to the camera If the camera still has the packet in its buffer it will resend the packet If there are several lost packets in a row the resend requests will be combined Packet Timeout The Packet Timeout parameter defines how long in milliseconds the filter driver will wait for the next expected packet before it initiates a resend request Ensure the Packet Timeout parameter is set to a longer time interval than the time interval set for the inter packet delay Frame Retention The Frame Retention parameter sets the timeout in milliseconds for the frame retention timer Whenever the filter driver detects the leader for a frame the frame retention timer starts The timer resets after each packet in the frame is received and will timeout after the last packet is received If the timer times out at any time before the last packet is received the
211. ect the Color Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector Color You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the selector Basler scout GigE 317 Standard Features AW00011918000 D Selecting which factory setup will serve as the default set is only allowed when the camera is idle i e when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not have a single image acquisition pending Selecting the standard factory setup as the default set and then loading the default set into the active set is a good course of action if you have grossly misadjusted the settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover The standard factory setup is optimized for use in typical situations and will provide good camera performance in most cases 318 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 18 3 Loading a Saved Set or the Default Set into the Active Set If you have saved a configuration set into the camera s non volatile memory you can load the saved set from the camera s non volatile memory into the camera s active set When you do this the loaded set overwrites the parameters in the active set Since the settings in the active set control the current operation of the camera the settings from the loaded set will now be controlling the camera You can also load the default set into the camera s active set To load a saved configuration set or the default set
212. ection 9 9 on page 149 The image acquisition process on the camera includes two distinct parts The first part is the exposure of the pixels in the imaging sensor Once exposure is complete the second part of the process readout of the pixel values from the sensor takes place On these cameras exposure for a new acquisition must not begin until readout of the previously acquired image is complete This situation is illustrated in Figure 59 Image Acquisition N Image Acquisition N 1 Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Time Fig 61 Non overlapped Readout and Exposure A result of this characteristic is that the exposure time setting on the camera will have a direct effect on the camera s maximum allowed frame rate At longer exposure times the maximum allowed frame rate will be lower When you are operating a camera and using a hardware trigger to trigger image acquisition you could use the camera s exposure time parameter settings and the timing formulas to calculate when it is safe to begin each new acquisition However there is a more convenient way to know when it safe to begin each acquisition The camera supplies a trigger ready signal that is specifically designed to let you trigger acquisitions safely and efficiently For more information about using the Trigger Ready signal with scA750 60 gm gc cameras see Section 9 11 4 on page 155 B
213. ects a sequence set as the current sequence set current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated eframe exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequencer Enabled Disabled Signal Applied to Input Line 1 Signal Applied to Input Line 2 Z uuu ua A A o z Frame Start Tri i l rigger Signal Y v v v v v v v v i 1 o B o EH B A Time Fig 79 Sequencer in Free Selection Mode Operating the Sequencer Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for operating the sequencer in Free Selection sequence advance mode from within your application software The following code snippet illustrates enabling and disabling the sequencer The example assumes that sequence sets were previously configured and are currently available in the camera s memory Enable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue true Basler scout GigE 267 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Disable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Selecting Sequence Sets Each sequence set is identified by a sequence set index number starting from zero The states of the input lines select between the sequence sets by setting the big endian sequence set addresses The addresses are simply the binary expressions of the sequence set in
214. ed It automatically enables the Extended Image Data chunk feature To make the chunk mode active Set the Chunk Mode Active parameter to true You can set the Chunk Mode Active parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Note that making the chunk mode inactive switches all chunk features off Also note that when you enable ChunkModeActive the PayloadType for the camera changes from Pylon PayloadType Image to Pylon PayloadType ChunkData For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Once the chunk mode is active and the Extended Image Data feature has been enabled the camera will automatically add an extended image data chunk to each acquired image The extended image data chunk appended to each acquired image contains some basic information about the image The information contained in the chunk includes The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height for the AOI The Pixel Format of the image The Minimum Dynamic Range and the Maximum Dynamic Range To retrieve data from the extended image data chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the
215. ed Three Times d When the camera is set to shift by 3 the 3 least significant bits output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 8th gray value for example 8 16 24 32 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 3 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 3 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 512 Basler scout GigE 229 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Shift By 4 When the camera is set to shift by 4 the output from the camera will include bit 7 ADC through bit 0 from the ADC along with 4 eS Aare Cee UP ie ce een zeros as LSBs bit pit P bit bit pit p bit pit 2 pit ps The result of shifting 4 times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied by 16 Shifted Four Times M E B p When the camera is set to shift by 4 the 4 least significant bits output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 16th gray value for example 16 32 48 64 and so on If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not
216. el Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed Bayer BG 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed Camera Model Min Setting Min Setting Max Setting Max Setting with Vertical 8 bit depth 16 bit depth Binning SCA640 70 320 260 1023 511 SCA640 74 280 200 1023 511 SCA640 120 150 120 800 400 scA780 54 350 240 1023 511 scA1000 30 360 280 1023 511 scA1300 32 300 200 850 400 scA1390 17 360 280 1023 511 scA1400 17 192 110 1023 511 scA1400 30 150 0 850 400 scA1600 14 350 280 1023 511 scA1600 28 285 220 850 400 Table 16 Minimum and Maximum Allowed Gain Raw Settings 220 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features To set the Gain Raw parameter value Set the Gain Selector to Gain All Set the Gain Raw parameter to your desired value You can set the Gain Selector and the Gain Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector All Camera GainRaw SetValue 400 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 If you know the current decimal setting for the gain raw you can use the formulas below to calcu
217. el covered with a blue lens in the filter you get 12 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 11 3 1 on page 201 The tables below describe how the data for the even rows and for the odd rows of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Bayer BG12 Packed output The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a row P the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a row Bg the first byte of data for a row Bm the last byte of data for a row Even Rows Byte Data Bo Blue value for Po bits 11 4 B Green value for P bits 3 0 Blue value for Py bits 3 0 Bo Green value for P4 bits 11 4 B3 Blue value for P bits 11 4 By Green value for Ps bits 3 0 Blue value for P bits 3 0 Bs Green value for Ps bits 11 4 Bg Blue value for P bits 11 4 B7 Green value for Ps bits 3 0 Blue value for P4 bits 3 0 Bg Green value for Ps bits 11 4 e e e e e e e Bm 5 Blue value for Pj bits 11 4 Bm 4 Green value for P bits 3 0 Blue value for P 3 bits 3 0 Bm 3 Green value for Pj bits 11 4 Bm 2 Blue value for P bits 11 4 Bm Green value for P bits 3 0 Blue value for P bits 3 0 Bm Green valu
218. ements and Precautions Specification scA1400 17gm gc scA1400 30gm gc scA1600 14gm gc Size L x W x H standard housing 90 head housing 73 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 91 65 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors and front module Weight standard housing 90 head housing 170 g typical 170 g typical 160 g typical 190 g typical 190 g typical 180 g typical Conformity CE ROHS GenlCam GigE Vision IP30 FCC The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 4 General Specifications Basler scout GigE Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000 Specification SCA1600 28 gm gc Sensor Size gm 1626 x 1236 H x V pixels gc 1624 x 1234 Sensor Type Sony ICX274 AL AQ Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 14 8 Pixel Size 4 4 um x 4 4 um Max Frame Rate 28 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s or Gigabit Ethernet 1000 M
219. encer feature Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 asynchronous advance AsyncAdvance command delay between sending the advance command and it becoming effective V asynchronous restart AsyncRestart command delay between sending the restart command and it becoming effective camera is waiting for a frame start trigger v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Enabled are Za Sequencer Disabled Sequence Set Cycle Starts Again E zl ZZ Time Fig 78 Sequencer in Controlled Sequence Advance Mode with Disabled as the Sequence Control Source and Asynchronous Advance and Restart Basler scout GigE 261 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Operating the Sequencer Using Basler pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for operating the sequencer in Controlled sequence advance mode from within your application software The following code snippet illustrates enabling and disabling the sequencer The example assumes that sequence sets were previously configured and are currently available in the camera s memory Enable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue true Disable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false You c
220. eneration process With the matrix color transformation a first matrix transformation step ensures that the pixel values from the sensor are available in RGB color space i e as R G or B component for each pixel A second transformation step takes account of the specific pre selected light source The vector consisting of the R G or B component for each pixel in the image is multiplied by a matrix containing a set of correction values Matrix Color Transformation Parameters The initial parameter that you must consider when working with the matrix color transformation feature is the Processed Raw Enable parameter If the camera is set to output pixel data in one of the Bayer formats then the Processed Raw Enable parameter must be set to enabled to allow color enhancements to be performed Setting this parameter to enabled will allow the camera to perform color enhancements on the raw RGB data from the sensor and still be able to output the pixel data in one of the Bayer formats If the camera is set for one of the Bayer pixel data output formats and the Processed Raw Enable parameter is not set to enabled the matrix color transformation feature and the color adjustment feature will have no effect on camera operation The Processed Raw Enable parameter is not relevant if the camera is set to a color pixel data output format other than a Bayer format e g to a YUV output format The first parameter associated with the matrix color transforma
221. entation included with the pylon Camera Software Suite 39 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000 Warranty Precautions To ensure that your warranty remains in force Do not remove the camera s serial number label If the label is removed and the serial number can t be read from the camera s registers the warranty is void Do not open the camera housing Do not open the housing Touching internal components may damage them Keep foreign matter outside of the camera Be careful not to allow liquid flammable or metallic material inside of the camera housing If operated with any foreign matter inside the camera may fail or cause a fire Avoid Electromagnetic fields Do not operate the camera in the vicinity of strong electromagnetic fields Avoid electrostatic charging Transport properly Transport the camera in its original packaging only Do not discard the packaging Clean properly Avoid cleaning the surface of the camera s sensor if possible If you must clean it use a soft lint free cloth dampened with a small quantity of high quality window cleaner Because electrostatic discharge can damage the sensor you must use a cloth that will not generate static during cleaning cotton is a good choice To clean the surface of the camera housing use a soft dry cloth To remove severe stains use a soft cloth dampened with a small quantity of neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use solvents or
222. epend on the exact values can vary between individual cameras As an example tongo and toff49 were measured for a specific camera for load currents of 5 mA and 50 mA and voltages between 3 3 V and 24 V The results are shown on the figure below Basler scout GigE 85 Physical Interface AWO0001 1918000 50 40 30 20 Fig uw E o E 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 41 Dependence of tongo and toff10 on Voltage for Different Load Currents Measured for an Individual Camera as an Example Some general tendencies can be seen from the figure 86 toro increases as the voltage increases and as the load current decreases tongo increases as the voltage and the load current increase The effects due to different voltages and load currents are more pronounced on toj than on longo Basler scout GigE 8 1O Control This section describes how to configure the camera s two physical input lines and four physical output lines It also provides information about monitoring the state of the input and output lines For more detailed information about the physical and electrical characteristics of the input and output lines see Section 7 6 on page 81 8 1 Configuring Input Lines 8 1 1 Assigning an Input Line to Receive a Hardware Trigger Signal You can assign the camera s input lines to receive external hardware trigger ExTrig signals The incoming ExTrig signals can then be used to control image acquisition
223. equence advance mode Camera SequenceAdvanceMode SetValue SequenceAdvanceMode FreeSelection Set the total number of sequence sets Camera SequenceSetTotalNumber SetValue 3 Set line 1 as the control source for setting sequence set address bit 0 Camera SequenceAddressBitSelector SetValue SequenceAddressBitSelector BitO0 Camera SequenceAddressBitSource SetValue SequenceAddressBitSource Linel Set line 2 as the control source for setting sequence set address bit 1 Camera SequenceAddressBitSelector SetValue SequenceAddressBitSelector Bitl Camera SequenceAddressBitSource SetValue SequenceAddressBitSource Line2 Select sequence set with index number 0 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue O Set up the first acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Select sequence set with index number 1 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 1 Set up the second acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Select sequence set with index number 2 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue
224. equence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received input line 1 is found to be high Accordingly another sequence set cycle is started and the parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition As explained above synchronous restart has priority here over the automatic sequence set advance When the next frame start triggers were received the camera advances to the next sequence sets and uses them for image acquisition in accord with the Always Active sequence control source and as described in the previous use case 250 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Use Case Operation in controlled sequence advance mode with Always Active as the sequence control source Automatic cycling through the sequence set cycles with two synchronous restarts controlled by input line 1 Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 Line 1 not set for invert is selected as the source for controlling restart camera is waiting for a frame start trigger v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set g current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated mS frame exposure and readout y frame transmission Sequencer Enabled Signal Applied to Input Line 1 Restart Sequence Set Cycle Sequence Set Cycle Starts Again Starts Again z uu al a stu Frame Start Trigge
225. er feature you must D Because the sequence sets only reside in volatile memory they are lost if the populate the sequence sets after each camera reset or startup Note also that sequence sets can not be saved in user sets Sequence Advance As explained above a sequence set can only control the operation of the camera after its parameter values were loaded into the active set The loading into the active set and therefore the selection of a sequence set as the current set for a specific image acquisition are performed according to the selected sequence advance mode The selection of a sequence set as the current set is always linked to the frame start trigger signals unless software commands are used see below Accordingly a sequence advance mode provides a scheme for advancing from one sequence set to the next as frames are triggered The following sequence advance modes are available Auto Sequence set advance is automatically controlled by the camera The camera will cycle through the available sequence sets in ascending sequence set index number as frames are triggered Individual sequence sets can be used consecutively After one sequence set cycle is complete another one will start automatically Controlled Sequence set advance is controlled by a source that can be selected The available sources are automatic control by the camera the always active setting an input line or the disabled setting allowing sequence
226. er in this voltage range Table 8 Voltage Requirements for the Camera Power VCC For more information about the 12 pin connector and the power and I O cables see Section 7 2 on page 76 Section 7 3 on page 78 and Section 7 3 on page 78 7 5 Ethernet GigE Device Information The camera uses a standard Ethernet GigE transceiver The transceiver is fully 100 1000 Base T 802 3 compliant 80 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Physical Interface 7 6 Input and Output Lines 7 6 1 Input Lines 7 6 1 1 Voltage Requirements The following voltage requirements apply to the camera s I O input lines pins 3 and 4 of the 12 pin receptacle Voltage Significance 30 0 VDC Absolute maximum The absolute maximum must never be exceeded Otherwise the camera can be damaged and the warranty becomes void 0 to 24 VDC Safe operating I O input voltage range 0 to 1 4 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 0 gt 1 4 to 3 2 VDC Region where the transition threshold occurs the logical state is not defined in this region gt 3 2 VDC The voltage indicates a logical 1 Table 9 Voltage Requirements for the Camera s I O Input Lines up to 24 V to the voltage levels required by the camera For more information If a PLC power and I O cable is used the cable adjusts the input voltage levels see Section 7 3 2 on page 78 Basler scout GigE 81 Physical Interface AWO0001 1
227. er inside of the camera Pins 8 and 9 are tied together inside of the camera To avoid a voltage drop when there are long wires between your power suppy and the camera we recommend that you provide camera power VCC through separate wires between your power supply and pins 8 and 9 on the camera We also recommend that you provide camera power ground through separate wires between your power supply and pins 1 and 2 on the camera Basler scout GigE 77 Physical Interface AWO0001 1918000 7 3 Cabling Requirements 7 3 1 Ethernet Cables Use high quality Ethernet cables To avoid EMI the cables must be shielded Use of category 6 or category 7 cables with S STP shielding is strongly recommended As a general rule applications with longer cables or applications in harsh EMI conditions require higher category cables Either a straight through patch or a cross over Ethernet cable can be used to connect the camera directly to a GigE network adapter in a PC or to a GigE network switch Close proximity to strong magnetic fields should be avoided 7 3 2 Power and I O Cable I O device If the connected I O device can apply signal voltages that meet the input voltage requirements of the camera and if enhanced protection of the signal transmission against EMI or ESD is not required use a standard power and I O cable If the connected I O device cannot apply signal voltages that meet the input voltage requirements of the camer
228. ered a valid input signal We recommend setting the debouncer value so that it is slightly greater than the longest expected duration of an invalid signal Setting the debouncer to a value that is too short will result in accepting invalid signals Setting the debouncer to a value that is too long will result in rejecting valid signals Note that the debouncer delays a valid signal between its arrival at the camera and its transfer The duration of the delay will be determined by the debouncer value Figure 90 illustrates how the debouncer filters out invalid input signals i e signals that are shorter than the debouncer value The diagram also illustrates how the debouncer delays a valid signal Unfiltered arriving signals Debouncer I T T l I l debouncer value l l Transferred valid signal t delay TIMING CHARTS ARE NOT DRAWN TO SCALE Fig 90 Filtering of Input Signals by the Debouncer 298 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Setting the Debouncer The debouncer value is determined by the value of the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter value The parameter is set in microseconds and can be set in a range from 0 to approximately 1 s To set a debouncer Use the Line Selector to select the camera input line for which you want to set the debouncer input line1 or 2 Set the value of the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter You can set the Line Selector and the value of the L
229. es being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 1 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 1 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 128 Shift by 2 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the output from the camera will include bit 9 through bit 2 from the ADC ADC The result of shifting twice is that the output of the f j a bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit camera is effectively multiplied by 4 10 9 8 7 6 5432 1 0 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 2 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 2 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 64 Shifted Twice Shift by 3 When the camera is set to shift by 3 the output from the camera will include bit 8 through bit 1 from the ADC The result of shifting three times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied by 8 ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 11109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O0 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high e
230. es dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique Life support applications These products are not designed for use in life support appliances devices or systems where malfunction of these products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury Basler customers using or selling these products for use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Basler for any damages resulting from such improper use or sale Warranty note Do not open the housing of the camera The warranty becomes void if the housing is opened All material in this publication is subject to change without notice and is copyright Basler AG Contacting Basler Support Worldwide Europe Basler AG An der Strusbek 60 62 22926 Ahrensburg Germany Tel 49 4102 463 515 Fax 49 4102 463 599 support europe baslerweb com The Americas Basler Inc 855 Springdale Drive Suite 203 Exton PA 19341 USA Tel 1 610 280 0171 Fax 1 610 280 7608 support usa baslerweb com Asia Basler Asia Pte Ltd 35 Marsiling Industrial Road 3 05 06 Singapore 739257 Tel 65 6367 1355 Fax 65 6367 1255 support asia baslerweb com www baslerweb com AWO001 1918000 Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 Tel Models cick ieee baa Ae wae hei idd eee bh SO Dowd ae eid baie 1 1 2 General Specifications 0 ee eee 2 1 8 Spectra
231. est 32 Basler scout GigE AW 00011918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 4 Mechanical Stress Test Results Scout cameras were submitted to an independent mechanical testing laboratory and subjected to the stress tests listed below The mechanical stress tests were performed on selected camera models with standard housings After mechanical testing the cameras exhibited no detectable physical damage and produced normal images during standard operational testing Test Standard Conditions Vibration sinusoidal each axis DIN EN 60068 2 6 10 58 Hz 1 5 mm 58 500 Hz 20g 1 Octave Minute 10 repetitions Shock each axis DIN EN 60068 2 27 20 g 11 ms 10 shocks positive 20 g 11 ms 10 shocks negative Bump each axis DIN EN 60068 2 29 20 g 11 ms 100 shocks positive 20 g 11 ms 100 shocks negative Vibration broad band random digital control each axis DIN EN 60068 2 64 15 500 Hz 0 05 PSD ESS standard profile 00 30 h Table 6 Mechanical Stress Tests The mechanical stress tests were performed with a dummy lens connected to a C mount The dummy lens was 35 mm long and had a mass of 66 g Using a heavier or longer lens requires an additional support for the lens Basler scout GigE 33 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000 1 6 Software Licensing Information 1 6 1 LWIP TCP IP Licensing The software in
232. est will be sent In this case the parameter defines the time separation between consecutive resend requests for a missing packet Packet Timeout The Packet Timeout parameter defines how long in milliseconds the performance driver will wait for the next expected packet before it sends a resend request to the camera This parameter ensures that resend requests are sent for missing packets near to the end of a frame In the event of a major interruption in the stream of packets the parameter will also ensure that resend requests are sent for missing packets that were detected to be missing immediately before the interruption Make sure the Packet Timeout parameter is set to a longer time interval than the time interval set for the inter packet delay Basler scout GigE 51 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AWO001 1918000 Threshold and Timeout Resend Mechanisms Combined Figure 30 illustrates the combined action of the threshold and the timeout resend mechanisms where the following assumptions are made All parameters set to default The frame includes 3000 packets Packet 1002 is missing within the stream of packets and has not been recovered Packets 2999 and 3000 are missing at the end of the stream of packets end of the frame The default values for the performance driver parameters will cause the threshold resend mechanism to become operative before the timeout resend mechanism This ensures maximum efficiency and that resend req
233. eter 313 device vendor name parameter 313 device version parameter 313 digital Shift ise 228 dimensions 3 5 7 9 11 24 29 disable parameter limits 354 AWO0001 1918000 explained tthis enginats 297 drivers network eeenene 45 E electromagnetic interference 36 electrostatic discharge 36 zm 36 enable resend parameter 46 48 environmental requirements 37 ESD oie Ados a ane eere rere 36 event Acquisition Start Overtrigger 306 Event Overrun esses 306 Exposure End 306 Frame Start Overtrigger 306 event reporting eec 306 exposure overlapped n e 149 151 exposure active signal 152 exposure aulto nis 292 exposure mode TOC ACRI T POI S 121 132 trigger width 122 133 exposure modes necer 132 exposure start delay 161 exposure time controlling with an external trigger signal T2 E E s exist eee verit 131 maximum possible 137 minimum allowed 137 SOUING wesc iiec ceci 138 exposure time abs parameter 115 117 128 139 exposure time base abs parameter 138 exposure time parameters
234. eter has been used to set the camera s frame rate the camera will use this frame rate setting to calculate the device current throughput If software or hardware triggering is being used to control the camera s frame rate the maximum frame rate allowed with the current camera settings will be used to calculate the device current throughput Note that the Device Current Throughput parameter indicates the bandwidth needed to transmit the actual image data and chunk data The Bandwidth Assigned parameter on the other hand indicates the bandwidth needed to transmit image data and chunk data plus the bandwidth reserved for retries and the bandwidth needed for any overhead such as leaders and trailers Resulting Frame Rate read only Indicates the maximum allowed frame acquisition rate in frames per second given the current camera settings The parameter takes the current area of interest exposure time and bandwidth settings into account If the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter has been used to set the camera s frame rate the Resulting Frame Rate parameter will show the Acquisition Frame Rate abs parameter setting If software or hardware triggering is being used to control the camera s frame rate the Resulting Frame Rate parameter will indicate the maximum frame rate allowed given the current camera settings You can read or set the camera s network related parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon A
235. eter names Event Event Parameter Name Supplementary Information Parameter Name AcquisitionStart AcquisitionStartEventData AcquisitionStartEventStreamChannellndex AcquisitionStartEventTimestamp Acquisition Start AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventData AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventStreamChannellndex Overtrigger AcquisitionStartOvertriggerEventTimestamp FrameStart FrameStartEventData FrameStartEventStreamChannellndex FrameStartEventTimestamp Frame Start FrameStartOvertriggerEventData FrameStartOvertriggerEventStreamChannellndex Overtrigger FrameStartOvertriggerEventTimestamp Exposure End ExposureEndEventData ExposureEndEventFramelD ExposureEndEventStreamChannellndex ExposureEndEventTimestamp Event Overrun EventOverrunEventData EventOverrunEventStreamChannellndex EventOverrunEventTimestamp Table 20 Parameter Names of Events and Supplementary Information You can enable event reporting and make the additional settings from within your application software by using the pylon API For more information see the Camera Events code sample included with the pylon software development kit For more detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference 308 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 16 Test Images All cameras include the ability to generate test images Test images are
236. etrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser that is included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the sequence set index information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Sequence Set Index parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the time stamp chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Sequence Set Index chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector SequenceSetIndex Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser AttachBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t timeStamp Camera ChunkSequenceSetIndex GetValue You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 338 Basler scout GigE 14 Troubleshooting and Support This chapter outlines the resources available to you if you need help working with
237. everal frame rate related parameters If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to on you must trigger frame start by applying frame start trigger signals to the camera Each time a trigger signal is applied the camera will begin a frame exposure When frame start is being triggered in this manner it is important that you do not attempt to trigger frames at a rate that is greater than the maximum allowed There is a detailed explanation about the maximum allowed frame rate at the end of this chapter Frame start trigger signals applied to the camera when it is not in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status will be ignored camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal N frame exposure and readout frame transmission a frame start trigger signal that will be ignored because the camera is not in a waiting for frame start trigger status Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting 3 Acquisition Acquisition S Acquisition Start Trigger Signal ZZ Frame Start Trigger Signal Fig 45 Acquisition Start and Frame Start Triggering Basler scout GigE 103 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Applying Trigger Signals The paragraphs above mention applying a trigger signal There are two ways to apply an acquisition start or a frame start trigger signal to the camera via software or via har
238. ext frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence set 2 this sequence set is only used once and therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence set 3 this sequence set is only used once and therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 4 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence set 4 this sequence set is only used once and therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 5 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 2 for sequence set 5 this sequence set is used a second time The parameter values of sequence set 5 are used for the image acquisition Basler scout GigE 243 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 The
239. f red value for P When the camera is set for Bayer BG 16 the pixel data output is 16 bit data of the unsigned short little endian type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below Note that for 16 bit data you might expect a value range from 0x0000 to OxFFFF However with the camera set for Bayer BG 16 only 12 bits of the 16 bits transmitted are effective Therefore the highest data value you will see is OXOFFF indicating a signal level of 4095 This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxOFFF 4095 OxOFFE 4094 e e e e e e 0x0001 1 0x0000 0 D When a camera that is set for Bayer BG 16 has only 12 bits effective the leader of transmitted frames will indicate Bayer BG 12 as the pixel format 206 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 4 Bayer BG 12 Packed Format When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 12 Packed pixel data format it outputs 12 bits of data per pixel Every three bytes transmitted by the camera contain data for two pixels With the Bayer BG 12 Packed coding the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens in the sensor s Bayer filter you get 12 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens in the filter you get 12 bits of green data And for each pix
240. f the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 4 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 5 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 5 are used for the image acquisition The camera has cycled once through the complete sequence set cycle When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found
241. ficiency 96 Fig 4 scA750 60gm Spectral Response Relative Response 60 50 40 30 20 1 0 0 9 350 450 550 650 Wave Length nm 750 850 950 1050 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 Wave Length nm Fig 5 scA780 54gm Spectral Response 14 700 800 900 1000 AWO0001 1918000 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 1 0 0 9 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Relative Response 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 Wave Length nm Fig 6 scA1000 30gm Spectral Response 1 0 800 900 1000 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Relative Response 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 Wave Length nm Fig 7 scA1300 32 gm Spectral Response Basler scout GigE 800 900 1000 15 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO001 1918000 1 0 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 Relative Response 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wave Length nm Fig 8 scA1390 17gm Spectral Response 1 0 r 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 Relative Response 0 2 0 1
242. formation about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 128 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 6 2 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 9 6 2 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to begin each frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status frame exposure will start when the software acquisition start trigger signal is received by the camera Figure 46 illustrates frame acquisition with a software acquisition start trigger signal When the camera receives a software trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new acquisition start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new acquisition start trigger signal it will auto
243. from the camera s non volatile memory into the active set Set the User Set Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 or Default Execute a User Set Load command to load the selected set into the active set You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Load command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and execute the command Camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector UserSet2 Camera UserSetLoad Execute camera is idle i e when it is not acquiring images continuously or does not have a single image acquisition pending Loading the Default Set with the Standard Factory Setup selected into the active set is a good course of action if you have grossly misadjusted the settings in the camera and you are not sure how to recover The standard factory setup is optimized for use in typical situations and will provide good camera performance in most cases D Loading a user set or the default set into the active set is only allowed when the Basler scout GigE 319 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 18 4 Selecting the Startup Set You can select the default configuration set i e whichever was selected as the default configuration set either the Standard Factory Setup the High Gain Factory Setup or the Auto Functions Factory Setup or one of the user configuration sets stored in the camera s non vo
244. front page Added the LZ4 Licensing Section 1 6 2 on page 35 Added information to the Avoid dust on the Sensor notice in Section 1 9 on page 38 Updated the I O voltage levels for the standard and PLC power and I O cables in Section 7 6 1 1 on page 81 Updated the URL for the color matrix reference article in Section 10 3 3 1 on page 183 Corrected the average gray value range for the Auto Function AOI in Section 12 9 2 on page 290 and Section 12 9 3 on page 292 AW00011918000 23 Jan 2015 Updated the Basler contact details on the back of the front page Minor corrections in the FCC Rules section on the back of the front page Added references to the CE Conformity Declaration in Section 1 2 on page 2 Added information about the available software to the camera specifications in Section 1 2 on page 2 Updated pylon related details and language conventions Renamed pylon driver package to pylon Camera Software Suite Renamed IP Configuration Tool to pylon IP Configurator Updated pylon SDK content information in Section 3 1 3 on page 44 Updated the title of the AW000611 document Merged the Connector Pin Assignments and Numbering and Connector Types sections to form Section 7 2 on page 76 Camera Connector Types Connection Numbering and Assignments Merged the Standard Power and I O Cable and PLC Power and I O Cable sections to form Section 7 3 2 on page 78 Power and I O Cable Added inform
245. function that can automatically adjust the white balance Manual adjustment of the Balance Ratio Abs parameters for red green and blue will only work if the Balance White Auto function is disabled For more information about auto functions in general see Section 12 9 on page 283 For more information about the Balance White Auto function see Section 12 9 5 on page 295 When you are using matrix color transformation and you set the Light Source Selector parameter to match your light source characteristics the camera will automatically make adjustments to the white balance settings so that they are best suited for the light source of the type you selected For more information about matrix color transformation see Section 10 3 3 on page 181 With the white balancing scheme used on these cameras the red intensity green intensity and blue intensity can be individually adjusted For each color a Balance Ratio parameter is used to set the intensity of the color If the Balance Ratio parameter for a color is set to a value of 1 the intensity of the color will be unaffected by the white balance mechanism If the ratio is set to a value lower than 1 the intensity of the color will be reduced If the ratio is set to a value greater than 1 the intensity of the color will be increased The increase or decrease in intensity is proportional For example if the balance ratio for a color is set to 1 2 the intensity of that color will be
246. gE Vision standard specifies a mechanism for establishing several separate stream channels between the camera and the PC This parameter selects the stream channel that will be affected when the other network related parameters are changed Currently the cameras support only one stream channel i e stream channel 0 Packet Size read write As specified in the GigE Vision standard each acquired image will be fit into a data block The block contains three elements a data leader consisting of one packet used to signal the beginning of a data block the data payload consisting of one or more packets containing the actual data for the current block and a data trailer consisting of one packet used to signal the end of the data block The packet size parameter sets the size of the packets that the camera will use when it sends the data payload via the selected stream channel The value is in bytes The value does not affect the leader and trailer size which use a total of 36 bytes and the last data packet may be a smaller size The payload size will be packet size minus 36 bytes Basler scout GigE 57 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00011918000 The packet size parameter should always be set to the maximum size that your network adapter and network switches if used can handle Inter packet Delay read write Sets the delay in ticks between the packets sent by the camera Applies to the selected stream channel
247. ger signal Also maintain the states of the input lines at least for one microsecond after the frame start trigger signal has risen Note also that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while an input line changes its state This happened for example when input line 2 changed its state before the fourth frame start trigger was received see also Figure 77 Basler scout GigE 255 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 state During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section D Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while an input line changes its When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and the
248. ger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be low and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition 256 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Use Case Operation in controlled sequence advance mode with Line 1 asthe sequence control source Cycling through the sequence set cycles according to the states of input jne 1 not set for invert with two synchronous restarts controlled by input ine 2 Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 Line 2 not set for invert is selected as the source for controlling restart camera is waiting for a frame start trigger M camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set O current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated Ea frame exposure and readout v frame transmission Y Sequencer Enabled Signal Applied to Input Line 2 Restart Signal Applied to Input Line 1 Advance Sequence Set Cycle Starts Again ZA Sequence Set Cycle Starts Again z Frame Start Trigger Signal Y 1 B HW B H 10 v H v v v v v v v v LII W y a VT pon j d V b 4 V V vl v wy Y Y Y Time Fig 77 Sequencer in Co
249. h value the camera s frame rate may be decreased For more information about absolute exposure time settings and related limitations see Section 9 7 2 on page 139 For more information about exposure modes and how to select them see Section 9 5 2 on page 118 Section 9 5 3 on page 120 Section 9 6 2 on page 129 and Section 9 6 3 on page 131 For more information about the auto function profile feature see Section 12 9 4 on page 294 To use the exposure auto function carry out the following steps Make sure trigger width exposure mode is not selected Select Auto Function AOI Set the position and size of Auto Function AOI Set the lower and upper limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value Set the target average gray value If necessary set the auto function profile Enable the exposure auto function by setting it to once or continuous You must choose the continuous setting when using the auto function profile NO aR WN gt The settable limits for the Exposure Time Abs parameter value are limited by the minimum allowed and maximum possible exposure time of the camera model 292 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features The target average gray value may range from 50 to 205 Note that this parameter value range applies to 8 bit and to 16 bit 12 bit effective output modes Note also that a given parameter value setting corresponds to an identical gray value regardless of the output mod
250. hBuffer unsigned char Result Buffer Result GetPayloadSize int64 t lineStatusAll Camera ChunkLineStatusAll GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 335 Chunk Features AWO001 1918000 13 7 CRC Checksum The CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check Checksum feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing a CRC checksum calculated using the X modem method As shown in Figure 6 2 the checksum is calculated using all of the image data and all of the appended chunks except for the checksum itself The CRC chunk is always the last chunk appended to the image data CRC checksum is calculated on this data Image Data ChunkX ChunkY Chunk including any required padding Data Data CRC Fig 96 CRC Checksum of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive disables all chunk The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the CRC feature or any features To enable the CRC checksum chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the CRC chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the CRC chunk is enabled the camera will add a CRC chunk to each acquired image To retrieve CRC information from a chunk
251. he area of interest is defined by declaring an X offset coordinate a width a Y offset coordinate and a height For example suppose that you specify the x offset as 10 the width as 16 the y offset as 6 and the height as 10 The area of the array that is bounded by these settings is shown in Figure 71 The camera will only transfer pixel data from within the area defined by your settings Information from the pixels outside of the area of interest is discarded Column 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Row 0 1 L j zi 3 Offset 5 J A 6 7 EEE 8 _ E 9 E H Height 10 in BE in in Tey 1 BH L 12 H E 13 a E The camera will only 15 transmit the 16 pixel data 17 from this 18 1 area 19 In 1r 1r 1I l I Lt LO X Offset lt Width Fig 71 Area of Interest One of the main advantages of the AOI feature is that decreasing the height of the AOI can increase the camera s maximum allowed acquisition frame rate For more information about how changing the AOI height effects the maximum allowed frame rate see Section
252. he lens thread length see Section 1 5 3 on page 32 38 CAUTION CAUTION Voltage Outside of Specified Range Can Cause Damage The recommended operating voltage of the power to the camera is 12 VDC 5 96 to 24 VDC 5 If the voltage is less than 11 3 VDC the camera can operate erratically An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the 12 pin Connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 12 pin connector must have 12 pins Use of a smaller plug such as one with 10 pins or 8 pins can damage the pins in the camera s 12 pin connector Basler scout GigE AW 0001 1918000 CAUTION Basler scout GigE Specifications Requirements and Precautions Inappropriate Code Can Cause Unexpected Camera Behavior The code snippets provided in this manual are included as sample code only Inappropriate code can cause your camera to function differently than expected and can compromise your application To ensure that the snippets will work properly in your application you must adjust them to meet your specific needs and must test them thoroughly prior to use The code snippets in this manual are written in C Other programming languages can also be used to write code for use with Basler pylon When writing code you should use a programming language that is both compatible with pylon and appropriate for your application For more information about the programming languages that can be used with Basler pylon see the docum
253. he limits for the minimum gain settings are automatically lowered This allows you to use lower gain settings than would otherwise be available For the lowered limits for the minimum gain settings see Section 12 1 on page 219 272 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Reduced Resolution Using binning effectively reduces the resolution of the camera s imaging sensor For example the sensor in the scA780 54gm camera normally has a resolution of 782 H x 582 V If you set this camera to use horizontal binning by 3 and vertical binning by 3 the effective resolution of the sensor is reduced to 260 H by 194 V Note that the 782 pixel horizontal dimension of the sensor was not evenly divisible by 3 so we rounded down to the nearest whole number Possible Image Distortion Objects will only appear undistorted in the image if the numers of binned lines and columns are equal With all other combinations the imaged objects will appear distorted If for example vertical binning by 2 is combined with horizontal binning by 4 the widths of the imaged objects will appear shrunk by a factor of 2 compared to the heights If you want to preserve the aspect ratios of imaged objects when using binning you must use vertical and horizontal binning where equal numbers of lines and columns are binned e g vertical binning by 3 combined with horizontal binning by 3 Binning s Effect on AOI Settings When you have the camera set to us
254. he pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera GainSelector SetValue GainSelector All Camera GainRaw SetValue 20 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 224 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features If you know the current decimal setting for the gain raw you can use the following formula to calculate the dB of gain that will result from that setting s Gain Raw Setting Gaingg 20 x log 4g 1 3 l Example Assume that you are working with an scA750 60 camera that has a gain raw setting of 18 The gain is calculated as follows l 18 Table 18 shows the dB of gain that will be achieved at various Gain Raw settings Gain Setting dB Gain 0 0 5 5 3 10 8 5 15 10 9 20 12 7 22 13 4 Table 18 dB of Gain at Various Settings Basler scout GigE 225 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 2 Black Level Adjusting the camera s black level will result in an offset to the pixel values output by the camera Increasing the black level setting will result in a positive offset in the digital values output for the pixels Decreasing the black level setting will result in a negat
255. he sensor in the camera model you are using For example on the monochrome version of the scA640 70 the sum of the current Y Offset setting plus the current Height setting must not exceed 494 On monochrome cameras The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can be set in increments of 1 On color cameras The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can be set in increments of 2 and they must be set to an even number For example the X Offset parameter can be set to 0 2 4 6 8 etc physical columns and rows in the sensor But if binning is enabled these parameters are set in terms of virtual columns and rows For more information see Section 12 6 on page 271 D Normally the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter settings refer to the Basler scout GigE 235 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 You can set the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to get the maximum allowed settings and the increments for the Width and Height parameters They also illustrate setting the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values int64 t widthMax Camera Width GetMax int64 t widhInc Camera Width GetInc Camera Width SetValue 200 Camera OffsetX SetValue 100 int64 t heightMax Camera Height GetMax int64 t heightInc Camera Height GetInc
256. he stream of packets end of the frame The Maximum Number Resend Requests parameter is set to 3 DIAGRAM IS NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 1 2 3 5 7 9 11 12 13 Lo P d 1 4 i i i i E e 3 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 101 996 2997 2998 M Time er A 1 4 6 8 10 14 gt Fig 29 Incomplete Stream of Packets and Part of the Resend Mechanism 1 Stream of packets Gray indicates that the status was checked as the packet entered the receive window White indicates that the status has not yet been checked 2 Receive window of the performance driver 3 As packet 1003 enters the receive window packet 1002 is detected as missing 4 Interval defined by the Resend Timeout parameter 5 The Resend Timeout interval expires and the first resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera does not respond with a resend Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 7 The Resend Response Timeout interval expires and a second resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera does not respond with a resend 8 Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 9 The Resend Response Timeout interval expires and a third resend request for packet
257. he synchronous restart has priority here over the automatic sequence set advance that results from the Always Active sequence control source Without the priority rule sequence set 1 would be used Note that the state of input line 1 went high well ahead of the frame start trigger least one microsecond between setting the state of the input line and the rise D To ensure reliable synchronous sequence set restart allow the elapse of at of the frame start trigger signal Also maintain the state of the input line at least for one microsecond after the frame start trigger signal has risen Note also that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while the input line changes its state This happened when input line 1 changed its state before the fourth frame start trigger was received see also Figure 75 state During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and D Make sure not to send a frame start trigger while the input line changes its any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame start trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of s
258. hem This chapter also includes specific precautions that you should keep in mind when using the cameras We strongly recommend that you read and follow the precautions 1 1 Models The current Basler scout GigE Vision camera models are listed in the top row of the specification tables on the next pages of this manual The camera models are differentiated by their sensor size their maximum frame rate at full resolution and whether the camera s sensor is mono or color The scout GigE Vision camera models are available in the following housing variants standard housing 90 head housing The housing variants other than the standard housing are appended to the camera s name e g SCA640 70gm gc 90 head Unless otherwise noted the material in this manual applies to all of the camera models listed in the tables Material that only applies to a particular camera model or to a subset of models such as to color cameras or a specific housing variant only will be so designated Basler scout GigE 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 2 General Specifications AWO0001 1918000 Specification scA640 70gm gc scA640 74gm gc scA640 120gm gc Sensor Size gm 659 x 494 gm 659 x 494 gm 659 x 494 H x V pixels gc 658 x 492 gc 658 x 492 gc 658 x 492 Sensor Type Sony ICX424 AL AQ Sony ICX414 AL AQ Sony ICX618 ALA AQA Progressive scan CCD Optical Size 1 3 1 2 1 4 Pixel Size 7 4 um x 7 4 um 9 9
259. his situation the camera will first use the values in the table to do a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion It will then drop the 4 least significant bits of the converted value and will transmit the 8 most significant bits Changing the Values in the Luminance Lookup Table and Enabling the Table You can change the values in the luminance lookup table LUT and enable the use of the lookup table by doing the following Use the LUT Selector to select a lookup table Currently there is only one lookup table available i e the Iuminance lookup table described above Use the LUT Index parameter to select a value in the lookup table The LUT Index parameter selects the value in the table to change The index number for the first value in the table is 0 for the second value in the table is 1 for the third value in the table is 2 and so on Use the LUT Value parameter to set the selected value in the lookup table Use the LUT Index parameter and LUT value parameters to set other table values as desired Use the LUT Enable parameter to enable the table You can set the LUT Selector the LUT Index parameter and the LUT Value parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter values Select the lookup table Camera LUTSelector SetValue LUTSelector Luminance Write a lookup table to the device The following lookup table ca
260. ht setting must not exceed the height of the camera s sensor For example on the scA640 70 the sum of the Y Offset setting plus the Height setting must not exceed 494 The X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameters can be set in increments of 1 and Height parameters for an Auto Function AOI in increments of 2 to make the Auto Function AOI match the Bayer filter pattern of the sensor For example you should set the X Offset parameter to 0 2 4 6 8 etc D On color cameras we strongly recommend setting the X Offset Y Offset Width Function AOI refer to the physical columns and lines in the sensor But if binning is enabled monochrome cameras only not available on scA750 60 cameras these parameters are set in terms of virtual columns and lines i e the settings for an Auto Function AOI will refer to the binned lines and columns in the sensor and not to the physical lines in the sensor as they normally would D Normally the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter settings for an Auto For more information about the concept of a virtual sensor see Section 12 6 1 on page 272 You can select an Auto Function AOI and set the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values for the Auto Function AOI from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to select an Auto Function AOI and to get the maximum allowed settings fo
261. icates when exposure is taking place By default the camera s trigger ready TrigRdy is assigned to Output Line 2 The trigger ready signal goes high to indicate the earliest point at which exposure start for the next frame can be triggered The assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines can be changed by the user For more information about output line pin assignments and pin numbering see Section 7 2 on page 76 For more information about the exposure active signal see Section Section 9 11 1 on page 152 For more information about the trigger ready signal see Section Section 9 11 3 on page 153 and Section 9 11 4 on page 155 For more information about assigning camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 8 2 1 on page 89 84 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Physical Interface 7 6 3 Output Line Response Time Response times for the output lines on the camera are as defined below Camera Output Signal Output Line Voltage lt lt gt tongo toff10 Time Fig 40 Output Line Response Times tongo Time us from switching on the signal until the voltage has reached 90 of its final level torio Time us from switching off the signal until the voltage has dropped to 10 of its original level load current and the applied voltage of your specific application In addition the The response time values for the output lines on your camera will d
262. ift feature in Section 12 3 on page 228 Corrected the indications of x offset and y offset in Figure 71 in Section 12 4 on page 234 and in Figure 69 in Section 12 9 1 2 on page 285 Added the reverse X feature in Section 12 7 on page 274 Removed the statement that auto functions have no effect on frame rate in Section 12 9 1 on page 283 and added a note that frame rate may be affected if exposure auto is used in Section 12 9 3 on page 292 Added a reference to the reverse X feature in Section 12 9 1 2 on page 285 Replaced Auto Gain Raw by the correct Gain Raw All parameter name in Section 12 9 2 on page 290 Replaced Auto Exposure Time Abs by the correct Exposure Time Abs parameter name in Section 12 9 3 on page 292 Added the auto function profile feature in Section 12 9 4 on page 294 and adjusted Section 12 9 2 on page 290 and Section 12 9 3 on page 292 accordingly Added the trigger delay feature in Section 12 13 on page 302 Added the acquisition status feature in Section 12 14 on page 304 and added a reference in Section 9 2 3 on page 106 Added the high gain and auto functions factory setups and the standard factory setup formerly the default set in Section 12 18 on page 315 Removed the statement that settings for frame transmission delay and inter packet delay are not saved in the user sets in Section 12 18 on page 315 Added descriptions about resetting the frame counter and about relating frame and trigger input co
263. ig 69 Hue and Saturation Adjustment In the Color Hexagon Adjustments Are Indicated for Red as an Example Hue and Saturation Adjustment The color adjustment feature lets you adjust hue and saturation for the primary and the secondary colors Each adjustment affects those areas in the image where the adjusted color predominates For example the adjustment of red affects the colors in the image with a predominantly red component Keep in mind that when you adjust a color the colors on each side of it in the color hexagon will also be affected to some degree For example when you adjust red yellow and magenta will also be affected In the color hexagon the adjustment of hue can be considered as a rotation between hues Primary colors can be rotated towards and as far as their neighboring secondary colors And secondary colors can be rotated towards and as far as their neighboring primary colors For example when red is rotated in negative direction towards yellow then for example purple in the image can be changed to red and red in the image can be changed to orange Red can be rotated as far as yellow where red will be completely transformed into yellow When red is rotated in a positive direction towards magenta then for example orange in the image can be changed to red and red in the image can be changed to purple Red can be rotated as far as magenta where red will be completely transformed into magenta Adjusting saturatio
264. igh at the rate specified by the parameter value For example if the parameter is set to 10 the trigger ready signal will go high 10 times per second If the value of the parameter is greater than the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with the current camera settings the trigger ready signal will work as described above and will go high at a point that represents the maximum acquisition frame rate allowed the camera will simply ignore the attempt The trigger ready signal will only be available when hardware triggering is enabled D If you attempt to start an image acquisition when the trigger ready signal is low By default the trigger ready signal is assigned to physical output line 2 on the camera However the assignment of the trigger signal to a physical output line can be changed 154 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Selecting the Trigger Ready Signal as the Source Signal for an Output Line The trigger ready signal can be selected to act as the source signal for e g output line 1 Selecting a source signal for the output line is a two step process Use the Line Selector to select output line 1 Set the value of the Line Source Parameter to the trigger ready output signal You can set the Line Selector and the Line Source parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and
265. ime 10000000 us by setting the Exposure Time Raw parameter value to 1 and the Exposure Time Base Abs value to 10000000 us On scA750 60 cameras you can obtain the maximum possible exposure time 126976 ys by e g setting the exposure time raw parameter value to 2048 and the Exposure Time Base Abs value to 62 us Changing the Exposure Time Base Normally the exposure time is adjusted by setting the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter as explained above However if you require an exposure time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Exposure Time Raw parameter alone the Exposure Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the exposure time base The Exposure Time Base Abs parameter value sets the exposure time base in us and this parameter can be used to change the exposure time base On all camera models except the scA750 60 the default exposure time base is 20 us and the time base can be changed in increments of 1 us On scA750 60 cameras the default exposure time base is 31 us and the time base can be changed in increments of 31 us You can set the Exposure Time Raw and Exposure Time Base Abs parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Camera ExposureTimeRaw SetValue 100 Camera ExposureTimeBaseAbs SetValue 186
266. increased by 20 The balance ratio value can range from 0 00 to 3 98 But you should be aware that if you set the balance ratio for a color to a value lower than 1 this will not only decrease the intensity of that color relative to the other two colors but will also decrease the maximum intensity that the color can achieve For this reason we don t normally recommend setting a balance ratio less than 1 unless you want to correct for the strong predominance of one color Basler scout GigE 177 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 1918000 To set the Balance Ratio parameter for a color Set the Balance Ratio Selector to red green or blue Set the Balance Ratio Abs parameter to the desired value for the selected color You can setthe Balance Ratio Selector and the Balance Ratio Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera BalanceRatioSelector SetValue BalanceRatioSelector Green Camera BalanceRatioAbs SetValue 1 20 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 43 White Balance Reset The camera includes a White Balance Reset command that can b
267. ine Bm the last byte of data for a line Even Lines Odd Lines Byte Data Byte Data Bg Red value for Po Bo Green value for Po B4 Green value for P4 B4 Blue value for P Bo Red value for P Bo Green value for Po B3 Green value for P5 B3 Blue value for P3 B4 Red value for P4 B Green value for P4 Bs Green value for Ps Bs Blue value for Ps 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e Bm 5 Red value for Ph 5 Bm 5 Green value for Ph 5 Bm 4 Green value for P4 Bm 4 Blue value for P 4 Bn 3 Red value for P 5 Bm 3 Green value for P4 Bm 2 Green value for Py Bm Blue value for P Bm 1 Red value for P 4 Bm4 Green value for P 4 Bm Green value for Ph Bm Blue value for Ph Basler scout GigE 203 Pixel Data Formats AW00011918000 With the camera set for Bayer RG8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 e e e e e e 0x01 1 0x00 0 204 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 3 Bayer BG 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 16 pixel data format it outputs 16 bits of data per pixel with 12 bits
268. ine Debouncer Abs parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Select the input line Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Linel Set the parameter value to 100 microseconds Camera LineDebouncerTimeAbs SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 299 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 12 Minimum Output Pulse Width An output signal sent by the camera may be too narrow for some receivers to be detected To ensure reliable detection the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature allows you to increase the signal width to a set minimum width If the signal width of the original output signal is narrower than the set minimum the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature will increase the signal width to the set minimum before the signal is sent out of the camera see the figure below If the signal width of the original output signal is equal to or wider than the set minimum the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature will have no effect The signal will be sent out of the camera with unmodified signal width Without signal With signal width increas
269. ine the maximum packet size that it can handle If there are any settings available for the switch make sure that the switch is set for the largest packet size possible Now that you have set the adapter and switch you can determine the largest packet size the network can handle The device with the smallest maximum packet size determines the maximum allowed packet size for the network For example if the adapter can handle 8 kB packets and the switch can handle 6 kB packets then the maximum for the network is 6 kB packets Once you have determined the maximum packet size for your network set the value of the Packet Size parameter on each camera to this value maximum packet size for a device especially network switches There is a quick and dirty way to check the maximum packet size for your network with its current configuration 1 Open the pylon Viewer select a camera and set the Packet Size parameter to a low value 1 kB for example D The manufacturer s documentation sometimes makes it difficult to determine the 2 Use the Continuous Shot mode to capture several images 3 Gradually increase the value of the Packet Size parameter and capture a few images after each size change 4 When your Packet Size setting exceeds the packet size that the network can handle the viewer will lose the ability to capture images When you use Continuous Shot the viewer s status bar will indicate that it is acquiring images but the i
270. ing Green and Yellow LEDs The RJ 45 jack on the camera includes a green LED and a yellow LED When the green LED is lit it indicates that an active network connection is available When the yellow LED is lit it indicates that data is being transmitted via the network connection 76 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Physical Interface 7 2 3 12 pin Connector An Incorrect Plug Can Damage the 12 pin Connector The plug on the cable that you attach to the camera s 12 pin connector must have 12 pins Use of a smaller plug such as one with 10 pins or 8 pins can CAUTION damage the pins in the camera s 12 pin connector The 12 pin connector on the camera is a Hirose micro receptacle part number HR10A 10R 12P or the equivalent The 12 pin receptacle is used to access the two physical input lines and four physical output lines on the camera It is also used to supply power to the camera The pin assignments for the receptacle are shown in Table 7 Pin numbering is as shown in Section 7 2 1 on page 76 Pin Designation Camera Power Gnd Camera Power Gnd I O Input 1 I O Input 2 I O Input Gnd I O Output 1 1 O Output 2 Camera Power VCC c o o oc1 JOJN Camera Power VCC A o I O Output VCC 11 1 O Output 3 12 1 O Output 4 Table 7 Pin Assignments for the 12 pin Receptacle D Pins 1 and 2 are tied togeth
271. interest AOI Once you have adjusted the frame rates and or AOI settings on the cameras you should repeat steps 2 through 6 For more information about the camera s maximum allowed frame transmission rate see Section 9 13 on page 163 For more information about the AOI see Section 12 4 on page 234 Basler scout GigE 69 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW 0001 1918000 70 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Camera Functional Description 6 Camera Functional Description This chapter provides an overview of the camera s functionality from a system perspective The overview will aid your understanding when you read the more detailed information included in the later chapters of the user s manual 6 1 Overview All Models Except scA750 60 SCA750 60 gm gc For information about scA750 60 gm gc cameras see The information in this section applies to all camera models except the Section 6 2 on page 73 Each camera provides features such as a full frame shutter and electronic exposure time control Exposure start and exposure time can be controlled by parameters transmitted to the camera via the Basler pylon API and the GigE interface There are also parameters available to set the camera for single frame acquisition or continuous frame acquisition Exposure start can also be controlled via an externally generated frame start trigger ExFSTrig signal applied to the camera s input line
272. ion of response times removed ranges of response time values included a measured example indicated general dependences of response times and removed the I O Line Schematic figure in Section 7 6 3 on page 85 Basler scout GigE 349 Revision History AW00011918000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00011916000 14 Dec 2012 Indicated Basler AG as bearer of the copyright on the second page Added information about the 90 head housing model for the scA1600 28gm gc in Section 1 2 on page 2 and Section 1 5 2 2 on page 31 Removed abs max voltages from Section 1 2 on page 2 Section 1 9 on page 38 Section 7 4 on page 80 and Section 7 6 on page 81 Updated the upper limit for transmission in the IR cut filter recommendations in Section 1 4 on page 18 Added references to Section 12 19 on page 321 in sections 2 10 3 3 10 3 4 and 12 5 Added AC In lines and Gnd to the power supply and cable shield in Fig 38 in Section 7 3 2 on page 78 Replaced max input voltage by voltage range in Figure 38 in Section 7 6 1 2 on page 82 Added a current limiter to Figure 38 and a transistor to Figure 39 in Section 7 6 on page 81 Added inversion of the input lines in Section 8 1 3 on page 88 Removed all text referring to overlapped exposure from Section 9 11 4 on page 155 Added the Color Creation and Enhancement Section 10 on page 171 Transferred the following sections to Section 10 on page 171 The
273. irst time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will be in legacy mode The acquisition start trigger of the legacy mode is called frame start trigger in the standard mode The acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 99 The acquisition start trigger is used to begin frame acquisition Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status it will begin a frame acquisition each time it receives an acquisition start trigger signal Note that in order for the camera to be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status The Acquisition Mode parameter must be set correctly A proper Acquisition Start command must be applied to the camera For more information about the Acquisition Mode parameter and about Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands see Section 9 2 on page 101 and Section 9 3 on page 105 Referring to the use case diagrams that appear in Section 9 8 on page 140 can help you understand the explanations of the acquisition start trigger Remember however that the diagrams apply to the standard mode Accordingly the acquisition start trigger shown in the diagrams is not available in legacy mode and the frame start trigger shown is equivalent to the acquisition start trigger in legacy mo
274. is set for Bayer BG 8 output The following standards are used in the tables Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera for a row P the last pixel transmitted by the camera for a row Bg the first byte of data for a row Bm the last byte of data for a row Even Rows Odd Rows Byte Data Byte Data Bo Blue value for Pg Bo Green value for Po B Green value for P4 B Red value for P4 Bo Blue value for Ps Bo Green value for Ps B3 Green value for P3 B3 Red value for P3 B4 Blue value for P4 By Green value for P4 Bs Green value for Ps5 Bs Red value for Ps 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e 2 e Bm 5 Blue value for P 5 Bm 5 Green value for P 5 Bm 4 Green value for Ph 4 Bm 4 Red value for Ph 4 Basler scout GigE 201 Pixel Data Formats Green value for Ph 3 Red value for P Green value for P 4 Bm 3 Blue value for Ph 3 Bm 3 Bm 2 Green value for Py Bm 2 Bm 1 Blue value for P Bm 1 Bm Green value for P Bm Red value for Ph AW00011918000 With the camera set for Bayer BG 8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 2
275. isition start trigger signals at the maximum rate allowed with the current camera settings If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value less than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals at the rate specified by the parameter setting If the parameter is enabled and is set to a value greater than the maximum allowed frame rate with the current camera settings the camera will generate acquisition start trigger signals at the maximum allowed frame rate For information about setting the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 9 6 1 3 on page 128 in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status For more information about the acquisition status see Section 9 2 on page 101 and Section 9 4 on page 107 D Keep in mind that the camera will only react to acquisition start triggers when it is Exposure Time Control with the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode Off When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the camera s exposure time parameters For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 137 126 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 6 1 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Mode On When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on
276. it depth 4n tees 2 4 6 8 10 black level explained sees 226 Setting ene 227 black level raw parameter 227 black level selector 227 block diagram ssss 72 74 C cables Ethernet onse etes 78 PLC power and I O cable 79 standard I O cable 78 camera description file 41 camera feature set ssssssse 321 camera power requirements 2 4 6 8 10 80 chunk dynamic range max parameter 325 chunk dynamic range min parameter 325 chunk enable parameter 326 329 331 334 93D cde can dtu iesc f idt 338 chunk frame counter parameter 326 chunk height parameter 325 chunk line status all parameter 334 chunk mode sees 324 chunk mode active parameter 324 chunk offset x parameter 325 chunk offset y parameter 325 chunk parser 325 326 329 331 334 336 353 Index 338 chunk pixel format parameter 325 chunk selector 326 329 331 334 336 chunk sequence set index parameter 338 chunk time stamp parameter 329 chunk trigger input counter parameter 331 chunk width parameter 325 cleaning the camera and sensor 40
277. it moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 2 but itis a 12 bit pattern The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is initiated The test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition The mathematical expression for this test image is Gray Value column number row number counter MOD 4096 not have a 10 bit output mode available use of test image 3 on scA750 60 On scA750 60 cameras test image 3 is a 10 bit pattern Since these cameras do cameras is not recommended Test Image 4 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test 8 bit The basic appearance of test image 4 is similar to test image 2 the 8 bit moving diagonal gray gradient image The difference between test image 4 and test image 2 is this if a camera feature that involves digital processing is enabled test image 4 will show the effects of the feature while test image 2 will not This makes test image 4 useful for checking the effects of digital features such as the luminance lookup table Test Image 5 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient Feature Test 12 bit The basic appearance of test image 5 is similar to test image 3 the 12 bit moving diagonal gray gradient image The difference between test image 5 and test image 3 is this if a camera feature that involves digital processing is enabled test image 5 will show the effects of the feature while test image 3
278. itable for standard operation because of the associated delays The delay between sending a software command and it becoming effective will depend on the specific installation and the current load on the network Accordingly the number of image acquisitions that may occur between sending the software command and it becoming effective can not be predicted Asynchronous advance and restart are therefore not suitable for real time applications they may however be useful for testing purposes D Synchronous advance and restart are part of the standard operation of the We strongly recommend to only use synchronous advance and synchronous restart for real time applications acquired frame The chunk contains the index number of the sequence set that was used for the frame acquisition For more information about the Sequence set Index chunk see the Chunk Features section D You can use the Sequence Set Index chunk feature to add a chunk to each Using the Load Command There is also the Sequence Set Load command that may be useful when working with the sequence sets for testing purposes If you use the Sequence Set Index parameter to select a sequence set and then you execute the Sequence Set Load command the sequence parameter values in the active set will be replaced by the values stored in the selected sequence set This ability can be useful in two situations First if you simply want to see how the parameters current
279. ite good If you want to make additional changes adjust the hue and saturation by using the color adjustment feature Keep in mind that when you adjust a color the colors on each side of it in the color hexagon will also be affected to some degree For example when you adjust red yellow and magenta will also be affected When you are making hue and saturation adjustments it is a good idea to start by concentrating on one line in the color chart Once you have the colors in a line properly adjusted you can move on to each of the other lines in turn misadjust the color adjustment settings and not be able to bring them back into proper adjustment You can easily recover from this situation by using the camera s color adjustment reset command see page 189 D When you first start working with the color enhancement tools it is easy to badly Another way to recover is to make the cameras color factory setup the default configuration set and then to load the default configuration set into the camera s active set See the next section for more information about the camera s color factory setup 190 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 3 6 The Color Factory Setup When a camera leaves the factory it contains several factory setups stored in its permanent memory A factory setup is simply a collection of settings for the parameters needed to operate the camera Each one of the factory set
280. ivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 When a monochrome camera is set for the YUV 4 2 2 Packed pixel data format the camera transmits Y U and V values in a fashion that mimics the output from a color camera set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed The Y value transmitted for each pixel is an actual 8 bit brightness value similar to the pixel data transmitted when a monochrome camera is set for Mono 8 The U and V values transmitted will always be zero With this color coding a Y value is transmitted for each pixel butthe U and V values are only transmitted for every second pixel The order of the pixel data for a received frame in the image buffer in your PC is similar to the order of YUV 4 2 2 Packed output from a color camera For more information about the YUV 4 2 2 Packed format on color cameras see Section 11 3 6 on page 210 11 2 5 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format When a monochrome camera is set for the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed pixel data format the camera transmits Y U and V values in a fashion that mimics the output from a color camera set for YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed The Y value transmitted for each pixel is an actual 8 bit brightness value similar to the pixel data transmitted when a monochrome camera is set for Mono 8 The U and V values transmitted will always be zero With this color coding a Y value is transmitted for each pixel butthe U and V values are only transmitted for every second pixel The order of the pixel data for a received frame i
281. ive offset in the digital values output for the pixels Effect on All Camera Models Except the scA640 120 scA750 60 scA1300 32 scA1400 30 and scA1600 28 If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective pixel depth Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 Bayer RG 8 RGB 8 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed an increase of 16 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels And a decrease of 16 in the setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields an effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pixel Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed Bayer BG 16 Bayer RG 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed an increase of 1 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels A decrease of 1 in the setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels Effect on scA750 60 Models An increase of 4 in the black level parameter setting will result in a positive offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels And a decrease of 4 in the setting will result in a negative offset of 1 in the digital values output for the pixels Effect on scA640 120 scA1300 32 scA1400 30 and scA1600 28 Models If the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective pixel depth Mono 8 Bayer
282. ixel is performed by multiplying a 1 x 3 matrix containing R G and B color values with a 3 x 3 matrix containing correction values Each column in the 3 x 3 matrix can be populated with values of your choice In other words GainOO Gain01 Gain02 R R Gain10 Gaini1 Gain2 G G Gain20 Gain21 Gain22 B B Where Gain00 Gain01 etc are settable values Basler scout GigE 183 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO0001 1918000 Each GainXY position can be populated with a floating point value ranging from 8 0 to 7 96875 by using the Color Transformation Value Selector to select one of the GainXY positions in the matrix and using the Color transformation Value parameter to enter a value for that position As an alternative the Gain XY values can each be entered as an integer value on a scale ranging from 256 to 255 This integer range maps linearly to the floating point range with 256 being equivalent to 8 0 32 being equivalent to 1 0 and 255 being equivalent to 7 96875 The integer values can be entered using the Color transformation Value Raw parameter A reference article that explains the basics of color matrix transformation for video data can be found at http www its bldrdoc gov publications 04 406 aspx Setting Custom Matrix Values You can set the Color Transformation Value Selector Color Transformation Value and Color Transformation Value Raw parameters from within your application software by using the Basler pylo
283. ize and Device Current Throughput parameters see Section 5 1 on page 57 9 13 Maximum Allowed Acquisition Frame Rate All Models Except scA750 60 SCA750 60 gm gc For information about scA750 60 gm gc cameras see The information in this section applies to all camera models except the Section 9 14 on page 167 In general the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate can be limited by three factors The amount of time it takes to read an acquired frame out of the imaging sensor and into the camera s frame buffer This time varies depending on the height of the frame Frames with a smaller height take less time to read out of the sensor The frame height is determined by the camera s AOI Height settings The exposure time for acquired frames If you use very long exposure times you can acquire fewer frames per second The amount of time that it takes to transmit an acquired frame from the camera to your host PC The amount of time needed to transmit a frame depends on the bandwidth assigned to the camera acquisition frame rate for a given AOI cannot be achieved To achieve the maximum possible acquisition frame rate set the camera for the continuous acquisition mode D When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame the maximum possible To determine the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with your current camera settings you can read the value of the camera s Resulting Frame Rate parame
284. k Address allows the user to specify a MAC address that will override the default address provided by the adapter Packet Buffer Size Sets the size in bytes of the buffers used by the receive descriptors and the transmit descriptors Receive Descriptors Sets the number of descriptors to use in the adapter s receiving ring Transmit Descriptors Sets the number of descriptors to use in the adapter s transmit ring To access the advanced properties for an adapter Open a Network Connections window and find the connection for your network adapter Right click on the name of the connection and select Properties from the drop down menu A LAN Connection Properties window will open Click the Configure button Bac Mics An Adapter Properties window will open Click the Advanced tab parameters can have a significant negative effect on the performance of the We strongly recommend using the default parameter settings Changing the adapter and the driver 54 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 4 3 Transport Layer Parameters The transport layer parameters are part of the camera s basic GigE implementation These parameters do not normally require adjustment Read Timeout If a register read request is sent to the camera via the transport layer this parameter designates the time out in milliseconds within which a response must be received Write Timeout If a register writ
285. k mode must be active before you can enable the trigger input counter disables all chunk features To enable the trigger input counter chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Trigger Input Counter chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the trigger input counter chunk is enabled the camera will add a trigger input counter chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the trigger input counter information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Trigger Input Counter parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the trigger input counter chunk run the parser and retrieve the trigger input counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Trigger Input Counter chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector Triggerinputcounter Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser Grab
286. l Response for Mono Cameras 000 ccc eee 12 1 4 Spectral Response for Color Cameras eee 18 1 5 Mechanical Specifications llle 24 1 524 Standard HOUSING exer Eua cx RE ERR a pede s 24 1 5 1 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points 24 1 5 1 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy llle 27 1 5 2 90 Head Housing s sa sg be RD ex mE oto te s 29 1 5 2 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points 29 1 5 2 2 Sensor Positioning Accuracy llle 31 1 5 3 Maximum Thread Length on Color Cameras l i sellers 32 1 5 4 Mechanical Stress Test Results l lilii leeren 33 1 6 Software Licensing Information 0 0 00 ee ere 34 1 6 1 EWIPTGP IP Licensing rie ERUR STOREXCEREEDDES Ye 34 1 6 2 gt EZA Licensing xerunt eL rgo gn tee ce Ra Rn 35 1 7 Avoiding EMI and ESD Problems lsslseeeeeeee ren 36 1 8 Environmental Requirements liiis 37 1 8 14 Temperature and Humidity l liess 37 1 8 2 Ventllati n 92 senie ek See a ER EO Re EE 37 1 9 Precautioris 24 eR yamiR RR Ob RUE RE wipERNIUERRLIGE Rr riae 38 2 Installationis 9i dy X va xo Ee aa aee 3L ce Rc ste s 41 3 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters 43 3 1 Basler pylon Camera Software Suite liliis 43 Sit pylon VIeWOr sari 5700088500 d or t Ry RBPPIIISBRPSS Mg hae waa 43 3 1 2 pylon IP Configurator lll
287. l dB Gain at dB Gain at Max Setting dB Gain at Max Setting Min Seiting 8 bit depth 16 bit depth scA640 70 0 27 8 8 scA640 74 0 28 3 10 1 scA640 120 0 23 34 8 98 scA780 54 0 25 9 7 7 scA1000 30 0 25 5 7 3 scA1300 32 0 19 75 3 59 scA1390 17 0 25 5 7 3 scA1400 17 0 31 0 12 8 scA1400 30 0 25 13 9 0 scA1600 14 0 25 9 7 7 scA1600 28 0 20 29 4 13 Table 17 Minimum and Maximum dB of Gain Basler scout GigE 223 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Setting the Gain scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 gm gc cameras For information about the other camera models see the previous section adjusted The Gain Auto function is the automatic counterpart of the gain feature and adjusts the Gain Raw parameter value automatically For more information about auto functions see Section 12 9 1 on page 283 D Gain can not only be manually set see below but can also be automatically For more information about the Gain Auto function see Section 12 9 2 on page 290 The camera s gain is determined by the value of the Gain Raw parameter Gain Raw is adjusted on a decimal scale The range for the Gain Raw parameter setting is from O to 22 To set the Gain Raw parameter value 1 Setthe Gain Selector to Gain All 2 Setthe Gain Raw parameter to your desired value You can set the Gain Selector and the Gain Raw parameter value from within your application software by using t
288. l feature chunk features To enable the line status all chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Line Status All chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the line status all chunk is enabled the camera will add a line status all chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the line status all information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Line Status All parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the line status all chunk run the parser and retrieve the line status all chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Line Status All chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector LineStatusAll Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true 334 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Chunk Features retrieve data from the chunk IChunkParser amp ChunkParser Camera CreateChunkParser GrabResult Result StreamGrabber RetrieveResult Result ChunkParser Attac
289. lack Level This parameter is individually available for timer 1 timer 2 timer 3 and timer 4 This parameter is only available in auto sequence advance mode Sequence Set Configuration Before the sequencer feature can be used you must populate the sequence sets with the parameter values of the sequence parameters and store the sequence sets in the camera s memory Each sequence set is identified by a sequence set index number starting from zero After storing the sequence sets are available for use by the sequencer feature Some sequence advance modes require the storing of additional settings for example the total number of sequence sets you want to use the number of consecutive uses of a sequence set or the source to control sequence set advance For details about populating sequence sets and making related settings see the sections below explaining the sequence advance modes current sequence set cannot be read or changed using the pylon API or the pylon Viewer Only those sequence parameter values will be displayed that were active before the sequencer was enabled You will not be able to see the parameter values set by the current set D When the sequencer feature is enabled the sequence parameter values of the Make sure the sequencer feature is disabled when configuring sequence sets Basler scout GigE 239 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 camera is reset or switched off If you are using the sequenc
290. late the dB of gain that will result from that setting Formulas for All Models Listed on the Previous Page except scA640 120 scA1300 32 scA1400 30 and scA1600 28 For gain raw settings from 110 to 511 _ 658 Gain Raw Setting _ Gaingg 20log49 658 Gain Raw Setting amp For gain raw settings from 512 to 1023 Gaingg 0 0354 x Gain Raw Setting Gi Where B 658 Min Gain Raw Setting SIR 658 Min Gain Raw Setting Example Assume that you are working with a monochrome scA1400 17 camera that has a gain raw setting of 500 Calculating the gain is a two step process Step 1 Geo 20xlog4o S98 1797 658 192 Basler scout GigE 221 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 G 5 22 dB Step 2 658 500 Gaingg 20x logy 5 22 dB Gaingg 12 1 dB Calculation for the scA640 120 scA1300 32 scA1400 30 and scA1600 28 For the entire range of raw settings Gaingg 0 0359 x Gain Raw Setting G Where G 0 0359 x Min Gain Raw Setting Example Assume that you are working with a monochrome scA1400 30 camera that has a gain raw setting of 500 Calculating the gain is a two step process Step 1 G 0 0359 x 150 G 5 385 dB Step 2 Gaingg 0 0359 x 500 5 385 dB Table 17 shows the minimum and maximum gain in dB for each camera model 222 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Standard Features Camera Mode
291. latile memory to be the startup set The configuration set that you designate as the startup set will be loaded into the active set whenever the camera starts up at power on or after a reset The User Set Default Selector is used to select the startup set Set the User Set Default Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 or Default You can set the User Set Default Selector from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector Camera UserSetDefaultSelector SetValue UserSetDefaultSelector Default 320 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 19 Camera Feature Set After the camera is powered on pylon software processes a camera description file to make the camera features available for use The camera description file is included in the camera and describes the camera features in accord with the GenlCam specification scout GigE cameras include two camera description files that are used alternatively The camera description files represent partially different combinations of features feature sets To obtain the desired feature set for use you must select the related camera description file by setting the CameraFeatureSet parameter value and restarting the camera see below off and on Accordingly the current camera description file will serve as the default camera description file whenever the camera is powered on until th
292. le and Enabling the Table You can change the values in the luminance lookup table LUT and enable the use of the lookup table by doing the following Use the LUT Selector to select a lookup table Currently there is only one lookup table available i e the luminance lookup table described above Use the LUT Index parameter to select a value in the lookup table The LUT Index parameter selects the value in the table to change The index number for the first value in the table is 0 for the second value in the table is 1 for the third value in the table is 2 and so on Use the LUT Value parameter to set the selected value in the lookup table Use the LUT Index parameter and LUT value parameters to set other table values as desired Use the LUT Enable parameter to enable the table You can set the LUT Selector the LUT Index parameter and the LUT Value parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter values Select the lookup table Camera LUTSelector SetValue LUTSelector Luminance Write a lookup table to the device The following lookup table causes an inversion of the sensor values bright dark dark bright for int i 0 i lt 1024 i 2 Camera LUTIndex SetValue i Camera LUTValue SetValue 1023 i Enable the lookup table Camera LUTEnable SetValue true
293. lect sequence set with index number 1 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 1 Set up the second acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Enable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue true The following code snippet illustrates using the API to load the sequence parameter values from sequence set 0 into the active set Select sequence set with index number 0 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue O Load the sequence parameter values from the sequence set into the active set Camera SequenceSetLoad Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 264 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 5 3 Free Selection Sequence Advance Mode When the free selection sequence advance mode is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next as frame start triggers are received does not adhere to a specific preset sequence The sequence sets can be selected at will using the states of input lines The states of the input lines set the sequence set addresses These correspond to the sequence set index numbers and accordingly the related sequence set is selected For details about selecting sequence sets via the sequence set
294. lue 500 500 milliseconds Heartbeat Timeout Camera t TlParams t TlParams Camera GetTLNodeMap TlParams HeartbeatTimeout SetValue 5000 5 seconds For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Basler scout GigE 55 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AWO001 1918000 56 Basler scout GigE AW0001 1918000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth 5 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth This section describes the camera parameters that are related to the camera s performance on the network It also describes how to use the parameters to manage the available network bandwidth when you are using multiple cameras 5 1 Network Related Parameters in the Camera The camera includes several parameters that determine how it will use its network connection to transmit data to the host PC The list below describes each parameter and provides basic information about how the parameter is used The following section describes how you can use the parameters to manage the bandwidth used by each camera on your network Payload Size read only Indicates the total size in bytes of the image data plus any chunk data if chunks are enabled that the camera will transmit Packet headers are not included Stream Channel Selector read write The Gi
295. lues of sequence set 1 are used When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used An AsyncRestart command is sent After some delay the parameter values of sequence set 0 will be loaded into the active set It is assumed here that the delay between sending the AsyncRestart command and it becoming effective will allow the acquisition of two more images When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used The AsyncRestart command has not yet become effective because of the assumed associated delay When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used The AsyncRestart command has not yet become effective because of the assumed associated delay When the AsyncRestart command becomes effective the camera happens to be in waiting for frame start trigger status The parameter values of sequence set 0 are loaded into the active set Note that the camera briefly exits the waiting for frame start trigger status while the parameter values of sequence set 1 are loaded into the active set see also Figure 78 Basler scout GigE 259 Standard Features 260 AW00011918000 D Make sure no
296. lustrates using the API to set the selector and execute the command Camera UserSetSelector SetValue UserSetSelector UserSetl1 Camera UserSetSave Execute For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 12 18 2 Selecting a Factory Setup as the Default Set When the camera is delivered the Standard Factory Setup will be selected as the default set You can however select any one of the four factory setups to serve as the default set To select which factory setup that will serve as the default set Set the Default Set Selector to the Standard Factory Setup High Gain Factory Setup Auto Functions Factory Setup or Color Factory Setup You can set the Default Set Selector from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector If you want to select the Standard Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector Standard If you want to select the High Gain Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector HighGain If you want to select the Auto Functions Factory Setup Camera DefaultSetSelector SetValue DefaultSetSelector AutoFunctions If you want to sel
297. ly stored in one of the sequence sets will affect camera operation you can load the parameters from that sequence set into the active parameter set and see what happens Second if you want to prepare a new sequence set and you know that an existing set is already close to what you will need you can load the existing sequence set into the active set make some small changes to the active set and then save the active set as a new sequence set Make sure the sequencer feature is disabled before issuing the Sequence Set Load command Load command is associated with a delay between sending the software command and it becoming effective The delay will depend on the specific installation and the current load on the network Accordingly the number of image acquisitions that may occur between sending the command and it becoming effective can not be predicted The Sequence Set Load command is therefore not suitable for real time applications it may however be useful for testing purposes D Replacing the sequence parameter values in the active set via the Sequence Set Basler scout GigE 241 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 The following code snippet illustrates using the API to load the sequence parameter values from sequence set 0 into the active set Select sequence set with index number 0 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue O Load the sequence parameter values from the sequence set into the active set Camera
298. m gc 0 25 0 34 scA750 60gm gc 0 51 0 80 scA1400 30gm gc 0 25 0 34 scA780 54gm gc 0 35 0 47 SCA1600 14gm gc 0 34 0 52 SCA1000 30gm gc 0 46 0 63 scA1600 28gm gc 0 34 0 52 Fig 24 Sensor Positioning Accuracy for Cameras with an Optional CS mount Lens Adapter in mm unless otherwise noted 28 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 5 2 90 Head Housing The camera housing conforms to protection class IP30 assuming that the lens mount is covered by a lens or by the cap that is shipped with the camera 1 5 2 1 Camera Dimensions and Mounting Points In scout cameras with the 90 head housing the camera s direction of view is at right angle to the direction of view of standard scout cameras The cameras are manufactured with high precision Planar parallel and angular sides ensure precise mounting with high repeatability The dimensions in millimeters for cameras equipped with a standard C mount lens adapter are as shown in Figure 25 Camera housings are equipped with four mounting holes on the top and four mounting holes on the bottom as shown in the drawings In addition there are four mounting holes in the front module 4x M3 4 5 mm deep recommend using the front module reference plane see the figure in the Sensor For optimum accuracy in the positioning of the camera s optical axis we Positioning Accuracy section as mounting surface Basler scout
299. mage in the viewing area will appear to be frozen 66 Basler scout GigE AW0001 1918000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth Step 3 Set the Bandwidth Reserve parameter for each camera The Bandwidth Reserve parameter setting for a camera determines how much of the bandwidth assigned to that camera will be reserved for lost packet resends and for asynchronous traffic such as commands sent to the camera If you are operating the camera in a relatively EMI free environment you may find that a bandwidth reserve of 2 or 3 is adequate If you are operating in an extremely noisy environment you may find that a reserve of 8 or 10 is more appropriate Step 4 Calculate the data bandwidth needed by each camera The objective of this step is to determine how much bandwidth in Byte s each camera needs to transmit the image data that it generates The amount of data bandwidth a camera needs is the product of several factors the amount of data included in each image the amount of chunk data being added to each image the packet overhead such as packet leaders and trailers and the number of frames the camera is acquiring each second For each camera you can use the two formulas below to calculate the data bandwidth needed To use the formulas you will need to know the current value of the Payload Size parameter and the Packet Size parameter for each camera You will also need to know the frame rate in frames
300. matically return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the camera s Exposure Mode parameter must be set to timed The exposure time for each acquired frame will be determined by the camera s exposure time parameters Software Acquisition Start Software Acquisition Start Trigger Signal Received Trigger Signal Received Frame Acquisition gt Exposure Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameter Fig 50 Frame Acquisition with a Software Acquisition Start Trigger When you are using a software trigger signal to start each frame acquisition the frame rate will be determined by how often you apply a software trigger signal to the camera and you should not attempt to trigger frame acquisition at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed for the current camera settings There is a detailed explanation about the maximum allowed frame rate at the end of this chapter Software acquisition start trigger signals that are applied to the camera when it is not ready to receive them will be ignored Section 9 5 2 2 on page 119 includes more detailed information about applying a software acquisition start trigger to the camera using Basler pylon For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 9 13 on page 163 and Section 9 14 on page 167 For more information about exposure tim
301. ment Reset The camera includes a Color Adjustment Reset command that can be used to reset the color adjustments This feature is especially useful if you have badly misadjusted the colors and you want to quickly return to reasonable settings When the reset command is used it will return the camera to the settings defined by your current Light Source Selector parameter setting You can execute the Color Adjustment Reset command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to execute the command Reset the color adjustments Camera ColorAdjustmentReset Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily execute the command For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 189 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 1918000 10 3 5 A Procedure for Setting the Color Enhancements When setting the color enhancements on the camera we recommend using the procedure outlined below Since it makes changing camera parameters quick and easy we also recommend using the Basler pylon Viewer software when you are making adjustments 1 Arrange your camera so that it is viewing a scene similar to what it will view during actual oper ation Make sure that the lighting for the scene is as close as possible to the actual lighting you will be using during normal operation Using lighting that represen
302. mera Model Exposure Start Delay Camera Model Exposure Start Delay SCA640 70gm gc 33 80 us SCA1300 32gm gc 34 14 us scA640 74gm gc 30 05 us scA1390 17gm gc 65 31 us SCA640 120gm gc 19 34 us SCA1400 17 gm gc 63 17 us SCA750 60 gm gc 180 0 us SCA1400 30gm gc 36 94 us SCA780 54gm gc 35 94 us SCA1600 14gm gc 63 53 us SCA1000 30gm gc 47 23 us SCA1600 28gm gc 32 us Table 12 Exposure Start Delays Basler scout GigE 161 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Note that if the debouncer feature is used the debouncer setting for the input line must be added to the exposure start delays shown in Table 12 to determine the total start delay For example assume that you are using an scA640 70 camera and that you have set the cameras for hardware triggering Also assume that you have selected input line 1 to accept the hardware trigger signal and that you have set the Line Debouncer Time Abs parameter for input line 1 to 5 us In this case Total Start Delay Start Delay from Table 12 Debouncer Setting Total Start Delay 33 80 us 5 us Total Start Delay 38 80 us TrigRdy Signal ExTrig Signal l l Exposure Start Delay gt qa Exposure Start Delay Exposure Exposure Exposure Frame N Frame N 1 Frame N 2 Exposure m lt a Frame Frame N Readout to the Image Buffer Frame N 1 Readout to the Image Buffer Readout i i Transmission Start Delay Pp Transmission Start Delay a gt a
303. mera via a GUI The tool will detect all Basler GigE cameras attached to your network and let you make changes to a selected camera For more information about using the IP Configurator see the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with pylon for Windows AW000611 You can download the guide from the Basler website www baslerweb com 3 1 3 pylon SDKs Three pylon SDKs are part of the Basler pylon Camera Software Suite pylon SDK for C Windows and Linux pylon SDK for C Windows pylon SDK for NET C Windows Each SDK includes an API a set of sample programs and documentation You can access all of the camera s parameters and control the camera s full functionality from within your application software by using the matching pylon API C C or NET The sample programs illustrate how to use the pylon API to parameterize and operate the camera For each environment C C and NET a Programmer s Guide and Reference Documentation is available The documentation gives an introduction to the pylon API and provides information about all methods and objects of the API 44 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters 4 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters This section describes the Basler network drivers available for your camera and provides detailed information about the parameters associated with the drivers Two network drivers are available for the network adapter used with your
304. meter must be set to enabled 182 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement Camera ProcessedRawEnable SetValue true Select the matrix color transformation type Camera ColorTransformationSelector SetValue ColorTransformationSelector RGBtoRGB Set the light source selector so that no correction will be done Camera LightSourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector Off Set the light source selector for tungsten lighting Camera LightSourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector Tungsten Set the light source selector for daylight at about 5000K Camera LightSourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector Daylight Set the light source selector for daylight at about 6500K Camera LightSourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector Daylight6500K Set the matrix correction factor Camera ColorTransformationMatrixFactor SetValue 0 50 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon API and the pylon Viewer see Section 3 on page 43 10 3 3 1 The Custom Light Source Setting The Custom setting for the Light Source Selector parameter is intended for use by someone who is thoroughly familiar with matrix color transformations It is nearly impossible to enter correct values in the conversion matrix by trial and error The RGB to RGB color matrix conversion for each p
305. mode when each sequence set is used only once per sequence set cycle Here however the first sequence set used for image acquisition after the sequencer feature was enabled is sequence set 1 as opposed to sequence set 0 in auto sequence advance mode D This way of operating the sequencer feature is similar to operating it in auto In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the available sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received the camera automatically advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition and so on Note that the camera has cycled once through the com
306. more frames you must apply a new acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to exit it from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on you must select a source signal to serve as the acquisition start trigger The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by executing an Trigger Software command for the acquisition start trigger on the host PC Line 1 When the source signal is set to line 1 you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line 1 on the camera If the Trigger Source parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to Line 1 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger 108 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control When the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set
307. more information about setting the state of user settable output signals see Section 8 2 2 on page 90 Basler scout GigE 89 I O Control AW00011918000 For more information about working with the timer output signals see Section 8 2 4 on page 92 For more information about the exposure active signal see Section 9 11 1 on page 152 For more information about the trigger ready signal see Section 9 11 3 on page 153 and Section 9 11 4 on page 155 8 2 2 Setting the State of User Settable Output Lines As mentioned in the previous section you can designate one or more of the user output lines as user settable Once you have designated an output line as user settable you can use camera parameters to set the state of the line Setting the State of a Single User Settable Output Line To set the state of a single user settable output line Use the User Output Selector to select the output line you want to set For example if you have designated output line 3 as user settable you would select user settable output 3 Set the value of the User Output Value parameter to true high or false low This will set the state of the selected line You can set the Output Selector and the User Output Value parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to designate output line 3 as user settable and setting the state of the output line Camera LineSelector SetValue Li
308. n API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the values in the matrix Note that the values in this example are just randomly selected numbers and do not represent values that you should actually use Set the light source selector for custom Camera LightSourceSelector SetValue LightSourceSelector Custom Select a position in the matrix Camera ColorTransformationValueSelector SetValue ColorTransformationValueSelector Gain01 Set the value for the selected position as a floating point value Camera ColorTransformationValue SetValue 2 11 Select a position in the matrix Camera ColorTransformationValueSelector SetValue ColorTransformationValueSelector Gainl2 Set the value for the selected position as an integer value Camera ColorTransformationValueRaw SetValue 135 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 184 Basler scout GigE AW0001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 3 4 Color Adjustment If color adjustment is not available activate the Full camera description file For more information see Section 12 19 on page 321 The camera s color adjustment feature lets you adjust hue and saturation for the primary and secondary colors in the RGB color space Each adjustment affects those colors in the image where the adjusted primary or secondary color predominates For example the adjustment of red affects th
309. n a waiting for frame trigger acquisition status the camera will acquire and transmit a frame The camera will retain the ability to acquire frames until an Acquisition Stop command is executed Once the Acquisition Stop command is received the camera will no longer be able to acquire frames Setting the Acquisition Mode and Issuing Start Stop Commands You can set the Acquisition Mode parameter value and you can execute Acquisition Start or Acquisition Stop commands from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The code snippet below illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode parameter value and to execute an Acquisition Start command Note that the snippet also illustrates setting several parameters regarding frame triggering These parameters are discussed later in this chapter Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode SingleFrame Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Basler scout GigE 105 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Camera AcquisitionStart Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Sec
310. n acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a Trigger Software command to apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera Camera TriggerSoftware Execute Retrieve acquired frame here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to AcquisitionStart executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 130 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 6 3 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 9 6 3 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to e g input line 1 an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 on the camera will act as the acquisition start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExASTrig signal can be used to trigger frame a
311. n changes the colorfulness intensity of a color The color adjustment feature lets you adjust saturation for the primary and secondary colors For example if saturation for red is increased the colorfulness of red colors in the image will increase If red is set to minimum saturation red will be replaced by gray for red colors in the image Basler scout GigE 187 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 1918000 Color Adjustment Parameters The initial parameter that you must consider when working with the color adjustment feature is the Processed Raw Enable parameter If you are working with a camera that is set to output pixel data in one of the Bayer formats then the Processed Raw Enabled parameter must be set to enabled if you wantto use color enhancement The camera will then be able to perform color enhancements on the raw RGB data from the sensor and still be able to output the pixel data in one of the Bayer formats If the camera is set for one of the Bayer formats pixel data output formats and the Processed Raw Enable parameter is not set to enabled the matrix color transformation feature and the color adjustment feature will have no effect on the camera operation The Processed Raw Enable parameter is not relevant if the camera is set to a color pixel data output format other than a Bayer format e g to a YUV output format You can enable or disable the color adjustment feature by setting the value of the Color Adjustment Enabl
312. n page 201 Basler scout GigE 175 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 1918000 10 2 Integrated IR Cut Filter All Color Models Color models of the camera that have a C mount lens adapter are equipped with an IR cut filter as standard equipment The filter is mounted inside of the lens adapter Cameras without an IR cut filer are available on request Monochrome cameras do not include an IR cut filter in the lens adapter Monochrome cameras with a C mount lens adapter can be equipped with a filter on request Lens Thread Length is Limited The location of the IR cut filter limits the length of the threads on any lens you use with the camera If a lens with a very long thread length is used the IR cut CAUTION filter will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate For more information about the location of the IR cut filter see Section 1 5 3 on page 32 176 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement 10 3 Color Enhancement Features 10 3 1 White Balance The white balance feature lets you adjust the balance of red green and blue such that white objects in the camera s field of view appear white in the acquired images Setting the White Balance be adjusted manually i e by setting the value of the Balance Ratio Abs D This section Section 10 3 1 describes how a color camera s white balance can parameters for red green and blue The camera also has a White Balance Auto
313. n page 75 Section 7 2 1 on page 76 dimensions holes for screw lock connector and Section 1 5 2 2 on page 31 front module reference planes Added note on internal dust seal in Section 1 9 on page 38 Added warning not to remove the serial number in Section Section 1 9 on page 38 Updated times in Section Section 7 6 3 on page 85 Corrected result of calculation example for formula 1 in Section 9 13 Removed note on scA750 60 output in Sections 11 2 1 11 2 4 11 2 5 11 3 2 11 3 6 11 3 8 and 11 3 7 Corrected sequence of colors for Bayer BG 12 Packed format in Section 11 3 4 on page 207 Minor corrections throughout the manual AW00011907000 21 Dec 2007 Added guidelines for avoiding EMI and ESD problems in Section 2 3 1 on page 55 Replaced recommendations of individual adapters by a reference to Basler technical support in Section 4 1 on page 67 Removed web link for further information on APIPA in Section 5 3 on page 83 Corrected the voltage ranges relating to logic O and logic 1 in Section 7 6 1 on page 81 Added references to Application Notes AW000565 in Section 9 3 1 on page 108 and Section 9 9 1 on page 150 Added minimum gain raw settings with vertical binning in Section 12 1 on page 219 Added a reference to binning in Section 12 4 on page 234 Added the Binning feature in Section 12 6 on page 271 Added the Gamma feature in Section 12 11 on page 263 Added the Disable Parameter Limits feat
314. n parameter settings called sequence sets to a sequence of image acquisitions As the images are acquired one sequence set after the other is applied This makes it possible to respond to different imaging requirements and conditions that may for example result from changing illumination while a sequence of images is acquired Three sequence advance modes provide different schemes for advancing from one sequence set to the next see below for details The Sequencer and the Active Configuration Set During operation the camera is controlled by a set of configuration parameters that reside in the camera s volatile memory This set of parameters is known as the active configuration set or active set for short When you use the pylon API or the pylon Viewer to make a change to a camera parameter such as the Gain you are making a change to the active set And since the active set controls camera operation you will see a change in camera operation when you change a parameter in the active set For more information about the active set see the Configuration Sets section The parameters in the active set can be divided into two types non sequence and sequence parameters as shown in Figure 72 on page 238 The values of the non sequence parameters cannot be changed using the sequencer feature The values of the sequence parameters however can be set very quickly by using sequence sets Because the sequence sets reside in the camera yo
315. n the image buffer in your PC is similar to the order of YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed output from a color camera For more information about the YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed format on color cameras see Section 11 3 7 on page 213 200 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Pixel Data Formats 11 3 Pixel Data Output Formats for Color Cameras 11 3 1 Bayer BG 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 When a color camera is set for the Bayer BG 8 pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of data per pixel and the pixel data is not processed or interpolated in any way So for each pixel covered with a red lens you get 8 bits of red data For each pixel covered with a green lens you get 8 bits of green data And for each pixel covered with a blue lens you get 8 bits of blue data This type of pixel data is sometimes referred to as raw output The BG in the name Bayer BG 8 refers to the alignment of the colors in the Bayer filter to the pixels in the acquired images For even rows in the images pixel one will be blue pixel two will be green pixel three will be blue pixel four will be green etc For odd rows in the images pixel one will be green pixel two will be red pixel three will be green pixel four will be red etc For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 11 3 1 on page 201 The tables below describe how the data for the even rows and for the odd rows of a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera
316. nce set to the next proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers according to the selected sequence control source Always Active The advance from one sequence set to the next proceeds automatically as frame triggers are received Input Line 1 or Input Line 2 The advance from one sequence set to the next proceeds according to the states of the selected input line Disabled The advance from one sequence set to the next is only controlled by AsyncAdvance software commands The Sequence Set Total Number parameter specifies the total number of different sequence sets that are available and included within a sequence set cycle The maximum number is 64 Basler scout GigE 247 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 5 2 1 Operation with the Always Active Sequence Control Source Operating the Sequencer When the Always Active sequence control source is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next proceeds automatically in ascending sequence set index numbers as frame start triggers are received The following use case see also Figure 74 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in controlled sequence advance mode with Always Active selected as the sequence control source As images are captured continuously the camera advances automatically with no action by the user from one sequence set to the next in ascending sequence set index numbers After one sequence set cycle is complete another one starts sequence advance
317. nction perform the following steps Select Auto Function AOI Set the position and size of Auto Function AOI Set the lower and upper limits for the Gain Raw All parameter value Set the target average gray value If necessary set the auto function profile 9x gio ume Enable the gain auto function by setting it to once or continuous You must choose the continuous setting when using the auto function profile The currently settable limits for the Auto Gain Raw parameter value depend on the current pixel data format on the current settings for binning and on whether or not the Gain Raw parameter limits for the manually set gain feature are disabled The target average gray value may range from 50 to 205 Note that this parameter value range applies to 8 bit and to 16 bit 12 bit effective output modes Note also that a given parameter value setting corresponds to an identical gray value regardless of the output mode You can carry out steps 1 to 6 from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Selecting and setting Auto Function AOI Setting the limits for the Auto Gain Raw parameter value The currently accessible minimum and maximum parameter values are chosen as examples Setting the target average gray value A medium gray value is chosen as an example Enabling the gain auto function and selecting for example the once mode
318. nd Exposure Time Base parameters the camera will automatically change the setting for the Exposure Time Abs parameter to the nearest achievable value You should also be aware that if you change the exposure time using the raw settings the Exposure Time Abs parameter will automatically be updated to reflect the new exposure time Setting the Absolute Exposure Time Parameter You can set the Exposure Time Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 124 double resultingExpTime Camera ExposureTimeAbs GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 139 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 8 Use Case Diagrams D This section assumes that the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control In principle this section also applies if the legacy mode is enabled instead In this case however the following differences must be taken into account the acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode the frame start trigger of the standard mode is called acquisition start trigge
319. neSelector Out3 Camera LineSource SetValue LineSource UserOutput Camera UserOutputSelector SetValue UserOutputSelector UserOutput3 Camera UserOutputValue SetValue true bool currentUserOutput3State Camera UserOutputValue GetValue For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Setting the State of Multiple User Settable Output Lines The User Output Value All parameter is a 32 bit value As shown in Figure 42 the lowest four bits of the parameter value will set the state of the user settable outputs If a bit is 0 it will set the state of the associated output to low If a bit is high it will set the state of the associated port to high 90 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 I O Control Sets user output 4 state Sets user output 3 state Sets user output 2 state Sets user output 1 state 34 3029 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 tv 16 15 14 13 12 14 10 9 8 7 e 5 4 3 2 1 0 Not used LSB Fig 42 User Output Value All Parameter Bits To set the state of multiple user settable output lines Use the User Output Value All parameter to set the state of multiple user settable outputs You can set the User Output Value All parameter from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustra
320. ng sensor When the camera is set for a pixel format that outputs pixel data at 12 bit Ju A oT c Tr effective depth by default the camera transmits the 12 bits that are output from the ADC ADC B No Shift B Shift by 1 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the output from the camera will include bit 10 through bit 0 from the ADC ADC along with a zero as an LSB BAS 3 bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit The result of shifting once is that the output of the n 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 camera is effectively multiplied by 2 For example assume that the camera is set for no shift that it is M viewing a uniform white target and that under these le Sil conditions the reading for the brightest pixel is 100 lt shifted Once gt If you changed the digital shift setting to shift by 1 the reading would increase to 200 When the camera is set to shift by 1 the least significant bit output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that no odd gray values can be output and that the gray value scale will 228 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features only include values of 2 4 6 8 10 and so on This absence of some gray values is commonly referred to as missing codes If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 1 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set
321. ng the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter However if you require a duration time that is longer than what you can achieve by changing the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter alone the Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter can be used to change the duration time base The Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter value sets the duration time base in us The default is 1 us and it can be changed in 1 us increments Note that there is only one timer duration time base and it is used by all four of the available timers Basler scout GigE 95 I O Control AW00011918000 You can set the Timer Duration Time Base Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Camera TimerDurationTimebaseAbs SetValue 5 Setting the Duration with an Absolute Value You can also set the Timer duration by using an absolute value This is accomplished by setting the Timer Duration Abs parameter The units for setting this parameter are us and the value can be set in increments of 1 us To set the duration for a timer using an absolute value Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Duration Abs parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Duration Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the sele
322. nitor using this type of gamma correction is appropriate User Gamma With User type gamma correction you can set the gamma correction value as desired To accomplish the correction a gamma correction value y is applied to the brightness value Y of each pixel according to the following formula _ Y uncorrected Tae corrected Y max max Y The formula uses uncorrected and corrected pixel brightnesses that are normalized by the maximum pixel brightness The maximum pixel brightness equals 255 for 8 bit output and 4095 for 12 bit output The gamma correction value can be set in a range from 0 to 3 99902 When the gamma correction value is set to 1 the output pixel brightness will not be corrected A gamma correction value between 0 and 1 will result in increased overall brightness and a gamma correction value greater than 1 will result in decreased overall brightness In all cases black output pixel brightness equals 0 and white output pixel brightness equals 255 at 8 bit output and 4095 at 12 bit output will not be corrected Enabling and Setting Gamma Correction You can enable or disable the gamma correction feature by setting the value of the Gamma Enable parameter You can use the Gamma Selector to select either SRGB or user gamma correction If you select user gamma correction you can use the Gamma parameter to set the gamma correction value Basler scout GigE 179 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 19180
323. nly contains the model name of the camera for example SCA640 74gm Device Manufacturer Info read only can contain some information about the camera manufacturer This string usually indicates none Device Version read only contains the device version number for the camera Firmware Version read only contains the version of the firmware in the camera Device ID read only contains the serial number of the camera Device User ID read write is used to assign a user defined name to a device This name will be displayed in the Basler pylon Viewer and the Basler pylon IP Configurator The name will also be visible in the friendly name field of the device information objects returned by pylon s device enumeration procedure Device Scan Type read only contains the scan type of the camera for example area scan Sensor Width read only contains the physical width of the sensor in pixels Sensor Height read only contains the physical height of the sensor Max Width read only Indicates the camera s maximum area of interest AOI width setting Max Height read only Indicates the camera s maximum area of interest AOI height setting Sensor Board Temperature read only Indicates the current temperature in degrees centigrade of the camera s sensor board You can read the values for all of the device information parameters or set the value of the Device User ID parameter from within your application softw
324. nough to set bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 3 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore that you should only use the shift by 3 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 32 A ane Shifted Three Times Shift by 4 When the camera is set to shift by 4 the output from the camera will include bit 7 through bit 0 from the ADC The result of shifting four times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied by 16 ADC bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 11 109g 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 8 bit 9 bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 4 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will EY S le Shifted Four Times Basler scout GigE 231 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the multiply by 4 setting when your pixel readings with an 8 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 16 12 3 3 Precautions When Using Digital Shift There are several checks and precautions that you must follow before using the digital shift feature The checks and precautions differ depending on whether the camera will be set for a 12 bit pixel format or for an 8 bit pi
325. ntrolled Sequence Advance Mode with Line 1 as the Sequence Control Source and Syn chronous Restart Controlled by Line 2 Basler scout GigE 257 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 5 2 3 Operation with the Disabled Sequence Control Source Operating the Sequencer When the Disabled sequence control source is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers and is only possible by asynchronous advance Similarly sequence set restart is only possible by asynchronous restart command and it becoming effective will depend on the specific installation and the current load on the network Accordingly the number of image acquisitions that may occur between sending the software command and it becoming effective can not be predicted Using the sequencer feature with Disabled sequence control source is therefore not suitable for real time applications it may however be useful for testing purposes We strongly recommend not to use the sequencer feature with Disabled sequence control source for real time applications D The delay between sending an AsyncAdvance or an AsyncRestart software The following use case see also Figure 78 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in controlled sequence advance mode with Disabled selected as the sequence control source Sequence set advance proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers subject to asynchronous advance commands
326. o continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger and the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger are both set to off The camera will generate all required acquisition start and frame start trigger signals internally When the camera is set this way it will constantly acquire images without any need for triggering by the user This use case is commonly referred to as free run The rate at which the camera will acquire images will be determined by the camera s Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter unless the current camera settings result in a lower frame rate If the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is disabled the camera will acquire frames at the maximum allowed frame rate Cameras are used in free run for many applications One example is for aerial photography A camera set for free run is used to capture a continuous series of images as an aircraft overflies an area The images can then be used for a variety of purposes including vegetation coverage estimates archaeological site identification etc For more information about the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter see Section 9 5 1 1 on page 115 and for information about setting the parameter see Section 9 5 1 3 on page 117 Basler scout GigE 141 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Use Case Free Run Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger Off The acquisition start trigger is off The camera will generate acquisition
327. o the camera The camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally Because the frame start trigger is set to on the user must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera in order to begin each frame exposure In this case we have set the frame start trigger signal source to input line 1 and the activation to rising edge so the rising edge of an externally generated electrical signal applied to line 1 will serve as the frame start trigger signal This type of camera setup is used frequently in industrial applications One example might be a wood products inspection system used to inspect the surface of pieces of plywood on a conveyor belt as they pass by a camera In this situation a sensing device is usually used to determine when a piece of plywood on the conveyor is properly positioned in front of the camera When the plywood is in the correct position the sensing device transmits an electrical signal to input line 1 on the camera When the electrical signal is received on line 1 it serves as a frame start trigger signal and initiates a frame acquisition The frame acquired by the camera is forwarded to an image processing system which will inspect the image and determine if there are any defects in the plywood s surface Basler scout GigE 143 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Use Case Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger On The acquisition start trigger is off The camera
328. oblems with the camera Attempt to connect all grounds to a single point e g use a single power outlet for the entire system and connect all grounds to the single outlet This will help to avoid large ground loops Large ground loops can be a primary cause of EMI problems Use a line filter on the main power supply Install the camera and camera cables as far as possible from devices generating sparks If necessary use additional shielding Decrease the risk of electrostatic discharge by taking the following measures Use conductive materials at the point of installation e g floor workplace Use suitable clothing cotton and shoes Control the humidity in your environment Low humidity can cause ESD problems Installations provides much more detail about avoiding EMI and ESD This application note can be obtained from the Downloads section of our website www baslerweb com D The Basler application note called Avoiding EMI and ESD in Basler Camera 36 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 8 Environmental Requirements 1 8 1 Temperature and Humidity Housing temperature during operation 0 C 50 C 432 F 122 F Humidity during operation 20 96 80 relative non condensing Storage temperature 20 C 80 C 4 F 176 F Storage humidity 20 80 relative non condensing 1 8 2 Ventilation Allow sufficient air circulati
329. ode Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Set the exposure time Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute Frame acquisition will start when the externally generated frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig signal goes high The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and execute the commands related to hardware frame start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode and the trigger mode for the acquisition start trigger set to off We will use the trigger width exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s Basler scout GigE 123 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with external frame start trigger signals Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelec
330. ode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set the trigger delay for one millisecond 1000us lms 0 001s double TriggerDelay us 1000 0 Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us Set for the timed exposure mode Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Set the exposure time Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute Frame acquisition will start when the externally generated acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig signal goes high The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and execute the commands related to hardware acquisition start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode We will use the trigger width exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate with external acquisition start trigger signals Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnabl
331. of data for a line Bm the last byte of data for a line Even Lines Odd Lines Byte Data Byte Data Bo Low byte of blue value for Po Bo Low byte of green value for Po B4 High byte of blue value for Po B4 High byte of green value for Po Bo Low byte of green value for P Bo Low byte of red value for P B3 High byte of green value for P4 B3 High byte of red value for P4 B4 Low byte of blue value for P B4 Low byte of green value for Po Bs High byte of blue value for Po Bs High byte of green value for P Bg Low byte of green value for P3 Bg Low byte of red value for P3 B High byte of green value for P5 B High byte of red value for P4 e e e e e e e e e Bm 7 Low byte of blue value for Ph 3 Bm 7 Low byte of green value for Py 3 Bm 6 High byte of blue value for P4 Bm 6 High byte of green value for Pp 3 Basler scout GigE 205 Pixel Data Formats AW00011918000 Bm 5 Low byte of green value for P Bm 5 Low byte of red value for P Bm 4 High byte of green value for Ph 2 Bm 4 High byte of red value for Py Bm 3 Low byte of blue value for P Bm 3 Low byte of green value for Py Bm 2 High byte of blue value for Py Bm 2 High byte of green value for Py Bma4 Low byte of green value for Ph Bma4 Low byte of red value for Ph Bm High byte of green value for P Bm High byte o
332. on Software Development Kit SDK Basler scout GigE 325 Chunk Features AWO001 1918000 13 3 Frame Counter The Frame Counter feature numbers frames sequentially as they are acquired When the feature is enabled a chunk is added to each frame containing the value of the counter The frame counter is a 32 bit value The counter starts at 0 and increments by 1 for each acquired frame The counter counts up to 4294967295 unless it is reset before see below After reaching the maximum value the counter will reset to 0 and then continue counting Be aware that if the camera is acquiring frames continuously and continuous capture is stopped several numbers in the counting sequence may be skipped This happens due to the internal image buffering scheme used in the camera feature or any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the frame counter disables all chunk features To enable the frame counter chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Frame Counter chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the frame counter chunk is enabled the camera will add a frame counter chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used
333. on around the camera to prevent internal heat build up in your system and to keep the camera s housing temperature below 50 C Additional cooling devices such as fans or heat sinks are not normally required but should be provided if necessary Basler scout GigE 37 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000 1 9 CAUTION CAUTION Precautions Avoid Dust on the Sensor The camera is shipped with a cap on the lens mount To avoid collecting dust on the camera s IR cut filter Color cameras or sensor mono cameras make sure that you always put the cap in place when there is no lens mounted on the camera Every time you remove or replace the plastic cap a lens or a lens adapter make sure that the camera is pointing down Never apply compressed air to the camera This can easily contaminate optical components particularly the sensor To further enhance dust protection the internal space in the camera that contains the imaging sensor is sealed off from the camera s other internal spaces Lens Thread Length is Limited Color models of the camera with a C mount lens adapter are equipped with an IR cut filter mounted inside of the adapter The location of this filter limits the length of the threads on any lens you use with the camera If a lens with a very long thread length is used the IR cut filter will be damaged or destroyed and the camera will no longer operate For more specific information about t
334. on software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera BlackLevelSelector SetValue BlackLevelSelector All Camera BlackLevelRaw SetValue 32 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 227 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 3 Digital Shift The information in this section applies to all camera models except the SCA750 60 gm gc The digital shift feature lets you change the group of bits that is output from the ADC in the camera Using the digital shift feature will effectively multiply the output of the camera by 2 times 4 times 8 times or 16 times The next two sections describe how the digital shift feature works when the camera is set for a 12 bit pixel format and when it is set for a 8 bit pixel format There is also a section describing precautions that you must observe when using the digital shift feature and a section that describes enabling and setting the digital shift feature 12 3 1 Digital Shift with 12 Bit Pixel Formats No Shift As mentioned in the Functional Description section of this manual the camera uses a 12 bit ADC to digitize the output from the imagi
335. on to easily set the parameters 9 4 5 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 9 4 5 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to line 1 an externally generated electrical signal injected into physical input line 1 on the camera will act as the acquisition start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external acquisition start trigger signal ExASTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExASTrig signal can be used to trigger acquisition start The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering When the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on the camera will initially be in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status It cannot react to frame start trigger signals when in this acquisition status When the appropriate ExASTrig signal is applied to line 1 e g a rising edge of the signal for rising edge triggering the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status It can then react to frame start trigger signals When the number of frame start trigger signals received by the camera is equal to the current Acquisition Frame Count parameter setting the camera will return to the waiting for acquisi
336. ontrol source to allow asynchronous sequence cycle reset the total number of sequence sets is set to 2 sequence sets 0 and 1 are populated by storing the sequence parameter values from the active set in the sequence sets and to enable the sequencer feature Disable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false Set the Controlled sequence advance mode and set line 1 as the sequence control source for synchronous sequence set advance Camera SequenceAdvanceMode SetValue SequenceAdvanceMode Controlled Camera SequenceControlSelector SetValue SequenceControlSelector Advance Camera SequenceControlSource SetValue SequenceControlSource Linel Set Disabled as the source because synchronous sequence set cycle restart will not be used Camera SequenceControlSelector SetValue SequenceControlSelector Restart Camera SequenceControlSource SetValue SequenceControlSource Disabled Basler scout GigE 263 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Set the total number of sequence sets Camera SequenceSetTotalNumber SetValue 2 Select sequence set with index number 0 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue O Set up the first acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Se
337. ool to 14 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but 10 resends are needed The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are used and 5 resends are used from the accumulator pool The accumulator pool is drawn down to 9 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period but 20 resends are needed The 5 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are used To complete all of the needed resends 15 resends would be required from the accumulator pool but the pool only has 9 resends So the 9 resends in the pool are used and 6 resend requests are answered with a packet unavailable error code The accumulator pool is reduced to 0 Basler scout GigE AW0001 1918000 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth 6 You trigger image acquisition and during this time period the camera acquires and transmits a frame The bandwidth reserve setting would allow 5 resends during this time period and 1 resend is needed The 1 resend needed is taken from the resends available via the bandwidth reserve The other 4 resends available via the bandwidth reserve are not needed so they are added to the accumulator pool and they bring the pool up to 4 7 During this time period you
338. oon as the position where a packet is missing advances beyond the resend request threshold a resend request is sent for the missing packet In the example shown in Figure 28 packets 987 to 1005 are within the receive window and packets 997 to 999 and 1002 were detected as missing In the situation shown a resend request is sent to the camera for each of the missing consecutive packets 997 to 999 The resend requests are sent after packet 996 the last packet of the intact sequence of packets has advanced beyond the resend request threshold and before packet 1000 the next packet in the stream of packets can advance beyond the resend request threshold Similarly a resend request will be sent for missing packet 1002 after packet 1001 has advanced beyond the resend request threshold and before packet 1003 can advance beyond the resend request threshold Resend Request Batching This parameter determines the location of the resend request batching threshold in the receive window Figure 28 The parameter value is in per cent of a span that starts with the resend request threshold and ends with the front end of the receive window The maximum allowed parameter value is 100 In Figure 28 the resend request batching threshold is set at 80 of the span The resend request batching threshold relates to consecutive missing packets i e to a continuous sequence of missing packets Resend request batching allows grouping of consecutive missing packets
339. or U and for V normally range from 128 to 127 Because the camera The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera P the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bg the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo U value for Pg B Y value for Po Bo V Value for Po B3 Y value for P4 210 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 B4 U value for P Bs Y value for Po Bg V Value for Po B7 Y value for P3 Bg U value for P4 Bg Y value for P4 Bio V Value for P4 B41 Y value for P5 e e e e e e Bm 7 U value for Ph 3 Bm 6 Y value for Ph 3 Bm 5 V Value for Ph 3 Bm 4 Y value for Py Bm 3 U value for P4 Bm 2 Y value for Py Bm V Value for Pj Bm Y value for Ph Pixel Data Formats When the camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 Packed output the pixel data output for the Y component is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The range of data values for the Y component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 e e e e e e 0x01 1 0x00 0 The pixel
340. or the frame start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Source parameter is set to e g input line 1 an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 on the camera will act as the frame start trigger signal for the camera This type of trigger signal is generally referred to as a hardware trigger signal or as an external frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig A rising edge or a falling edge of the ExFSTrig signal can be used to trigger frame acquisition The Trigger Activation parameter is used to select rising edge or falling edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status frame acquisition will start whenever the appropriate edge transition is received by the camera When the camera receives a hardware trigger signal and begins exposure it will exit the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status because at that point it cannot react to a new frame start trigger signal As soon as the camera is capable of reacting to a new frame start trigger signal it will automatically return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status When the camera is operating under control of an ExFSTrig signal the period of the ExFSTrig signal will determine the rate at which the camera is acquiring frames 1 _________ Frame Rate ExFSTrig period in seconds For example if you are operating a camera with an ExFSTrig signal period of 20 ms 0 02
341. ormation about Auto Function AOIs and how to set them see Section 12 9 1 2 on page 285 Basler scout GigE 291 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 9 3 Exposure Auto Exposure Auto is an auto function and the automatic counterpart to manually setting an absolute exposure time The exposure auto function automatically adjusts the Exposure Time Abs parameter value within set limits until a target average gray value for the pixel data from Auto Function AOI is reached In contrast to the manually set absolute exposure time the automatically adjusted absolute exposure time and the settable limits for parameter value adjustment are not restricted to multiples of the current exposure time base The exposure auto function uses Auto Function AOI1 and can be operated in the once and continuous modes of operation If Auto Function AOI does not overlap the Image AOI see the Auto Function AOI section the pixel data from Auto Function AOI will not be used to control the image brightness Instead the current manual setting of the Exposure Time Abs parameter value will control the image brightness The exposure auto function is not available when trigger width exposure mode is selected When the exposure auto function is used the gain auto function can be used at the same time In this case however you must also set the auto function profile feature If the Auto Exposure Time Abs Upper Limit parameter is set to a sufficiently hig
342. ory Setup 0 0 ee re 191 11 Pixel Data Formats sasise ccs omoes ede xn mh yn n ee 193 11 1 Setting the Pixel Data Format 0 00 cece eee 193 11 2 Pixel Data Formats for Mono Cameras 1 2 0 0 ce eee 195 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Table of Contents 11 2 1 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 200 005 195 11 2 2 Mono 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 16 196 11 2 3 Mono 12 Packed Format lislieleeeeee eee 198 11 2 4 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 ssssssseeeee ens 200 11 2 5 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format 00000 eee eee 200 11 3 Pixel Data Output Formats for Color Cameras 0 00 ee 201 11 3 1 Bayer BG 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 201 11 3 2 Bayer RG 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 8 04 203 11 3 83 Bayer BG 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Raw 16 205 11 3 4 Bayer BG 12 Packed Format 0 0 eee eee 207 11 3 5 RGB 8 Packed Format 0 0 0 cece ee ees 209 11 3 6 YUV 4 2 2 Packed Format Equivalent to DCAM YUV 4 2 2 00 0 ee 210 11 3 7 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Format 00 00s 213 11 3 8 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 2200005 215 11 4 Pixel Transmission Sequence 00 eet ete 217 12 Standard Features cies cease dade EIER DUE ERN DRE EAR dean 219 TST SAI nM RUIT E EIER ERE TE C
343. ot need to apply acquisition start trigger signals to the camera If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on the initial acquisition status of the camera will be waiting for acquisition start trigger see Figure 45 on page 103 When the camera is in this acquisition status it cannot react to frame start trigger signals When an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera the camera will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status The camera can then react to frame start trigger signals The camera will continue to react to frame start trigger signals until the number of frame start trigger signals it has received is equal to an integer parameter setting called the Acquisition Frame Count At that point the camera will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and will remain in that status until a new acquisition start trigger signal is applied As an example assume that the Trigger Mode parameter is set to on the Acquisition Frame Count parameter is set to three and the camera is in a waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status When an acquisition start trigger signal is applied to the camera it will exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Once the camera has received
344. ou should be aware that if the Acquisition Frame Rate Abs parameter is enabled the operation of the trigger ready signal will be influenced by the value of the parameter If the value of the parameter is greater than zero but less than the maximum allowed the trigger ready will go high at the rate specified by the parameter value For example if the parameter is set to 10 the trigger ready signal will go high 10 times per second If the value of the parameter is greater than the maximum allowed acquisition frame rate with the current camera settings the trigger ready signal will work as described above and will go high at a point that represents the maximum acquisition frame rate allowed the camera will simply ignore the attempt The trigger ready signal will only be available when hardware triggering is enabled D If you attempt to start an image acquisition when the trigger ready signal is low By default the trigger ready signal is assigned to physical output line 2 on the camera However the assignment of the trigger signal to a physical output line can be changed For more information about changing the assignment of camera output signals to physical output lines see Section 8 2 1 on page 89 For more information about the electrical characteristics of the camera s output lines see Section 7 6 2 on page 83 156 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Selecting the Trigger Ready Signal
345. ough 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be low the line status equals zero and therefore no new sequence parameter values are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the state of input line 1 Input line 1 is found to be high the line status equals one and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition Note that the state of input line 1 went high well ahead of the frame start trigger microsecond between setting the states of the input lines and the rise of the To ensure reliable selection of a sequence set allow the elapse of at least one frame start trigger signal Also maintain the states of the input lines at least for one microsecond after the frame start trigger signal has risen 252 Basler scout GigE AWO001 19
346. ould be used as the mapped 10 bit value Another thing to keep in mind about the table is that location 1022 is the last location that will have a mapped 10 bit value associated with it If the sensor reports a pixel value of 1023 the camera will not be able to perform an interpolation In this case the camera simply uses the mapped 10 bit value from location 1022 in the table The advantage of the luminance lookup table feature is that it allows a user to customize the response curve of the camera The graphs on the next page show the effect of two typical lookup 280 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features tables The first graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the output of the camera increases linearly as the sensor output increases The second graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the camera output increases quickly as the sensor output moves from 0 through 512 and increases gradually as the sensor output moves from 513 through 1023 1023 ioBr Mapped Value 512 256 0 0 256 512 768 1023 10 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 86 Lookup Table with Values Mapped in a Linear Fashion 1023 iopr Mapped Value 512 256 0 0 256 512 768 1023 10 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 87 Lookup Table with Values Mapped for Higher Camera Output at Low Sensor Readings Basler scout GigE 281 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Changing the Values in the Luminance Lookup Tab
347. ounter Reset Whenever the camera is powered off the trigger input counter will reset to 0 During operation you can reset the trigger input counter via I O input 1 I O input 2 or software and you can disable the reset By default the trigger input counter reset is disabled To use the trigger input counter reset Configure the trigger input counter reset by setting the counter selector to Counter1 and setting the counter event source to FrameTrigger Set the counter reset source to Line1 Line2 Software or to Off Execute the command if using software as the counter reset source You can set the trigger input counter reset parameter values from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to configure and set the trigger input counter reset and to execute a reset via software configure reset of trigger input counter Camera CounterSelector SetValue CounterSelector Counterl Camera CounterEventSource SetValue CounterEventSource FrameTrigger select reset by signal on input line 1 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Linel 332 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Chunk Features select reset by signal on input line 2 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Line2 select reset by software Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Software execute reset by software Camera CounterReset Exe
348. our exposure time You may need to compensate for a lower exposure time by using a brighter light source or increasing the opening of your lens aperture The frame transmission time will not normally be a restricting factor But if you are using multiple cameras and you have set a small packet size or a large inter packet delay you may find that the transmission time is restricting the maximum allowed rate In this case you could increase the packet size or decrease the inter packet delay If you are using several cameras connected to the host PC via a network switch you could also use a multiport network adapter in the PC instead of a switch This would allow you to increase the Ethernet bandwidth assigned to the camera and thus decrease the transmission time For more information about AOI settings see Section 12 4 on page 234 For more information on the settings that determine the bandwidth assigned to the camera see Section 5 2 on page 64 Formula 1 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the sensor readout time 1 Max F AOI Height 1 x C4 C ax Frames s AOI Height 1 x C4 C5 Where AO Height the height of the acquired frames as determined by the AOI Height settings The constants C4 and C gt depend on the camera model as shown in the table below 164 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Camera Model C4 C2 Camera Model Ci C2 SCA
349. out GigE 195 Pixel Data Formats AWO001 1918000 11 2 2 Mono 16 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 16 When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono16 pixel data format it outputs 16 bits of brightness data per pixel with 12 bits effective The 12 bits of effective pixel data fill from the least significant bit The four unused most significant bits are filled with zeros The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Mono16 output Note that the data is placed in the image buffer in little endian format The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera Ph the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bg the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Low byte of brightness value for Po B4 High byte of brightness value for Po Bo Low byte of brightness value for P B3 High byte of brightness value for P4 B4 Low byte of brightness value for Po Bs High byte of brightness value for P Bg Low byte of brightness value for P3 B High byte of brightness value for P4 Bg Low byte of brightness value for P4 Bg High byte of brightness value for P4 e e e Bm 7 Low byte of brightness value for P 3 Bm 6 High byte of brightness value for Ph 3 Bm 5 Low byte of brightness value for Py Bm 4 High byte of brightness
350. parameter settings as a user set and about working with user sets see Section 12 18 on page 315 Setting the Image Acquisition Control Mode You can set the image acquisition control mode from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the image acquisition control mode to standard mode and to legacy mode respectively Camera TriggerControlImplementation TriggerControlImplementation Standard Camera TriggerControlImplementation TriggerControlImplementation Legacy For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the image acquisition control mode For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 100 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 2 Means for Controlling Image Acquisition in Standard Mode D This section assumes that the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control In principle this section also applies if the legacy mode is enabled instead In this case however the following differences must be taken into account the acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode the frame start trigger of the standard mode is called acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode When the camera is started for
351. plete sequence set cycle when sequence set 5 was used With the next frame start trigger a new sequence set cycle starts where sequence set 0 is used After the sequencer feature is disabled the cycling through sequence sets is terminated The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled 248 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Use Case Operation in controlled sequence advance mode with Always Active as the sequence control source Automatic cycling through the sequence set cycles with no action by the user Enabling and disabling of the sequencer feature Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequence Set Cycle Sequencer Enabled Starts Again Disabled Frame Start Trigger Signal Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 H H n H LO 1 B n _ _ _ Time Fig 74 Sequencer in Controlled Sequence Advance Mode with Always Active as the Sequence Control Source Synchronous Restart You can restart the sequence cycle with input line 1 or input line 2 as the source for controlling sequence cycle restart In the following use case see also Figure 75 the same settings were made as in the pre
352. quired frame will be determined by the value of the camera s exposure time parameters Software Frame Start Software Frame Start Trigger Signal Received Trigger Signal Received Frame Acquisition Eat ig Exposure Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 46 Frame Acquisition with a Software Frame Start Trigger 118 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 5 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform software frame start triggering from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values and to execute the commands related to software frame start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode In this example the trigger mode for the acquisition start trigger will be set to off Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Disable the acquisition frame rate parameter this will disable the camera s internal frame rate control and allow you to control the frame rate
353. quisition start trigger acquisition status after 3 frame trigger signals have been applied The frame start trigger is on and the frame start trigger source is set to input line 1 The user must apply a frame start trigger signal to input line 1 to start each frame exposure Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger On Trigger Source for the acquisition start trigger Software Acquisition Frame Count 3 Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge a trigger signal applied by the user RSSI camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout frame transmission a frame start trigger signal that will be ignored because the camera is not in a waiting for frame start trigger status Acquisition Start Command Executed Acquisition Start Trigger Software Command Executed Frame Start Trigger Signal applied to line 1 Fig 58 Use Case 4 Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger On 148 MENSNNNNNIS DXX XXX XXX Time Acquisition Stop Command Executed 119 670 0 0 4 4 070 0 4 0 00 0 4705 Deseo RLF Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 9 Overlapping Exposure and Sensor Readout All
354. r in the legacy mode image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode D When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 99 The following pages contain a series of use case descriptions and diagrams The descriptions and diagrams are designed to illustrate how acquisition start triggering and frame start triggering work in some common situations and with some common combinations of parameter settings These use cases do not represent every possible combination of the parameters associated with acquisition start and frame start triggering They are simply intended to aid you in developing an initial understanding of how these two triggers interact In each use case diagram the black box in the upper left corner indicates how the parameters are set The use case diagrams are representational They are not drawn to scale and are not designed to accurately describe precise camera timings 140 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 1 Acquisition and Frame Start Triggers Both Off Free Run Use case one is illustrated on page 142 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set t
355. r Signal Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 BH H o o 1 BH 4 di Ww b Ww Ww Ww w w V V V y V V V yy y Y v Y Y Y y Time Fig 75 Sequencer in Controlled Sequence Advance Mode with Always Active as the Sequence Control Source and Synchronous Restart Controlled by Line 1 Basler scout GigE 251 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 5 2 2 Operation with an Input Line as Sequence Control Source Operating the Sequencer When the Line 1 or Line 2 sequence control source is selected the advance from one sequence set to the next is controlled according to the states of input line 1 or input line 2 The advance proceeds in ascending sequence set index numbers as frame start triggers are received explanations however apply equally well to Line 2 as the sequence control This section assumes that Line 1 is selected as the sequence control source All source The following use case see also Figure 76 illustrates the operation of the sequencer in controlled sequence advance mode with Line 1 selected as the sequence control source The camera advances from one sequence set to the next in ascending sequence set index numbers After one sequence set cycle is complete another one starts The sequence set advance is controlled by the states of Line 1 Line 1 is not set for invert In this use case the Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the available sequence set index numbers range from 0 thr
356. r both normal and mirror images Depending on whether or not the reverse X feature is enabled an Image AOI will display different images and an Auto Function AOI will refer to different image contents AOls used for the function feature will behave analogously to standard AOls The positions of the AOls relative to the sensor will not change For more information about auto functions see Section 12 9 on page 283 Basler scout GigE 275 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Setting Reverse X You can enable or disable the reverse X feature by setting the ReverseX parameter value You can set the parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter value Enable reverse X Camera ReverseX SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameter For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 276 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 8 Luminance Lookup Table 12 8 1 Lookup Table All Models Except scA750 60 SCA750 60 gm gc For information about scA750 60 gm gc cameras see The information in this section applies to all camera models except the Section 12 8 2 on page 280
357. r initial design in process 7 1 General Description of the Connectors The camera is interfaced to external circuitry via connectors located on the back of the housing An 8 pin RJ 45 jack used to provide a 100 1000 Mbit s Ethernet connection to the camera This jack includes a green LED and a yellow LED that indicate the state of the network connection A 12 pin receptacle used to provide access to the camera s I O lines and to provide power to the camera The drawing below shows the location of the two connectors and the LEDs 12 pin 8 pin Receptacle RJ 45 Jack Green LED Yellow LED Fig 36 Camera Connectors and LED Basler scout GigE 75 Physical Interface AWO0001 1918000 7 2 Camera Connector Types Connection Numbering and Assignments 7 2 1 Pin Numbering Fig 37 Pin Numbering for the 12 pin Receptacle 7 2 2 8 pin RJ 45 Jack The 8 pin RJ 45 jack provides Ethernet access to the camera Pin assignments adhere to the Ethernet standard The recommended mating connector is any standard 8 pin RJ 45 plug Cables terminated with screw lock connectors are available from Basler Contact your Basler sales representative to order cable assemblies To ensure that you order cables with the correct connectors note the vertical orientation of the screws before order
358. r is basically an extra pool of resends that the camera can use in unusual situations The Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation parameter is a multiplier used to set the maximum number of resends that can be held in the accumulator pool For example assume that the current bandwidth reserve setting for your camera is 5 and that this reserve is large enough to allow up to 5 packet resends during a frame period Also assume that the Bandwidth Reserve Accumulation parameter is set to 3 With these settings the accumulator pool can hold a maximum of 15 resends i e the multiplier times the maximum number of resends that could be transmitted in a frame period Note that with these settings 15 will also be the starting number of resends within the accumulator pool The chart on the next page and the numbered text below it show an example of how the accumulator would work with these settings The chart and the text assume that you are using an external trigger to trigger image acquisition The example also assumes that the camera is operating in a poor environment so many packets are lost and many resends are required The numbered text is keyed to the time periods in the chart Basler scout GigE 59 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00011918000 Time Period 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lo 1 11 1 1 1 1 FA amp TIFA amp TIIFA amp T FA amp T FA amp TIIFA amp T FA amp TIIFA amp T
359. r more information about compatible Intel chipsets see the nstallation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with pylon for Windows AW000611 The performance driver uses two distinct resend mechanisms to trigger resend requests for missing packets The threshold resend mechanism The timeout resend mechanism The mechanisms are independent from each other and can be used separately However for maximum efficiency and for ensuring that resend requests will be sent for all missing packets we recommend using both resend mechanisms in a specific optimized combination as provided by the parameter default values The performance driver s parameter values determine how the resend mechanisms act and how they relate to each other You can set the parameter values by using the pylon Viewer or from within your application software by using the pylon API The threshold resend mechanism precedes the timeout resend mechanism This ensures that a resend request is sent for every missing packet even at very high rates of arriving packets D The parameter default values will provide for the following The timeout resend mechanism will be effective for those missing packets that were not resent after the first resend request We strongly recommend using the default parameter settings Only users with the necessary expertise should change the default parameter values The Basler performance driver uses a receive window to check the st
360. r the Width and Height parameters The code snippets also illustrate setting the X Offset Y Offset Width and Height parameter values As an example Auto Function AOI is selected 288 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Standard Features Select the appropriate auto function AOI for gain auto and exposure auto control Currently auto function AOI 1 is predefined to gather the pixel data needed for gain auto and exposure auto control Set the posi Camera AutoFunc Camera AutoFunc Camera AutoFunc Camera AutoFunc Camera AutoFunc tion and size of the auto function AOI tionAOISelector SetValue AutoFunctionAOISelector AOI1 tionAOIOffsetX SetValue O tionAOIOffsetY SetValue 0 tionAOIWidth SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIWidth GetMax tionAOIHeight SetValue Camera AutoFunctionAOIHeight GetMax For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the 12 9 1 3 Using Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters an Auto Function To use an auto function carry out the following steps c NOCOX Ur de Co o c Select an Auto Function AOI Assign the auto function you want to use to the selected Auto Function AOI Unassign the auto function you want to use from the other Auto Function AOI Set the position and size of the Auto Function AOI If necessary set the lower and upper limits for the
361. r width exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering Trigger width exposure is especially useful if you intend to vary the length of the exposure time for each captured frame ExASTrig Signal Period Exposure ExASTrig Signal Fig 53 Trigger Width Exposure with Rising Edge Triggering When you operate the camera in trigger width exposure mode you must use the camera s exposure time parameters to set an exposure time This parameter setting will be used by the camera to operate the Trigger Ready signal You should adjust the exposure setting to represent the shortest exposure time you intend to use For example assume that you will be using trigger width exposure and that you intend to use the ExASTrig signal to vary the exposure time in a range from 3000 us to 5500 us In this case you would use the exposure setting to set the exposure time to 3000 us If you are using the trigger width exposure mode and the camera is operating with overlapped exposures there is something you must keep in mind If the action of the ExASTrig signal would end the current exposure while readout of the previously acquired image is still taking place the camera will automatically continue the exposure until readout of the previous image is complete This situation is illustrated in Figure 54 for rising edge operation On the first cycle of the ExASTrig signal shown in the figure the signal rises and falls while readout is taking place Norm
362. rame Rate Abs parameter see Section 9 5 1 1 on page 115 and for information about setting the parameter see Section 9 5 1 3 on page 117 Basler scout GigE 145 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Use Case Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger Off The acquisition start trigger is on and the acquisition start trigger source is set to input line 1 The user must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to input line 1 to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the acquisition frame count is set to 3 the camera will re enter the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status after 3 frames have been acquired The frame start trigger is off The camera will generate frame start trigger signals internally with no action by the user Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger On Trigger Source for the acquisition start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the acquisition start trigger Rising Edge Acquisition Frame Count 3 Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger Off atrigger signal generated by the camera internally a trigger signal applied by the user ESSE camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal Ee frame exposure and readout _ frame transmission Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Comm
363. raw values the duration time will be determined by a combination of two elements The first element is the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter and the second element is the Timer Duration Time Base The duration time is the product of these two elements Duration Time Timer Duration Raw Parameter Value x Timer Duration Time Base By default the Timer Duration Time Base is fixed at 1 us Typically the duration time is adjusted by setting only the Timer Duration Raw parameter value The Timer Duration Raw parameter value can range from 1 to 4095 So if the value is set to 100 for example the timer duration will be 100 x 1 us or 100 us To set the duration for a timer Use the Timer Selector to select a timer Set the value of the Timer Duration Raw parameter You can set the Timer Selector and the Timer Duration Raw parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerDurationRaw SetValue 100 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Changing the Duration Time Base By default the Timer Duration Time Base is fixed at 1 us and the timer duration is normally adjusted by setti
364. re time than processing the Basic camera description file Accordingly processing the Basic camera description file requires a shorter period to elapse until the camera features are available for use In order to make the camera features sooner available after the initial start of the camera the camera is configured by the factory to process the Basic camera description file Therefore some features will initially not be available If you want to use any of the features that are initially not available you must activate the camera description file providing all features If you will only use the smaller feature set we recommend not to change the factory setting to make the camera features sooner available For more information particularly about activating a camera description file and about the features not provided by the smaller camera description file see Section 12 19 on page 321 Basler scout GigE 41 Installation 42 AW00011918000 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters 3 Tools for Changing Camera Parameters 3 1 Basler pylon Camera Software Suite The Basler pylon Camera Software Suite is designed for use with all Basler cameras with the following interface types IEEE 1394a interface IEEE 1394b GigE or USB 3 0 It can also be used with newer Camera Link cameras The pylon Camera Software Suite offers reliable real time image data transport into the memory of your
365. re times and related settings in Section 9 7 1 on page 138 Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual Basler scout GigE 345 Revision History AW00011918000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00011910000 18 Jul 2008 Integrated information for the scA1300 32gm gc Expanded the voltage information in Section 1 2 on page 2 Updated the distances and related tolerances between the front of the lens mount and the sensor s photosensitive surface in Section 1 5 on page 24 Indicated the applicability of the mechanical stress test to cameras with standard housing and an extended duration of the broad band vibration test in Section 1 5 4 on page 31 Modified the voltage information in Section 1 9 on page 38 Removed voltage information from Table 7 in Section 7 2 3 on page 77 Added Section 7 4 3 on page 79 and notes in Section 7 4 2 on page 77 introducing the PLC cable Included detailed voltage information in Section 7 4 on page 80 Section 7 6 1 1 on page 81 and Section 7 6 2 1 on page 83 Modified the absolute maximum rating to 30 0 VDC in Section 7 6 1 2 on page 82 and Section 7 6 2 2 on page 83 Added a note relating to the debouncer in Section 9 12 on page 161 Updated the black level feature description and the Black Level Raw parameter range for the scA1400 30 in Section 12 2 on page 226 Corrected the minimum value for the white balance ratio in Section on page 227 Corrected the name of
366. rection function will have on the colors output by the camera The parameter setting is a floating point value that can range from 0 to 1 When the parameter value is set to 0 matrix correction will have no effect When the value is set to 1 matrix correction will have its maximum effect As an alternative the Color Transformation Matrix Factor parameter value can be entered as an integer value on a scale ranging from 0 to 65536 This integer range maps linearly to the floating point range with 0 being equivalent to 0 and 65536 being equivalent to 1 The integer values can be entered using the Color transformation Matrix Factor Raw parameter When the Light Source Selector parameter is set to off or custom the Color Transformation Matrix Factor parameter will not be available Setting Matrix Color Transformation You can set the Processed Raw Enable Color Transformation Selector and Light Source Selector parameter values from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API In this example we assume that you want to set your camera for Bayer BG 8 output and therefore you must set the Processed Raw Enable parameter value to enabled The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Set the camera for Bayer BG8 pixel data output format Camera PixelFormat SetValue PixelFormat BayerBG8 Because the camera is set for a Bayer output format the Processed Raw Enabled para
367. refore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be high and therefore the sequence cycle is restarted Input line 1 is found to be high but this has no significance Synchronous restart has priority over the sequence set advance control The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Another sequence set cycle has started When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trig
368. rements and Precautions Relative Response 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 12 scA640 74gc Spectral Response Relative Response 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 13 scA640 120gc Spectral Response Basler scout GigE 19 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Quantum Efficiency 96 350 450 550 650 750 850 950 1050 Wave Length nm Fig 14 scA750 60gc Spectral Response o o c o a o oO cc o cc 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 15 scA780 54gc Spectral Response 20 AW00011918000 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 0 0 9 F 0 8 g x 0 7 7 2 A Relative Response e oa aatto ae ge o o geen Ja le ene Le s weit 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 16 scA1000 30gc Spectral Response Relative Response 0 0 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 Wave Length nm Fig 17 scA1300 32gc Spectral Response Basler scout GigE 21 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Relative Response 0 0 400 450 500 550 600 650 700
369. rite the ResendTimeout parameter StreamGrabber ResendTimeout SetValue 2 Write the ResendRequestResponseTimeout parameter StreamGrabber ResendRequestResponseTimeout SetValue 2 Write the MaximumNumberResendRequests parameter StreamGrabber MaximumNumberResendRequests SetValue 25 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Note that the performance driver parameters will only appear in the viewer if the performance driver is installed on the adapter to which your camera is connected For more information about the pylon Viewer see the nstallation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with pylon for Windows AWO00061 1 Basler scout GigE 53 Basler Network Drivers and Parameters AWO001 1918000 Adapter Properties When the Basler Performance driver is installed it adds a set of advanced properties to the network adapter These properties include Max Packet Latency A value in microseconds that defines how long the adapter will wait after it receives a packet before it generates a packet received interrupt Max Receive Inter packet Delay A value in microseconds that defines the maximum amount of time allowed between incoming packets Maximum Interrupts per Second Sets the maximum number of interrupts per second that the adapter will generate Networ
370. rk adapter packet size 66 network drivers seesssssessss 45 network parameter sseeeee 65 network performance 65 network switch packet size 66 non sequence parameter 237 O optical size of the sensor 2 4 6 8 10 output line voltage requirements 83 output lines configuring sssseseeeeeses 89 electrical characteristics 83 IDVerter ai detecte 91 response time esssessss 85 voltage requirements 83 over triggering seeeeeesesss 131 overlapped exposure 149 151 P packet size Camera RN 66 network adapter ssssss 66 network switch ssssessse 66 packet size parameter 57 packet timeout parameter 46 51 58 parameter sets explained seeeesssss 315 parameter sets saving 316 parameters loaded at startup 320 payload size parameter 57 356 AW00011918000 performance driver sssssuss 45 pin assignments ceee 77 pin numbering eeeeeeeeeeee 76 pixel data formats ssssse 193 RGB 8 packed
371. rt and Stop Commands and the Acquisition Mode The Acquisition Start command prepares the camera to acquire frames The camera cannot acquire frames unless an Acquisition Start command has first been executed A parameter called the Acquisition Mode has a direct bearing on how the Acquisition Start command operates If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to single frame you can only acquire one frame after executing an Acquisition Start command When one frame has been acquired the Acquisition Start command will expire Before attempting to acquire another frame you must execute a new Acquisition Start command If the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous frame an Acquisition Start command does not expire after a single frame is captured Once an Acquisition Start command has been executed you can acquire as many frames as you like The Acquisition Start command will remain in effect until you execute an Acquisition Stop command Once an Acquisition Stop command has been executed the camera will not be able to acquire frames until a new Acquisition Start command is executed Acquisition Start Trigger The acquisition start trigger is essentially an enabler for the frame start trigger The acquisition start trigger has two modes of operation off and on If the Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required acquisition start trigger signals internally and you do n
372. s the camera automatically calculates the earliest moment that it is safe to trigger each new acquisition The trigger ready signal will go high when it is safe to trigger an acquisition will go low when the acquisition has started and will go high again when it is safe to trigger the next acquisition see Figure 63 The camera calculates the rise of the trigger ready Basler scout GigE 155 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 signal based on the current exposure time parameter setting the current size of the area of interest and the time it will take to readout the captured pixel values from the sensor The trigger ready signal is especially useful if you want to run the camera at the maximum acquisition frame capture rate for the current conditions If you monitor the trigger ready signal and you begin acquisition of each new image immediately after the signal goes high you will be sure that the camera is operating at the maximum acquisition frame rate for the current conditions Signal goes high Signal goes low Signal goes high Signal goes low at earliest safe when exposure at earliest safe when exposure moment to trigger for acquisition moment to trigger for acquisition acquisition N 1 N 1 begins acquisition N 2 N 2 begins ae TrigRdy Signal Image Acquisition N Image Acquisition N 1 Image Acquisition N 2 Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Exposure Readout Fig 64 Trigger Ready Signal Y
373. s format the Y component is transmitted for each pixel but the U and V components are only transmitted for every second pixel The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera P the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bo the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Bo Y value for Po B4 U value for Po Bo Y value for P B3 V value for Po B4 Y value for Po Bs U value for Ps Bg Y value for P4 B V value for Po Bg Y value for P4 Bg U value for P4 Bio Y value for P5 B41 V value for P4 e e e e e e Bm 7 Y value for Ph 3 Bm 6 U value for P 3 Bm 5 Y value for Ph 2 Bm 4 V value for Ph 3 Bm 3 Y value for Pu Bm 2 U value for Py Bm 1 Y value for P Bm V value for P4 Basler scout GigE 213 Pixel Data Formats AWO001 1918000 When a color camera is set for YUV 4 2 2 YUYV output the pixel data output for the Y component is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The range of data values for the Y component and the corresponding indicated signal levels are shown below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 e e e e e e 0x01 1 0x00 0 The pixel data output for the U component or the V component is 8 bit data of the straight binary type The range of data values for
374. scout GigE 65 Network Related Camera Parameters and Managing Bandwidth AW00011918000 CPU interrupts to a low value If possible also set the parameter for speed and duplex to auto Contact Basler technical support if you need further assistance Step 2 Set the Packet Size parameter on each camera as large as possible Using the largest possible packet size has two advantages it increases the efficiency of network transmissions between the camera and the PC and it reduces the time required by the PC to process incoming packets The largest packet size setting that you can use with your camera is determined by the largest packet size that can be handled by your network The size of the packets that can be handled by the network depends on the capabilities and settings of the network adapter you are using and on capabilities of the network switch you are using Unless you have already set the packet size for your network adapter during the installation of the Basler pylon software check the documentation for your adapter to determine the maximum packet size sometimes called frame size that the adapter can handle Many adapters can handle what is known as jumbo packets or jumbo frames These are packets with a maximum size of 16 kB Once you have determined the maximum size packets the adapter can handle make sure that the adapter is set to use the maximum packet size Next check the documentation for your network switch and determ
375. sequence sets Disable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false Set the Auto sequence advance mode Camera SequenceAdvanceMode SetValue SequenceAdvanceMode Auto Set the total number of sequence sets Camera SequenceSetTotalNumber SetValue 2 Select sequence set with index number 0 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 0 Set up the first acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Set the number of sequence set uses Camera SequenceSetExecutions SetValue 1 Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute Select sequence set with index number 1 Camera SequenceSetIndex SetValue 1 Set up the second acquisition scenario lighting object position etc and adjust the camera parameters for the best image quality Set the number of sequence set uses Camera SequenceSetExecutions SetValue 4 Store the sequence parameter values from the active set in the selected sequence set Camera SequenceSetStore Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 246 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features 12 5 2 Controlled Sequence Advance Mode When the controlled sequence advance mode is selected the advance from one seque
376. set for the RGB 8 Packed pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of red 8 bits of green and 8 bits of blue data per pixel The pixel data result from demosaicing the raw data read out of the sensor For each pixel the raw data were either red or green or blue data due to the presence of a Bayer filter on the sensor For more information about the Bayer filter see Section 11 3 1 on page 201 When a color camera is set for the RGB 8 Packed pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of red data 8 bits of green data and 8 bits of blue data for each pixel in the acquired frame The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for RGB 8 Packed output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera P the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bo the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Pixel Data Bits Byte Pixel Data Bits Bo RPy 7 0 B GP 7 0 e e B BPy 7 0 Bm 5 RP 7 0 B3 RP 7 0 Bm 4 GPQ4 7 0 B GP 7 0 Bm 3 B P 4 7 0 Bs BP 7 0 Bm 2 RP 7 0 e Bm 1 GP 7 0 Bm B Ph 7 0 With the camera set for RGB 8 Packed the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below
377. sition Mode Legacy and Standard Mode Executing an Acquisition Start command prepares the camera to acquire frames You must execute an Acquisition Start command before you can begin acquiring frames Executing an Acquisition Stop command terminates the camera s ability to acquire frames When the camera receives an Acquisition stop command If the camera is not in the process of acquiring a frame its ability to acquire frames will be terminated immediately If the camera is in the process of acquiring a frame the frame acquisition process will be allowed to finish and the camera s ability to acquire new frames will be terminated The camera s Acquisition Mode parameter has two settings single frame and continuous The use of Acquisition Start and Acquisition Stop commands and the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter setting are related If the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter is set for single frame after an Acquisition Start command has been executed a single frame can be acquired When acquisition of one frame is complete the camera will execute an Acquisition Stop command internally and will no longer be able to acquire frames To acquire another frame you must execute a new Acquisition Start command If the camera s Acquisition Mode parameter is set for continuous frame after an Acquisition Start command has been executed frame acquisition can be triggered as desired Each time a frame trigger is applied while the camera is i
378. sler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 5 General Specifications Basler scout GigE 11 Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO001 1918000 1 3 Spectral Response for Mono Cameras The following graphs show the spectral response for each available monochrome camera model The spectral response curves excludes lens characteristics and light source characteristics 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 Relative Response 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Wave Length nm F g 1 scA640 70gm Spectral Response Spectral Response 12 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Relative Response Fig 2 scA640 74gm Spectral Response Relative Response Fig 3 scA640 120gm Spectral Response Basler scout GigE 1 0 0 9 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 0 8 0 7 0 6 y 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 1 0 500 600 Wave Length nm 700 800 900 1000 0 9 0 8 0 7 0 6 SJ 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 400 500 600 Wave Length nm 700 800 900 1000 13 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Quantum Ef
379. specified by the Gev Timestamp Tick Frequency The counter starts at camera reset or at power off on any of the other chunk feature Making the chunk mode inactive disables all chunk The chunk mode must be active before you can enable the time stamp feature or features To enable the time stamp chunk Use the Chunk Selector to select the Time Stamp chunk Use the Chunk Enable parameter to set the value of the chunk to true Once the time stamp chunk is enabled the camera will add a time stamp chunk to each acquired image To retrieve data from a chunk appended to an image that has been received by your PC you must first run the image and its appended chunks through the chunk parser that is included in the pylon API Once the chunk parser has been used you can retrieve the time stamp information by doing the following Read the value of the Chunk Time Stamp parameter You can set the Chunk Selector and Chunk Enable parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API You can also run the parser and retrieve the chunk data The following code snippets illustrate using the API to activate the chunk mode enable the time stamp chunk run the parser and retrieve the frame counter chunk data make chunk mode active and enable Time Stamp chunk Camera ChunkModeActive SetValue true Camera ChunkSelector SetValue ChunkSelector Timestamp Camera ChunkEnable SetValue true retrieve
380. start exposure time and charge readout can be controlled by parameters transmitted to the camera via the Basler pylon API and the GigE interface There are also parameters available to set the camera for single frame acquisition or continuous frame acquisition Exposure start can also be controlled via an externally generated hardware trigger ExTrig signal The ExTrig signal facilitates periodic or non periodic acquisition start Exposure can be set for a preprogrammed period of time Accumulated charges are read out when the programmed exposure time ends At readout the accumulated charges are transported from the sensor s light sensitive elements pixels to the sensor s column buses see Figure 32 on page 72 The charges from the bottom line of pixels in the array are then moved into the analog processing section of the sensor As the charges move from the pixels to the analog processing section they are converted to voltages proportional to the size of each charge The voltages from the analog processing section are next passed to a bank of Analog to Digital converters ADCs Finally the voltages pass through a section of the sensor where they receive additional digital processing and then they are moved out of the sensor As each voltage leaves the sensor it passes through an FPGA and into an image buffer All shifting is clocked according to the camera s internal data rate Shifting continues in a likewise fashion until all image da
381. t 1 ripple 3 0W Q 12V 3 5 W Q 12V 3 5 W Q 12V I O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional 6 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification SCA1000 30 gm gc SCA1300 32gm gc scA1390 17gm gc Size L x W x H standard housing 90 head housing 73 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 91 65 mm x 44mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors and front module Not applicable 91 65 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors and front module Weight standard housing 90 head housing 160 g typical 160 g typical 160 g typical 180 g typical Not applicable 180 g typical Conformity CE RoHS GenlCam GigE Vision IP30 FCC The CE Conformity Declaration is available on the Basler website www baslerweb com Software Basler pylon 4 Camera Software Suite version 4 0 or higher Available for Windows in 32 and 64 bit versions and Linux x86 32 bit x86 64 bit ARM softfloat ARM hardfloat Table 3 General Specifications Basler scout GigE Specifications Requirements and Precautions AWO0001 1918000
382. t you were using when the problem occurred To make note of the parameters use Basler s pylon Viewer tool If you cannot access the camera please try to state the following parameter settings r a E 3 Image Size AOI Pixel Format Packet Size Exposure Time Frame Rate 11 Live image test image If you are having an image problem try to generate and save live images that show the problem Also generate and save test images Please save the images in BMP format zip them and send them to Basler technical support Basler scout GigE 341 Troubleshooting and Support AWO0001 1918000 342 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Revision History Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00011901000 13 Sep 2006 Initial release This release is a preliminary version of the document AW00011902000 06 Nov 2006 Added information for the newly released scA1000 20gm gc camera Updated all affected text and tables as appropriate Added information about the minimum exposure times setting to Section 9 7 on page 137 Corrected the numbering in the drawing in Section 12 4 on page 234 Added information about the luminance lookup table feature in Section 12 6 on page 271 AW00011903000 10 Jan 2007 Improved the content that describes network configuration and IP configuration Updated the installation procedures to reflect the pylon 0 9 release AW0001190400
383. t Cycle Sequencer Enabled Starts Again Disabled Frame Start Trigger Signal Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 1 BH H 4 H H o v 10 Ee eee ND nllo Time Fig 73 Sequencer in Auto Sequence Advance Mode 244 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Operating the Sequencer Using pylon You can use the pylon API to set the parameters for operating the sequencer in Auto sequence advance mode from within your application software The following code snippet illustrates enabling the sequencer and disabling the sequencer The example assumes that sequence sets were previously configured and are currently available in the camera s memory Enable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue true Disable the sequencer feature Camera SequenceEnable SetValue false You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters Configuring Sequence Sets Use the following procedure for populating sequence sets and making the related settings Make sure that the sequencer feature is disabled Set the Sequence Advance Mode parameter to Auto Set the Sequence Set Total Number parameter The maximum number is 64 Select a sequence set index number by setting the Sequence Set Index parameter The available numbers range from 0 to 63 When configuring sequence sets make sure to always use a continuous series of index num bers starting with index number 0 and ending with the Sequence Set
384. t mode of operation for exposure auto function Camera ExposureAuto SetValue ExposureAuto Continuous For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For general information about auto functions see Section 12 9 on page 283 For information about Auto Function AOIs and how to set them see Section 12 9 1 2 on page 285 For information about minimum allowed and maximum possible exposure time see Table 11 in Section 9 7 on page 137 Basler scout GigE 293 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 9 4 Auto Function Profile If you want to use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time you must also set the auto function profile The auto function profile specifies whether the gain or the exposure time will be kept as low as possible when the system is making automatic adjustments as it attempts to reach the target average gray value To use the gain auto function and the exposure auto function at the same time carry out the following steps 1 Setthe auto function profile to specify whether gain or exposure time will be minimized during adjustments 2 Setthe gain auto function to the continuous mode of operation 3 Setthe exposure auto function to the continuous mode of operation You can set the auto function profile from within your application software
385. t the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the activation mode for the selected trigger to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Apply a rising edge of the externally generated electrical signal ExASTrig signal to input line 1 on the camera Perform the required functions to parameterize the frame start trigger to trigger 5 frame starts and to retrieve 5 frames here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 113 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 5 The Frame Start Trigger in Standard Mode D This section only applies if the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode an
386. t the trigger input counter initially starts at 1 whereas the frame counter starts at 0 Therefore the trigger input count will always be ahead of the matching frame count by one if both counters were started at the same time and if an image was acquired for every trigger Whenever the counters restart after having reached 4294967295 they will both start another counting cycle at 0 Accordingly the difference between matching counts will always be one regardless of the number of counting cycles Note that if both counters were started at the same time and not reset since and if the trigger input counter is ahead of the matching frame counter by more than one the camera was overtriggered and not all external triggers resulted in frame acquisitions Frame Counter Reset Whenever the camera is powered off the frame counter will reset to O During operation you can reset the frame counter via software or via I O input line 1 or line 2 You can also disable the ability to perform a reset by setting the reset source to off By default the frame counter reset is disabled To use the frame counter reset feature Configure the frame counter reset by setting the counter selector to Counter2 and setting the counter event source to FrameStart Set the counter reset source to line 1 line 2 software or off Execute the command if using software as the counter reset source You can setthe frame counter reset parameter values from within your applica
387. t to send a frame start trigger while the parameter values of a sequence set are loaded into the active set During this period the camera will not wait for a frame start trigger and any frame start trigger will be ignored Make sure to only send a frame start trigger when the camera is in waiting for frame start trigger status For information about possibilities of getting informed about the waiting for frame start trigger status see the Acquisition Monitoring Tools section When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used Another sequence set cycle has started When the next frame start trigger is received the camera checks the active set and uses it for the image acquisition The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used While frame exposure and readout are in progress the sequencer feature is disabled The complete frame is transmitted and the cycling through sequence sets is terminated The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Standard Features Use Case Operation in controlled sequence advance mode with Disabled sequence control source Cycling through the sequence set cycles only due to one asynchronous advance and one asynchronous restart Enabling and disabling of the sequ
388. tImageSelector Testimagel For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 309 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Test Image 1 Fixed Diagonal Gray Gradient 8 bit The 8 bit fixed diagonal gray gradient test image is best suited for use when the camera is set for monochrome 8 bit output The test image consists of fixed diagonal gray gradients ranging from 0 to 255 If the camera is set for 8 bit output and is operating at full resolution test image one will look similar to Figure 92 The mathematical expression for this test image Gray Value column number row number MOD 256 4 Fig 92 Test Image One Test Image 2 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient 8 bit The 8 bit moving diagonal gray gradient test image is similar to test image 1 but it is not stationary The image moves by one pixel from right to left whenever a new image acquisition is initiated The test pattern uses a counter that increments by one for each new image acquisition The mathematical expression for this test image is Gray Value column number row number counter MOD 256 310 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Test Image 3 Moving Diagonal Gray Gradient 12 bit The 12 b
389. ta has been read out of the sensor The pixel data leaves the image buffer and passes back through the FPGA to an Ethernet controller where it is assembled into data packets The packets are then transmitted via an Ethernet network to a network adapter in the host PC The Ethernet controller also handles transmission and receipt of control data such as changes to the camera s parameters The image buffer between the sensor and the Ethernet controller allows data to be read out of the sensor at a rate that is independent of the data transmission rate between the camera and the host computer This ensures that the data transmission rate has no influence on image quality Basler scout GigE 73 Camera Functional Description Pixel Array i Analog Processing i CMOS Sensor ADCs Digital Processing Fig 34 CMOS Sensor Architecture Control AO Gain Black Level 24 MB Image Buffer Micro Control Controller Fig 35 Camera Block Diagram 74 Control Data Digitized Pixel Data e g ExpActive TrigRdy Ethernet Controller image Data and Control Data AW 0001 1918000 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Physical Interface 7 Physical Interface This chapter provides detailed information such as pinouts and voltage requirements for the physical interface on the camera This information will be especially useful during you
390. tart Trigger Mode 2 On susseessssse 127 9 6 4 3 Setting the Acquisition Start Trigger Mode and Related Parameters soccer eee ee eae he E ER ed E RR RE 128 9 6 2 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode lines zie ue RR RIA 3k ERR eee he RE 129 9 6 2 Introd ction wise so sest le RE Sa IE EE aes 129 Table of Contents AWO0001 1918000 9 6 2 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Software Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Software Trigger Signal 130 9 6 3 Using a Hardware Acquisition Start Trigger Legacy Mode 0 cee n 131 9 6 9 1 Introduction scs veo eR eee beats Fea eM 131 9 6 3 2 Exposure Modes 0c eee eee eere 132 9 6 8 3 Acquisition Start Trigger Delay 0 00020 134 9 6 8 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal 135 9 7 Exposure Time Parameters 0 00 e eet res 137 9 7 1 Setting the Exposure Time Using Raw Settings 0 138 9 7 2 Setting the Exposure Time Using Absolute Settings 139 9 8 Use Case Diagrams lsssseeeeeeee tees 140 9 9 Overlapping Exposure and Sensor Readout All Models Except scA750 60 149 9 9 1 Guidelines for Overlapped Operation 0 00 eee 150 9 10 Exposure Must Not Overlap Sensor Readout scA750 60 Only 151 9 11 Acquisition Monitoring Tools l i III 152
391. tart trigger signals and to apply them to input line 1 on the camera Assuming that this electrical device was based on a position encoder it could account for the speed changes in the conveyor and ensure that frame trigger signals are generated and applied when specific areas of the object are in front of the camera Once 3 frame start trigger signals have been received by the camera the number of frames acquired would be equal to the setting for the Acquisition Frame Count parameter and the camera would return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Any frame start trigger signals generated at that point would be ignored This sort of setup is useful because it will only acquire frames when there is an object in front of the camera and it will ensure that the desired areas on the object are imaged Transmitting images of the space between the objects would be a waste of bandwidth and processing them would be a waste of processor resources Basler scout GigE 147 Image Acquisition Control AW00011918000 Use Case Acquisition Start Trigger On and Frame Start Trigger On The acquisition start trigger is on and the acquisition start trigger source is set to software The user must execute an acquisition start trigger software command to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the acquisition frame count is set to 3 the camera will re enter the waiting for ac
392. tartup set appear later in the Configuration Sets section lost when the camera is reset or switched off If you are using the lookup table feature you must reenter the lookup table values after each camera startup or reset D The values for the luminance lookup table are not saved in the user sets and are Designating a Startup Set You can designate the default set or one ofthe user sets as the startup set The designated startup set will automatically be loaded into the active set whenever the camera starts up at power on or after a reset Instructions for designating the startup set appear below For more information about auto functions see Section 12 9 on page 283 12 18 1Saving User Sets Saving the current active set into a user set in the camera s non volatile memory is a three step process Make changes to the camera s settings until the camera is operating in a manner that you would like to save Set the User Set Selector to User Set 1 User Set 2 or User Set 3 Execute a User Set Save command to save the active set to the selected user set Saving an active set to a user set in the camera s non volatile memory will overwrite any parameters that were previously saved in that user set 316 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features You can set the User Set Selector and execute the User Set Save command from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet il
393. te the commands related to software acquisition start triggering with the camera set for continuous frame acquisition mode Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set the acquisition frame count Basler scout GigE 111 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a trigger software command to apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera Camera TriggerSoftware Execute Perform the required functions to parameterize the frame start trigger to trigger 5 frame starts and to retrieve 5 frames here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to Acquisition Start executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer applicati
394. tep of the process a demosaicing algorithm is performed to get RGB data for each pixel This is required because color cameras with a Bayer filter on the sensor gather only one color of light for each individual pixel The second step of the process is to convert the RGB information to the YUV color model The conversion algorithm uses the following formulas Y 0 30 R 0 59 G 0 11 B U 0417 R 0 383 G 0 50 B V 0 50R 0 41G 0 09B Once the conversion to a YUV color model is complete the pixel data is transmitted to the host PC 174 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Color Creation and Enhancement For complete details of the YUV data output formats see Section 11 3 on page 201 Mono Format Cameras equipped with a Bayer pattern color filter can output pixel data in the Mono 8 format When a color camera is set for Mono 8 the pixel values in each captured image are first demosaiced and converted to the YUV color model as described above The camera then transmits the 8 bit Y value for each pixel to the host PC In the YUV color model the Y component for each pixel represents a brightness value This brightness value can be considered as equivalent to the value that would be sent from a pixel in a monochrome camera So in essence when a color camera is set for Mono 8 it outputs an 8 bit monochrome image This type of output is sometimes referred to as Y Mono 8 For complete details of the Mono 8 format see Section 11 3 o
395. ter This parameter indicates the camera s current maximum allowed frame rate taking the AOI exposure time and bandwidth settings into account For more information about the acquisition mode see Section 9 2 on page 101 and Section 9 3 on page 105 Basler scout GigE 163 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 For more information about AOI Height settings see Section 12 4 on page 234 For more information about the Resulting Frame Rate parameter see Section 5 1 on page 57 Increasing the Maximum Allowed Frame Rate You may find that you would like to acquire frames at a rate higher than the maximum allowed with the camera s current settings In this case you must first use the three formulas described below to determine which factor is restricting the maximum frame rate the most Next you must try to make that factor less restrictive You will often find that the sensor readout time is most restrictive factor Decreasing the AOI height for the acquired frames will decrease the sensor readout time and will make this factor less restrictive If you are using normal exposure times and you are using the camera at it s maximum resolution your exposure time will not normally be the most restrictive factor on the frame rate However if you are using long exposure times or small areas of interest it is quite possible to find that your exposure time is the most restrictive factor on the frame rate In this case you should lower y
396. ters Related to Hardware Frame Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware frame start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the camera for single frame acquisition mode with the trigger mode for the acquisition start trigger set to off We will use the timed exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering In this example we will use a trigger delay Set the acquisition mode to single frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode SingleFrame Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set the trigger delay for one millisecond 1000us lms 0 001s double TriggerDelay us 1000 0 Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us Set for the timed exposure m
397. tes using the API to set the parameter Camera UserOutputValueAll SetValue 0x3 int64 t currentOutputState Camera UserOutputValueAll GetValue If you have the invert function enabled on an output line that is designated as user settable the user setting sets the state of the line before the inverter 8 2 3 Setting an Output Line for Invert You can set each individual output line to invert or not to invert the outgoing signal To set the invert function on an output line Use the Line Selector to select an output line Set the value of the Line Inverter parameter to true to enable inversion on the selected line and to false to disable inversion You can set the Line Selector and the Line Inverter parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Enable the inverter on output line 1 Camera LineSelector SetValue LineSelector Out1 Camera LineInverter SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 91 I O Control AW00011918000 8 2 4 Working with Timers The camera has four timer output signals available Timer 1 Timer
398. the Gamma parameter in Section 12 11 on page 263 The Gamma parameter was incorrectly referred to as the Gamma Raw parameter Included the Auto Functions section on page 283 and added related information in other parts of the manual Extended the description of the debouncer in Section 12 11 on page 298 Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual AW00011911000 22 Aug 2008 Updated contact addresses and phone numbers Official release of the auto functions AW00011912000 18 Feb 2009 Integrated information for the scA640 120gm gc Added a note to Section 1 7 on page 36 indicating that an application note regarding EMI ESD control is available The text in Section 2 on page 41 and Section 3 on page 43 has been revised to reflect that the pylon driver package is now downloadable from the website Added Section 13 2 on page 245 describing how to obtain an RMA number 346 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00011913000 16 June 2009 Updated sensor name Micron MT9V022 to Aptina MT9V022 in Section 1 2 on page 2 Removed the notes designating the information about the scA1300 32gm gc cameras as preliminary in Section 1 2 on page 2 Updated minimum allowed exposure times in Section 9 7 on page 137 Updated the constants C4 Co and C3 for scA1300 32gm gc cameras in Section 9 13 on page 163 Added the digital sh
399. the Trigger Delay Abs parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to set the parameter values Standard mode Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector Acquisition Start Trigger delay double TriggerDelay us 1000 0 1000us 1ms 0 001s Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us Select the frame start trigger 302 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Trigger delay double TriggerDelay us 1000 0 1000us 1ms 0 001s Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us Legacy mode Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Trigger delay double TriggerDelay us 1000 0 1000us 1ms 0 001s Camera TriggerDelayAbs SetValue TriggerDelay us For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 For more information about the standard and legacy image acquisition control modes see Section 9 1 on page 99 Basler scout GigE 303 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 14 Acquisition Status When
400. the camera D If you are triggering frame acquisition with an ExASTrig signal and you attempt to To avoid over triggering you should not attempt to acquire frames at a rate that exceeds the maximum allowed with the current camera settings For more information about setting the camera for hardware acquisition start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExASTrig signal see Section 9 6 3 4 on page 135 Basler scout GigE 131 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 For more information about the electrical requirements for input lines 1 and 2 see Section 7 6 1 on page 81 For more information about determining the maximum allowed frame rate see Section 9 13 on page 163 and Section 9 14 on page 167 9 6 3 2 Exposure Modes If you are triggering the start of frame acquisition with an externally generated acquisition start trigger ExASTrig signal two exposure modes are available timed and trigger width Timed Exposure Mode When timed mode is selected the exposure time for each frame acquisition is determined by the value of the camera s exposure time parameters If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExASTrig signal rises If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time starts when the ExASTrig signal falls The following figure illustrates timed exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering ExASTrig Signal Period
401. the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 99 This section presents an overview of the elements involved with controlling the acquisition of images Reading this section will give you an idea about how these elements fit together and will make it easier to understand the detailed information in the sections that follow Four major elements are involved in controlling the acquisition of images Acquisition start and acquisition stop commands and the acquisition mode parameter The acquisition start trigger The frame start trigger Exposure time control When reading the explanations in the overview and in this entire chapter keep in mind that the term frame is typically used to mean a single acquired image When reading the material in this section it is helpful to refer to Figure 45 on page 103 and to the use case diagrams in Section 9 8 on page 140 These diagrams present the material related to the acquisition start and stop commands the acquisition mode the acquisition start trigger and the frame start trigger in a graphical format Basler scout GigE 101 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Acquisition Sta
402. three frame start trigger signals it will return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status At that point you must apply a new acquisition start trigger signal to the camera to make it exit waiting for acquisition start trigger Frame Start Trigger Assuming that an acquisition start trigger signal has just been applied to the camera the camera will exit from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status Applying a frame start trigger signal to the camera at this point will exit the camera from the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status and will begin the 102 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control process of exposing and reading out a frame see Figure 45 on page 103 As soon as the camera is ready to accept another frame start trigger signal it will return to the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status A new frame start trigger signal can then be applied to the camera to begin another frame exposure The frame start trigger has two modes off and on If the Trigger Mode parameter for the frame start trigger is set to off the camera will generate all required frame start trigger signals internally and you do not need to apply frame start trigger signals to the camera The rate at which the camera will generate the signals and acquire frames will be determined by the way that you set s
403. tion When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 1 for sequence set 0 this sequence set is only used once and therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are loaded into the active set and are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 3 for sequence set 1 this sequence set is used a second time The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 3 for sequence set 1 this sequence set is used a third time The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the current Sequence Set Executions parameter value Because the Sequence Set Executions parameter was set to 3 for sequence set 1 this sequence set can not after three uses be used again in the current sequence set cycle Therefore the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the n
404. tion When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be low and therefore the sequence cycle is not restarted Input line 1 is found to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera checks the states of input lines 2 and 1 Input line 2 is found to be high and therefore the sequence cycle is restarted Input line 1 is found to be low but this has no significance Synchronous restart has priority over the sequence set advance control The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Another sequence set cycle has started Note that the state of input line 2 went high well ahead of the frame start trigger microsecond between setting the states of the input lines and the rise of the D To ensure reliable selection of a sequence set allow the elapse of at least one frame start trig
405. tion 3 1 1 on page 43 acquisition frame rate for a given AOI cannot be achieved This is true because the camera performs a complete internal setup cycle for each single frame and because it cannot be operated with overlapped exposure the scA750 60 does not allow overlapped exposure on principle To achieve the maximum possible acquisition frame rate set the camera for the continuous acquisition mode And for all models except scA750 60 also use overlapped exposure For more information about overlapped exposure see Section 9 9 on page 149 D When the camera s acquisition mode is set to single frame the maximum possible 106 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 4 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Standard Mode D This section only applies if the standard mode is enabled for image acquisition control When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will not be in standard mode but in legacy mode Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode For more information about standard mode and legacy mode and how to set them see Section 9 1 on page 99 The acquisition start trigger is used in conjunction with the frame start trigger to control the acquisition of frames In essence the acquisition start trigger is used as an enabler for th
406. tion Frame Count to 5 Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the activation mode for the selected trigger to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set the acquisition frame count Camera AcquisitionFrameCount SetValue 5 You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 110 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 4 4 Using a Software Acquisition Start Trigger Standard Mode 9 4 4 1 Introduction If the camera s Acquisition Start Trigger Mode parameter is set to on and the Acquisition Start Trigger Source parameter is set to software you must apply a software acquisition start trigger signal to the camera before you can begin frame acquisition A software acquisition start trigger signal is applied by Setting the Trigger Selector parameter to Acquisition Start Executing a Trigger Software command
407. tion about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 194 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Pixel Data Formats 11 2 Pixel Data Formats for Mono Cameras 11 2 1 Mono 8 Format Equivalent to DCAM Mono 8 When a monochrome camera is set for the Mono 8 pixel data format it outputs 8 bits of brightness data per pixel The table below describes how the pixel data for a received frame will be ordered in the image buffer in your PC when the camera is set for Mono8 output The following standards are used in the table Po the first pixel transmitted by the camera P the last pixel transmitted by the camera Bo the first byte in the buffer Bm the last byte in the buffer Byte Data Byte Data Bo Brightness value for Pg B4 Brightness value for P4 Bo Brightness value for Po Bm 4 Brightness value for P 4 B3 Brightness value for P3 Bm 3 Brightness value for P 3 B4 Brightness value for P4 Bm 2 Brightness value for Pj e e Bm4 Brightness value for P e e Bm Brightness value for Ph With the camera set for Mono8 the pixel data output is 8 bit data of the unsigned char type The available range of data values and the corresponding indicated signal levels are as shown in the table below This Data Value Indicates This Signal Level Hexadecimal Decimal OxFF 255 OxFE 254 e e e e e e 0x01 1 0x00 0 Basler sc
408. tion feature is the Color Transfor mation Selector parameter This parameter is used to select the type of transformation that will be performed before color correction for a specific light source is performed addressed by the second parameter For cameras equipped with a Bayer pattern filter on the imaging sensor RGB to RGB is the only setting available This setting means that the matrix color transformation process will not transform the red green and blue pixel values from the sensor into a different color space The second parameter associated with matrix color transformation is the Light Source Selector parameter The following settings are available for this parameter Off No alterations will be made to the pixel values Tungsten This setting will automatically populate the matrix with a pre selected set of values that will make appropriate corrections for images captured with tungsten lighting that has a color temperature of about 2500K to 3000K When you select this setting the camera will also Basler scout GigE 181 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 1918000 adjust the white balance settings and the color adjustment settings so that they are appropriate for a tungsten light source Daylight This setting will automatically populate the matrix with a pre selected set of values that will make appropriate corrections for images captured with daylight lighting that has a color temperature of about 5000K When you select this
409. tion is in progress You must not end the exposure time of the current image acquisition until readout of the previously acquired image is complete The camera will ignore any trigger signals that violate these guidelines When you are operating a camera with overlapped exposure and using a hardware trigger signal to trigger image acquisition you could use the camera s exposure time parameter settings and timing formulas to calculate when it is safe to begin each new acquisition However there is a much more convenient way to know when it safe to begin each acquisition The camera supplies a trigger ready signal that is specifically designed to let you trigger overlapped exposure safely and efficiently For more information about using the Trigger Ready signal with all camera models except the SCA750 60 gm gc see Section 9 11 3 on page 153 150 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control For more detailed guidelines about using an external trigger signal with the trigger width exposure mode and overlapped exposure refer to the application notes called Using a Specific External Trigger Signal with Overlapped Exposure AW000565 The application notes are available in the downloads section of the Basler website www baslerweb com 9 10 Exposure Must Not Overlap Sensor Readout scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 gm gc cameras For information about the other camera models see S
410. tion software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippets illustrate using the API to configure and set the frame counter reset and to execute a reset via software configure reset of frame counter Camera CounterSelector SetValue CounterSelector Counter2 Camera CounterEventSource SetValue CounterEventSource FrameStart select reset by signal on input line 1 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Linel Basler scout GigE 327 Chunk Features AWO001 1918000 select reset by signal on input line 2 Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Line2 select reset by software Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Software execute reset by software Camera CounterReset Execute disable reset Camera CounterResetSource SetValue CounterResetSource Off For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 328 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Chunk Features 13 4 Time Stamp The Time Stamp feature adds a chunk to each acquired image containing a time stamp that was generated when image acquisition was triggered The time stamp is a 64 bit value The time stamp is based on a counter that counts the number of time stamp clock ticks generated by the camera The unit for each tick is 8 ns as
411. tion start trigger acquisition status When a new ExASTrig signal is applied to line 1 the camera will again exit from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter the waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status 112 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control For more information about setting the camera for hardware acquisition start triggering and selecting the input line to receive the ExASTrig signal see Section 9 4 5 2 on page 113 For more information about the electrical requirements for input lines 1 and 2 see Section 7 6 1 on page 81 9 4 5 2 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware acquisition start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values required to enable rising edge hardware acquisition start triggering with line 1 as the trigger source Set the acquisition mode to continuous the acquisition mode must be set to continuous when acquisition start triggering is on Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Se
412. to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 1 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 2048 Shift by 2 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the output from the camera will include bit 9 through bit 0 ADC from the ADC along with 2 zeros as LSBs bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit 9 8 7 6 5 0 The result of shifting twice is that the output of Tg a ee the camera is effectively multiplied by 4 When the camera is set to shift by 2 the 2 least significant bits output from the camera for each pixel value will be 0 This means that the gray value scale will only include every 4th value for example 4 8 16 20 and so on A voz 7 Shifted Twice 7 If the pixel values being output by the camera s sensor are high enough to set bit 10 or bit 11 to 1 we recommend not using shift by 2 If you do nonetheless all bits output from the camera will automatically be set to 1 Therefore you should only use the shift by 2 setting when your pixel readings with a 12 bit pixel format selected and with digital shift disabled are all less than 1024 Shift By 3 When the camera is set to shift by 3 the output from the camera will include bit 8 ADC through bit 0 from the ADC along with 3 TTT Ne re eT ee zeros as LSBs ee The result of shifting 3 times is that the output of the camera is effectively multiplied m L S S by 8 i Shift
413. to be high and therefore the parameter values of the next sequence set are loaded into the active set The parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Basler scout GigE 253 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 Another sequence set cycle has started After frame exposure and readout are completed the sequencer feature is disabled The cycling through sequence sets is terminated The sequencer parameter values in the active set return to the values that existed before the sequencer feature was enabled Use Case Operation in controlled sequence advance mode with Line 1 as the sequence control source Cycling through the sequence set cycles according to the states of input line 1 not set for invert Enabling and disabling of the sequencer feature Setting Sequence Set Total Number 6 camera is waiting for a frame start trigger v camera selects a sequence set as the current sequence set current sequence set that is used for the image acquisition the sequence set index number is indicated frame exposure and readout frame transmission Sequencer Sequencer Enabled Disabled Signal Applied to Input Line 1 Advance Sequence Set Cycle Starts Again za zu c a ZA A uu wu Frame Start Trigger Signal v v v v v v v v v v HW B H 4 H H LO Ee eee 2 mi UN Time Fig 76 Sequencer in Controlled Sequence Advance Mode with
414. tor FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel Set the trigger activation mode to rising edge Camera TriggerActivation SetValue TriggerActivation RisingEdge Set for the trigger width exposure mode Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode TriggerWidth Set the shortest exposure time the shortest exposure time we plan to use is 1500 us Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 1500 Prepare for frame acquisition here Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Frame acquisition will start each time the externally generated frame start trigger signal ExFSTrig signal goes high Retrieve the captured frames Camera AcquisitionStop Execute You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 124 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 6 The Acquisition Start Trigger in Legacy Mode D This section only applies if the legacy mode is enabled for image acquisition control Use the legacy mode only if you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras not featuring the standard mode Otherwise we most strongly recommend enabling the standard mode When the camera is started for the f
415. tory Setup as the Default Set 0 0 317 12 18 3 Loading a Saved Set or the Default Set into the Active Set 319 12 18 4 Selecting the Startup Set iles 320 12 19 Camera Feature Set ren 321 13 Chunk Features i cies ieee oua bee eee rrr ee ee ee 323 13 1 What are Chunk Features 0 0 0 c ce tee ee 323 13 2 Making the Chunk Mode Active and Enabling the Extended Data Stamp 324 13 3 Frame Counter ouem aeaa ne ii Soaks eR Wile os oa ae ate READ 326 13 4 Time Stamp sess vetere bere Ra ad ere ree PRN atte ey tered ee ees Be BS 329 13 5 Trigger Input Counter llis 331 13 6 Line Status All det ER gx ewe bie e EX Kur E Re es 334 19 7 CRG Checksum s eee hl hi diwee bee ELI Aw REALE PRESS ERE VIAE 336 13 8 Sequence Set Index 0 cc tees 338 14 Troubleshooting and Support 000 eee 339 141 Tech Support Resources ronori c ee enn 339 14 2 Obtaining an RMA Number 0 0 n 339 14 3 Before Contacting Basler Technical Support saana aaaea 340 Revision HISIOTV eon oe oes LIE ees EIN ae th MM LU ELE 343 Indexer etch dox eL ULM ce e LEM UMS ELI Pe 353 vi Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions 1 Specifications Requirements and Precautions This chapter lists the camera models covered by the manual It provides the general specifications for those models and the basic requirements for using t
416. tput by the camera were no higher than 127 in an 8 bit mode you could increase the Gray Values 4095 255 12 bit 8 bit 12d 6 dB 0 dB 0 25 50 100 Sensor Output Signal 96 Fig 70 Gain in dB gain to 6 dB an amplification factor of 2 and thus reach gray values of 254 Basler scout GigE 219 Standard Features Setting the Gain All Models Except scA750 60 AW00011918000 D The information in this section applies to all camera models except the SCA750 60 gm gc For information about scA750 60 gm gc cameras see the next section D Gain can not only be manually set see below but can also be automatically adjusted The Gain Auto function is the automatic counterpart of the gain feature and adjusts the Gain Raw parameter value automatically For more information about auto functions see Section 12 9 1 on page 283 For more information about the Gain Auto function see Section 12 9 2 on page 290 The camera s gain is determined by the value of the Gain Raw parameter Gain Raw is adjusted on a decimal scale The minimum decimal setting varies depending on the camera model and on whether vertical binning is enabled see Table 16 The maximum setting depends on whether the camera is set for a pixel data format that yields 8 bit effective pixel depth Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 RGB 8 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed or yields an effective pixel depth of 12 bits per pix
417. ts the acquisition start trigger of the standard mode is not available in the legacy mode the frame start trigger of the standard mode is called acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode Recommendations for choosing the image acquisition control mode If you want to operate the camera together with previous cameras we recommend choosing the legacy mode In this mode triggering the camera will be exactly as for previous cameras Note also that you will not have to modify any code of your application If you do not want to operate the camera together with previous cameras we most strongly recommend choosing the standard mode For more information about acquisition start trigger in the legacy mode see Section 9 6 on page 125 For more information about acquisition start trigger and frame start trigger in the standard mode see Section 9 4 on page 107 and Section 9 5 on page 114 respectively For more information about determining the camera s firmware version see Section 12 17 on page 313 Basler scout GigE 99 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 When the camera is started for the first time after delivery from the factory the image acquisition control will be in legacy mode If you want the camera to start in standard mode set the camera to standard mode see below save the current parameter settings as a user set and designate this user set as the startup set For more information about saving
418. ts your normal operating conditions is extremely important We recommend including a standard color chart within your camera s field of view when you are adjusting the color enhancements This will make it much easier to know when the colors are properly adjusted One widely used chart is the ColorChecker chart also known as the Macbeth chart To start leave the Light Source Selector parameter at the default setting Begin capturing images and check the basic image appearance Set the exposure time and gain so that you are acquiring good quality images It is important to make sure that the images are not over exposed Over exposure can have a significant negative effect on the fidelity of the color in the acquired images Adjust the white balance An easy way to set the white balance is to use the once function on the camera s Balance White Auto feature Set the gamma value You should set the value to match the gamma on the monitor you are using to view acquired images When gamma is set correctly there should be a smooth transition from the lightest to the darkest gray scale targets on your color chart The sRGB gamma preset will give you good results on most CRT or LCD monitors Examine the colors and see if they are satisfactory at this point If not chose a different setting for the Light Source Selector parameter Try each mode and determine which one gives you the best color results The color fidelity should now be qu
419. tting the parameter s value to 1 disables vertical binning You can enable horizontal binning by setting the Binning Horizontal parameter Setting the param eter s value to 2 3 or 4 enables horizontal binning by 2 horizontal binning by 3 or horizontal bin ning by 4 respectively Setting the parameter s value to 1 disables horizontal binning You can set the Binning Vertical or the Binning Horizontal parameter value from within your application software by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the parameter values Enable vertical binning by 2 Camera BinningVertical SetValue 2 Enable horizontal binning by 4 Camera BinningHorizontal SetValue 4 Disable vertical and horizontal binning Camera BinningVertical SetValue 1 Camera BinningHorizontal SetValue 1 For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 12 6 1 Considerations When Using Binning Increased Response to Light Using binning can greatly increase the camera s response to light When binning is enabled ac quired images may look overexposed If this is the case you can reduce the lens aperture reduce the intensity of your illumination reduce the camera s exposure time setting or reduce the camera s gain setting When using vertical binning t
420. two typical lookup tables The first graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the output of the camera increases linearly as the sensor output increases The second graph is for a lookup table where the values are arranged so that the camera output increases quickly as the sensor output moves from 0 through 2048 and increases gradually as the sensor output moves from 2049 through 4096 4095 72 12 Bit 90 Camera Output 2048 1024 0 0 1024 2048 3072 4095 12 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 84 Lookup Table with Values Mapped in a Linear Fashion 4095 72 12 Bit Camera Output 2048 1024 0 0 1024 2048 3072 4095 12 Bit Sensor Reading Fig 85 Lookup Table with Values Mapped for Higher Camera Output at Low Sensor Readings 278 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features Using the Luminance Lookup Table to Get 8 Bit Output As mentioned above when the camera is set for a pixel format where it outputs 12 effective bits the lookup table is used to perform a 12 bit to 12 bit conversion But the lookup table can also be used in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion To use the table in 12 bit to 8 bit fashion you enter 12 bit values into the table and enable the table as you normally would But instead of setting the camera for a pixel format that results in a camera output with 12 bits effective you set the camera for a pixel format that results in 8 bit output such as Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 or YUV 4 2 2 Packed In t
421. type of camera setup is used frequently in intelligent traffic systems With these systems a typical goal is to acquire several images of a car as it passes through a toll booth A sensing device is usually placed at the start of the toll booth area When a car enters the area the sensing device applies an electrical signal to input line 1 on the camera When the electrical signal is received on input line 1 it serves as an acquisition start trigger signal and the camera exits from the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enters a waiting for frame trigger acquisition status In our example the next 3 frame start trigger signals internally generated by the camera would result in frame acquisitions At that point the number of frames acquired would be equal to the setting for the Acquisition Frame Count parameter The camera would return to the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and would no longer react to frame start trigger signals It would remain in this condition until the next car enters the booth area and activates the sensing device This sort of setup is very useful for traffic system applications because multiple frames can be acquired with only a single acquisition start trigger signal pulse and because frames will not be acquired when there are no cars passing through the booth this avoids the need to store images of an empty toll booth area For more information about the Acquisition F
422. u can replace the values in the active set with values from one of the sequence sets almost Basler scout GigE 237 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 instantaneously as images are acquired Using the sequencer feature has no effect on the camera s frame rate The sequence set currently defining the parameter values of the active set is also called the current set Active Set Non sequence Parameters pylon API pylon Viewer Sequence Parameters Set by the Current Set Sequence Enabl Load Store dps Sequence SetQ gt Sequence Set 1 Sequence Set2 S Sequence Set N 9 Sequence Sequence Set Advance Mode gt Index Number Fig 72 Sequence Feature Block Diagram 238 Basler scout GigE AWO001 1918000 Standard Features The following parameters are included in each sequence set Exposure Time Digital Shift Enable Acquisition Frame Rate LUT Enable Acquisition Frame Rate Color Transformation Value Width Color Transformation Matrix Factor Height Color Adjustment Enable X Offset Color Adjustment Hue Y Offset Color Adjustment Saturation Center X Chunk Mode Active Center Y Chunk Enable Binning Horizontal Timer Delay Binning Vertical Timer Duration Pixel Format Timer Delay Timebase Test Image Timer Duration Timebase Gain Sequence Set Executions Processed Raw Enable B
423. u have a problem with a Basler camera it is important that you collect several pieces of information before you contact Basler technical support Copy the form that appears on the next two pages fill it out and fax the pages to your local dealer or to your nearest Basler support center Or you can send an e mail listing the requested pieces of information and with the requested files attached Basler technical support contact information is shown in the title section of this manual 1 The camera s product ID 2 Thecamera s serial number 3 Network adapter that you use with the camera 4 Describe the problem in as much detail as possible If you need more space use an extra sheet of paper 5 _ If known what s the cause of the problem 6 When did the problem occur After start While running After a certain action e g a change of parameters 340 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Troubleshooting and Support 7 How often did does the problem Once Every time occur Regularly when Occasionally when 8 How severe is the problem Camera can still be used Camera can be used after take this action Camera can no longer be used 9 Did your application ever run r Yes rf No without problems 10 Parameter set It is very important for Basler technical support to get a copy of the exact camera parameters tha
424. uests will be sent for all missing packets With the default parameter values the resend request threshold is located very close to the front end of the receive window Accordingly there will be only a minimum delay between detecting a missing packet and sending a resend request for it In this case a delay according to the Resend Timeout parameter will not occur see Figure 30 In addition resend request batching will not occur DIAGRAM IS NOT DRAWN TO SCALE 1 2 3 5 7 9 10 11 pit i oy 995 996 997 998 999 1000 gE 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1011 P996 2997 2998 M EO i cQ 4 6 8 12 Fig 30 Combination of Threshold Resend Mechanism and Timeout Resend Mechanism 1 Stream of packets Gray indicates that the status was checked as the packet entered the receive window White indicates that the status has not yet been checked Receive window of the performance driver GN Threshold for sending resend requests resend request threshold The first resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera does not respond with a resend Sz Interval defined by the Resend Response Timeout parameter 9 The Resend Timeout interval expires and the second resend request for packet 1002 is sent to the camera The camera does not respon
425. uisition trigger software command must be executed to make the camera exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status Because the frame start trigger is set to on the user must apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera in order to begin each frame acquisition In this case we have set the frame start trigger signal source to input line 1 and the activation to rising edge so the rising edge of an externally generated electrical signal applied to input line 1 will serve as the frame start trigger signal Keep in mind that the camera will only react to a frame start trigger signal when it is in a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status A possible use for this type of setup is a conveyor system that moves objects past an inspection camera Assume that the system operators want to acquire images of 3 specific areas on each object that the conveyor speed varies and that they do not want to acquire images when there is no object in front of the camera A sensing device on the conveyor could be used in conjunction with a PC to determine when an object is starting to pass the camera When an object is starting to pass the PC will execute an acquisition start trigger software command causing the camera to exit the waiting for acquisition start trigger acquisition status and enter a waiting for frame start trigger acquisition status An electrical device attached to the conveyor could be used to generate frame s
426. um x 9 9 um 5 6 um x 5 6 um Max Frame Rate 70 fps 79 fps 122 fps at full resolution Mono Color All models available in mono or color Data Output Type Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit s or Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbit s Pixel Data Formats Mono Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Mono 16 DCAM Mono 16 Mono 12 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed Color Models Mono 8 DCAM Mono 8 Bayer BG 8 DCAM Raw 8 Bayer BG 16 DCAM Raw 16 Bayer BG 12 Packed RGB 8 Packed YUV 4 2 2 Packed DCAM YUV 4 2 2 YUV 4 2 2 YUYV Packed ADC Bit Depth 12 bits Synchronization Via external trigger signal or via software Exposure Control Programmable via the camera API Camera Power Requirements 12 VDC 5 to 24 VDC 5 lt 1 ripple 3 0W Q 12V 3 5 W Q 12V I O Ports 2 opto isolated input ports and 4 opto isolated output ports Lens Adapter C mount CS mount optional 2 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Specifications Requirements and Precautions Specification ScA640 70gm gc scA640 74gm gc ScA640 120gm gc Size Lx W x H standard housing 90 head housing 73 7 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without lens adapter or connectors 85 5 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm with lens adapter and connectors 91 65 mm x 44 mm x 29 mm without connectors and front module 97 mm x 44 mm x 41 8 mm with connectors
427. unction when binning is enabled monochrome cameras data and controls the image property of the binned image For more information about binning see Section 12 6 on page 271 12 9 1 1 Modes of Operation The following auto function modes of operation are available All auto functions provide the once mode of operation When the once mode of operation is selected the parameter values are automatically adjusted until the related image property reaches the target value After the automatic parameter value adjustment is complete the auto function will automatically be set to off and the new parameter value will be applied to the following images The parameter value can be changed by using the once mode of operation again by using the continuous mode of operation or by manual adjustment will not allow reaching a target value for an image property the auto function will try to reach the target value for a maximum of 30 images and will then be set to off If an auto function is set to the once operation mode and if the circumstances Some auto functions also provide a continuous mode of operation where the parameter value is adjusted repeatedly while images are acquired Depending on the current frame rate the automatic adjustments will usually be carried out for every or every other image The repeated automatic adjustment will proceed until the once mode of operation is used or until th
428. unter in Section 13 3 on page 326 Corrected the maximum value for the frame counter in Section 13 3 on page 326 Added the trigger input counter feature in Section 13 5 on page 331 Basler scout GigE 347 Revision History AW00011918000 Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00011914000 14 Apr 2011 Integrated the scA1600 28gm gc Updated European and U S phone numbers and U S contact address Indicated the availability of programming languages other than C for use with pylon in Section 1 9 on page 38 Added information about the relationship between the packet timeout and the inter packet delay in Section 4 1 on page 46 Section 4 2 on page 47 and Section 5 1 on page 57 Added information about the payload and non payload portion of the packet size in Section 5 1 on page 57 Changed the maximum allowed current for an output circuit to 50 mA in Section 7 6 2 2 on page 83 Modified input line assignment to take account of standard and legacy modes in image acquisition control in Section 8 1 1 on page 87 Added the Acquisition Trigger Wait signal to Section 8 2 1 on page 89 Re wrote Section 9 on page 99 to describe acquisition start trigger and frame start trigger and to take account of standard and legacy modes in image acquisition control Indicated that the maximum possible frame rate can not be achieved with the acquisition mode parameter set to single frame in Section 9 3 on page 105 Section 9 1
429. ups is optimized to make the camera perform well in a particular situation One of the setups is known as the color factory setup and the parameter settings contained in the color factory setup are optimized to produce good color images under the most common lighting conditions To make the parameters contained in the color factory setup become the ones that are actively controlling camera operation you must select the color factory setup as the default camera configuration set and then you must load the default configuration set into the camera s active configuration set When you do this it will Set the Gamma Selector parameter to SRGB Set the Processed Raw Enable parameter to enabled Set the Light Source Selector parameter to Daylight 6500 Sets the white balance parameters to values that are suitable for daylight lighting If you have badly misadjusted the settings for the color enhancement features on the camera it may be difficult to bring the settings back into proper adjustment Selecting the color factory setup as the default set and then loading the default set into the active set is a good way to recover from gross misadjustment of the color features For more information about the factory setups and about selecting and loading configuration sets see Section 12 18 on page 315 Basler scout GigE 191 Color Creation and Enhancement AWO001 1918000 192 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 11 Pixel Data Formats Pixel Data
430. ure in Section 12 10 on page 297 Added the Debouncer feature in Section 12 11 on page 298 Minor corrections throughout the manual 344 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 Revision History Doc ID Number Date Changes AW00011908000 15 Feb 2008 Included the Software Licensing Information section on page 34 Moved the guidelines for avoiding EMI and ESD problems to Section 1 7 on page 36 Included the warning related to code snippets in Section 1 9 on page 38 Transferred the following sections to the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API AW000611 Software and Hardware Installation Network Recommendations and Camera and Network Adapter IP Configuration Added the reference to the Installation and Setup Guide for Cameras Used with Basler s pylon API in Section 2 on page 41 Added the Improve the Network Performance step in Section 5 2 1 on page 63 Corrected the minimum value for the Timer Delay Raw parameter and indicated the minimum value for the Timer Delay Time Base Abs parameter in Section 8 2 4 2 on page 93 Minor modifications and corrections throughout the manual AW00011909000 05 Mar 2008 Integrated the scA1400 30gm gc Added information on the lens to which the mechanical shock tests apply in Section 1 5 4 on page 31 Added information on the input line transition threshold in Table 7 on page 77 Added the maximum exposu
431. ure start while the previous exposure is still in progress the trigger signal will be ignored and a Frame Start Overtrigger event will be generated This situation is illustrated below for rising edge triggering This rise in the trigger signal will be ignored and a Frame Start Overtrigger event will be generated ExFSTrig Signal EN Exposure duration determined by the exposure time parameters Fig 48 Overtriggering with Timed Exposure For more information about the Frame Start Overtrigger event see Section 12 15 on page 306 For more information about the camera s exposure time parameters see Section 9 7 on page 137 Basler scout GigE 121 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 Trigger Width Exposure Mode When trigger width exposure mode is selected the length of the exposure for each frame acquisition will be directly controlled by the ExFSTrig signal If the camera is set for rising edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExFSTrig signal rises and continues until the ExFSTrig signal falls If the camera is set for falling edge triggering the exposure time begins when the ExFSTrig signal falls and continues until the ExFSTrig signal rises Figure 49 illustrates trigger width exposure with the camera set for rising edge triggering Trigger width exposure is especially useful if you intend to vary the length of the exposure time for each captured frame ExFSTrig Signal Period Exposure
432. ures are enabled the camera actually develops some sort of information about each image that it acquires In these cases the information is added to each image as a trailing data chunk when the image is transferred to the host PC Examples of this type of camera feature are the Frame Counter feature and the Time Stamp feature When the Frame Counter feature is enabled for example after an image is captured the camera checks a counter that tracks the number of images acquired and develops a frame counter stamp for the image And if the Time Stamp feature is enabled the camera creates a time stamp for the image The frame counter stamp and the time stamp would be added as chunks of trailing data to each image as the image is transferred from the camera The features that add chunks to the acquired images are referred to as chunk features Before you can use any of the features that add chunks to the image you must make the chunk mode active Making the chunk mode active is described in the next section Basler scout GigE 323 Chunk Features AWO001 1918000 13 2 Making the Chunk Mode Active and Enabling the Extended Data Stamp Before you can use any of the camera s chunk features the chunk mode must be made active Making the chunk mode active does two things It makes the Frame Counter the Trigger Input Counter the Time Stamp the Line Status All the CRC Checksum and the Sequence Set Index chunk features available to be enabl
433. uses an inversion of the sensor values bright dark dark bright for int i 0 i lt 4096 i 8 Camera LUTIndex SetValue i Camera LUTValue SetValue 4095 i Enable the lookup table Camera LUTEnable SetValue true For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 279 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 12 8 2 Lookup Table scA750 60 Only The information in this section only applies to scA750 60 gm gc cameras For information about the other camera models see Section 12 8 1 on page 277 On these cameras pixel data is acquired at 10 bit depth Before the pixel values are transmitted out of the camera the two least significant bits are dropped and the pixel data is transmitted at 8 bit depth Normally the 10 bit pixel data reported by the sensor s ADCs is directly used to generate the 8 bit output transmitted by the camera The luminance lookup table feature lets you use a custom 10 bit to 10 bit lookup table to map the 10 bit output reported by the ADCs to 10 bit values of your choice The mapped 10 bit values will then be truncated and transmitted by the camera as 8 bit values The lookup table is essentially just a list of 1024
434. ut time is the most restrictive factor Decreasing the AOI height for the acquired frames will decrease the sensor readout time and will make this factor less restrictive If you are using long exposure times it is quite possible to find that your exposure time is making this factor the most restrictive In this case you should lower your exposure time You may need to compensate for a lower exposure time by using a brighter light source or increasing the opening of your lens aperture The frame transmission time will not normally be a restricting factor But if you are using multiple cameras and you have set a small packet size or a large inter packet delay you may find that the transmission time is restricting the maximum allowed rate In this case you could increase the packet size or decrease the inter packet delay If you are using several cameras connected to the host PC via a network switch you could also use a multiport network adapter in the PC instead of a switch This would allow you to increase the Ethernet bandwidth assigned to the camera and thus decrease the transmission time For more information about AOI settings see Section 12 4 on page 234 For more information on the settings that determine the bandwidth assigned to the camera see Section 5 2 on page 64 Formula 1 Calculates the maximum frame rate based on the sum of the exposure time plus the sensor readout time 1 Max F Exposure Time in us AGI Height
435. values however not every value in the table is actually used If we number the values in the table from 0 through 1023 the table works like this The number at location 0 in the table represents the mapped 10 bit value that will be used when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 0 The number at location 1 is not used The number at location 2 in the table represents the mapped 10 bit value that will be used when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 2 The number at location 3 is not used The number at location 4 in the table represents the mapped 10 bit value that will be used when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 4 The number at location 5 is not used The number at location 6 in the table represents the mapped 10 bit value that will be used when the sensor reports that a pixel has a value of 6 And so on As you can see the table does not include a mapped 10 bit output value for every pixel value that the sensor can report So what does the camera do when the sensor reports a pixel value that is between two values that have a mapped 10 bit output In this case the camera performs a straight line interpolation between the two nearest neighbors to determine the value that it should use For example assume that the sensor reports a pixel value of 5 In this case the camera would perform an interpolation between the values at location 4 and location 6 in the table The result of the interpolation w
436. ve no effect For more information about the Minimum Output Pulse Width feature see Section 12 12 on page 300 92 Basler scout GigE AW00011918000 I O Control 8 2 4 4 Setting the Trigger Source for a Timer To set the trigger source for a timer Use the Timer Selector to select timer 1 or timer 2 Set the value of the Timer Trigger Source parameter to exposure active This will set the selected timer to use the start of exposure to begin the timer You can set the Trigger Selector and the Timer Trigger Source parameter value from within your application software by using the pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the selector and the parameter value Camera TimerSelector SetValue TimerSelector Timerl Camera TimerTriggerSource SetValue TimerTriggerSource ExposureStart For detailed information about using the pylon API refer to the Basler pylon Programmer s Guide and API Reference You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 8 2 4 2 Setting a Timer Delay Time There are two ways to set the delay time for a timer by setting raw values or by setting an absolute value You can use whichever method you prefer to set the delay time Setting the Delay with Raw Values When the delay time for a timer is set using raw values the delay time will be determined by a combination of
437. vious use case The Sequence Set Total Number parameter was set to six Accordingly the available sequence set index numbers range from 0 through 5 The frame start trigger is set for rising edge triggering In addition Line 1 was selected as the source for controlling restart Line 1 is not set for invert Assuming that the camera is in the process of continuously capturing images the sequencer feature operates as follows When the sequencer feature becomes enabled the sequence set cycle starts The parameter values of the sequence set with sequence set index number 0 are loaded into the active set modifying the active set When a frame start trigger is received the camera automatically advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 1 are loaded into the active set and are used for the Basler scout GigE 249 Standard Features AWO001 1918000 image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 2 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received the camera advances to the next sequence set The parameter values of sequence set 3 are used for the image acquisition When the next frame start trigger was received input line 1 is found to be high Accordingly another sequence set cycle is started and the parameter values of sequence set 0 are used for the image acquisition Note that t
438. will generate acquisition start trigger signals internally with no action by the user The frame start trigger is on and the frame start trigger source is set to input line 1 The user must apply a frame start trigger signal to input line 1 to start each frame exposure Settings Acquisition Mode Continuous Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger Off Trigger Mode for the frame start trigger On Trigger Source for the frame start trigger Line 1 Trigger Activation for the frame start trigger Rising Edge a trigger signal generated by the camera internally a trigger signal applied by the user ZEE camera is waiting for an acquisition start trigger signal 7 camera is waiting for a frame start trigger signal frame exposure and readout frame transmission di DIT Acquisition Acquisition Start Stop Command Command Executed Executed Acquisition Start an i mn i Trigger Signal 2 a ee ose mmm omm mo eee ee ee mod ee ee e ek 2 Sigon Seri applied to line 1 Fig 56 Use Case 2 Acquisition Start Trigger Off and Frame Start Trigger On 144 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control Use Case 3 Acquisition Start Trigger On Frame Start Trigger Off Use case three is illustrated on page 146 In this use case the Acquisition Mode parameter is set to continuous The Trigger Mode parameter for the acquisition start trigger is set to on and the Trigger Mode
439. with software frame start trigger signals within the limits imposed by other parameter settings Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue false Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector FrameStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Software Set for the timed exposure mode Camera ExposureMode SetValue ExposureMode Timed Set the exposure time Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Execute an acquisition start command to prepare for frame acquisition Camera AcquisitionStart Execute while finished Execute a Trigger Software command to apply a frame start trigger signal to the camera Camera TriggerSoftware Execute Retrieve acquired frame here Camera AcquisitionStop Execute Note as long as the Trigger Selector is set to FrameStart executing a Trigger Software command will apply a software frame start trigger signal to the camera You can also use the Basler pylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters For more information about the pylon Viewer see Section 3 1 1 on page 43 Basler scout GigE 119 Image Acquisition Control AWO0001 1918000 9 5 3 Using a Hardware Frame Start Trigger Standard Mode 9 5 3 1 Introduction If the Trigger Mode parameter f
440. xel format in your application If you will be using a 12 bit pixel format make this check Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera for a 12 bit pixel format and no digital shift Check the output of the camera under your normal lighting conditions and note the readings for the brightest pixels If any of the readings are above 2048 do not use digital shift If all of the readings are below 2048 you can safely use the shift by 1 setting If all of the readings are below 1024 you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings If all of the readings are below 512 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 or 3 settings If all of the readings are below 256 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 3 or 4 settings If you will be using an 8 bit format make this check Use the pylon Viewer or the pylon API to set the camera for a 8 bit pixel format and no digital shift Check the output of the camera under your normal lighting conditions and note the readings for the brightest pixels If any of the readings are above 128 do not use digital shift If all of the readings are below 128 you can safely use the shift by 1 setting If all of the readings are below 64 you can safely use the shift by 1 or 2 settings If all of the readings are below 32 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 or 3 settings If all of the readings are below 16 you can safely use the shift by 1 2 3 or 4 settings 232 Basler scout GigE AWO001 191800
441. y using the Basler pylon API If your settings make it necessary you can also set the Trigger Source parameter The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Trigger Mode for the acquisition start trigger to on and the Trigger Source to input line 1 Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode On Set the source for the selected trigger Camera TriggerSource SetValue TriggerSource Linel The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the Acquisition Mode to continuous the Trigger Mode to off and the Acquisition Frame Rate to 60 Set the acquisition mode to continuous frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode Continuous Select the frame start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerMode Off Set the exposure time Camera ExposureTimeAbs SetValue 3000 Enable the acquisition frame rate parameter and set the frame rate Enabling the acquisition frame rate parameter allows the camera to control the frame rate internally Camera AcquisitionFrameRateEnable SetValue true Camera AcquisitionFrameRateAbs SetValue 60 0 Start frame capture Camera AcquisitionStart Execute For detailed in
442. ylon Viewer application to easily set the parameters 9 6 3 3 Acquisition Start Trigger Delay The trigger delay feature lets you specify a delay in microseconds that will be applied between the receipt of a hardware acquisition start trigger and when the trigger will become effective The trigger delay will not operate if the Trigger Mode parameter for acquisition start is set to off or if you are using a software acquisition start trigger For more information about the trigger delay feature and how to set it see Section 12 13 on page 302 134 Basler scout GigE AWO0001 1918000 Image Acquisition Control 9 6 3 4 Setting the Parameters Related to Hardware Acquisition Start Triggering and Applying a Hardware Trigger Signal You can set all of the parameters needed to perform hardware acquisition start triggering from within your application by using the Basler pylon API The following code snippet illustrates using the API to set the camera for single frame acquisition mode We will use the timed exposure mode with input line 1 as the trigger source and with rising edge triggering In this example we will use a trigger delay Set the acquisition mode to single frame Camera AcquisitionMode SetValue AcquisitionMode SingleFrame Select the acquisition start trigger Camera TriggerSelector SetValue TriggerSelector AcquisitionStart Set the mode for the selected trigger Camera TriggerMode SetValue TriggerM
443. you must apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera each time you want to begin a frame acquisition The Trigger Source parameter specifies the source signal that will act as the acquisition start trigger signal The available selections for the Trigger Source parameter are Software When the source signal is set to software you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by executing a Trigger Software command for the acquisition start trigger on the host PC Line 1 or 2 When the source signal is set e g to line 1 you apply an acquisition start trigger signal to the camera by injecting an externally generated electrical signal commonly referred to as a hardware trigger signal into physical input line 1 on the camera If the Trigger Source parameter is set to Line 1 or Line 2 you must also set the Trigger Activation parameter The available settings for the Trigger Activation parameter are Rising Edge specifies that a rising edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger Falling Edge specifies that a falling edge of the electrical signal will act as the acquisition start trigger For more information about using a software trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 9 4 4 on page 111 For more information about using a hardware trigger to control frame acquisition start see Section 9 4 5 on page 112 trigger Keep in mind that the camera will only react to

Basler scout

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents